Solatron FlowComputer - Man7951gas

7951 Gas Flow Computer
Operating Manual
Software version 511510
Solartron Mobrey Limited

158 Edinburgh Avenue,
Slough, Berkshire, SL1 4UE, UK
Issue: FC, July 2000

Part Number: HB511510
2000, Solartron
Solartron pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The

information contained in this document is, therefore, subject to change without notice.
To the best of our knowledge, the information contained in this document is accurate. However,
Solartron cannot be held responsible for any errors, omissions or inaccuracies, or any losses
incurred as result of them.
YEAR 2000 NOTICE

The 795x series of computers and application software, developed solely
by Solartron, are fully year 2000 compliant. The critical dates of 1/1/2000
and 29/2/2000 (for the leap year) are handled correctly.
OEM built applications developed for the 795x will work correctly
beyond the year 2000 as long as the date has not been truncated and
then used for elapsed time computation.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because Solartron is continuously improving its products, some of the
menus which appear on your instruments display may not be exactly
as illustrated and described in this manual. However, because the
menus are simple and intuitive, this should not cause any major
problems.
This manual is concurrent with embedded software version 511510, issue 4.40
Solartron Mobrey Limited
Solartron Inc.
158 Edinburgh Avenue,

Slough, Berkshire, SL1 4UE, UK
Tel: +44 (0)1753 756 600
Fax: +44 (0)1753 823 589
19408 Park Row, Suite 320

Houston, Texas 77084, USA
Tel: +1 281-398-7890
Fax: +1 281-398-7891
Email: sales@mobrey.com
Web: http://www.solartron.com
A Roxboro Group Company
Static precautions
Some parts of the instrument (such as circuit boards) may be damaged by static electricity.
Therefore, when carrying out any work which involves the risk of static damage to the instrument,
the instructions show the following notice:
While carrying out this procedure you must

wear an earthed wrist strap at all times to
protect the instrument against static shock.
At such times you must wear an earthed wrist-strap to protect the instrument.
Safety information
NOTE: This information applies only to those instruments which are mains-powered.
Electricity is dangerous and you risk injury or death if you do not disconnect the power supplies
before carrying out some of the procedures given in this manual. Whenever there is such a
hazard, the instructions show a notice similar to the following:
Electricity is dangerous and can kill.

Disconnect all power supplies before proceeding.
You must heed any such warnings and make sure that, before you go any further:
All power leads are un-powered.
All power leads are disconnected from the equipment which you are working on
unless the instructions tell you otherwise.
You obey any other common-sense precautions which may apply to your situation.
If you obey these sensible precautions you can work on the equipment in complete safety.
Battery-backed Memory notice

7951 and 7951 models manufactured since July 1998 feature an increased amount of
battery-backed memory.
The PCB Number and Status Number associated with this enhancement are as follows:79510502L (Status L or later):
79510502G (Status G or later):
As a result of that memory increase, it is essential that the Lithium Cell used for the battery
backup is installed at all times (other than during replacement). 7951/7951 units will not
power-up correctly if this battery is missing. (7955 and 7952 models are not affected)
If it is necessary to run the units without batteries for Intrinsic Safety reasons, then the battery
should be replaced with a shorting disk inserted in the battery holder. Please consult Solartron
for further advice.
Replace the battery when the "Low Battery" system alarm is indicated. The procedure is
explained in this manual. (See Chapter 14)
Contents
1.
About this manual
1.1
1.1
1.2
1.3
What this manual tells you

Who should use this manual
Software version covered by this manual
1.1
1.1
1.1
2.
Getting started
2.1
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.5
2.6
2.7
What this Chapter tells you

How to use this Chapter
7951 Inputs
2.3.1
Overview of 7951 inputs
2.3.2
Turbine (pulse) flowmeter inputs
2.3.3
Ultrasonic (pulse) flowmeter inputs
2.3.4
Orifice flowmeter inputs
2.3.5
mA-type temperature transmitter
2.3.6
PRT-type temperature transmitter
2.3.7
mA-type pressure transmitter
2.3.8
Gas density transducers (in a SAFE AREA)
2.3.9
Gas specific gravity transducers (in a SAFE AREA)
2.3.10
Status Input connections
7951 Outputs
2.4.1
Overview of 7951 outputs
2.4.2
Mechanical Output Connections
2.4.3
Chart Recorder Connections
2.4.4
Status Output Connections
Other 7951 connections
Where to find the 7951 connectors
If you need help ...
2.1
2.1
2.3
2.3
2.4
2.6
2.7
2.9
2.11
2.13
2.15
2.17
2.19
2.21
2.21
2.22
2.23
2.24
2.25
2.25
2.29
3.
About the 7951
3.1
3.1
3.2
Background
The 7951 Single-Stream Gas Flow Computer
3.2.1
Connections Support
3.2.2
Application Feature List
3.1
3.1
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
Physical description of the 7951

Communications
Typical installations
Checking your software version
3.4
3.4
3.5
3.6
2.4
4.
Installing the system
4.1
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
What this chapter tells you

Hazardous and non-hazardous environments
Installation procedure
Step 1: Drawing up a wiring schedule
Step 2: Unpacking the instrument
Step 3: Setting dip switches
Step 4: Fitting the 7951
Step 5: Making the external connections
Step 6: Earthing the instrument
Step 7: Connecting the power supply
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.6
4.6
4.7
5.
The keyboard, display and indicators
5.1
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10

The layout of the front panel
What the display shows
How the keys work
Using the keys to move around the menus
Using the keys to view stored data
Using the keys to edit information
The 795x character set
LED indicators
Summary of key functions
5.1
5.1
5.2
5.2
5.2
5.4
5.5
5.8
5.9
5.9
6.
The menu system
6.1
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5

What the menu system does
How the menu system works
A general example of part of a menu system
Conventions for menu diagrams in this manual
6.1
6.1
6.1
6.2
6.3
7.
Serial Communications and Networking
7.1
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
What this Chapter tells you

795x Communication Capabilities
MODBUS from the 795x point of view
Connecting the 795x to A MODBUS network
7.4.1
RS-232 connections
7.4.2
RS-485 (half duplex) connections
7.1
7.1
7.1
7.3
7.3
7.4
7.5
Configuring the 795x to be a MODBUS slave

7.5.1
Port configuration
7.5.2
High speed list configuration
7.6
7.6
7.7
7.6
Database access over A MODBUS network

7.6.1
Introduction
7.8
7.8
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.6.4
Database information type 1 : Data values

Database information type 2 : Data states
Database information type 3 : Reply size and type
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.7
7.8
7.9
Alarm logger access over a MODBUS network

High speed list access over a MODBUS network
Chromatograph access over a MODBUS network
7.9.1
Overview
7.9.2
Worked Example 1 (Arrangement Type 1)
7.9.3
Worked Example 2 (Arrangement Type 2)
7.12
7.15
7.18
7.18
7.20
7.25
8.
Alarms and Events
8.1
8.1
Alarms
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
8.1.7
8.1.8
8.1.9
Alarm types
Alarm indicators
How alarms are received and stored
Examining the Alarm Status Display and Historical Alarm Log
What the Alarm Status Display tells you
What the entries in the Historical Alarm Log tell you
Clearing all entries in the Historical Alarm Log
User-defined Alarms
Alarm message list
8.1
8.1
8.1
8.2
8.2
8.3
8.3
8.4
8.4
8.8
Introduction to 795x events

Event indicators
How events are received and stored
Examining the Event Summary and the Event log
What the Event Status Display tells you
What the entries in the Historical Event Log tell you
Clearing all entries in the Historical Event Log
8.12
8.12
8.12
8.12
8.13
8.13
8.14
8.15
8.2
Events
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
9.
Additional facilities
9.1
9.1
Feature: Data logging, Reporting and Archiving

9.1.1
Introduction
9.1.2
Statistical Information
9.1.3
Analysis of an archive
9.1.4
Configuration details
9.1.5
Operation details (Reporting)
9.1.6
Examples of data logging to archives
9.1
9.1
9.2
9.2
9.7
9.13
9.16
9.2
Feature: Printed Reports

9.2.1
Current report definition
9.2.2
Report Enhancements
9.19
9.19
9.20
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
Selecting units and data formats

Limits
Fallback values and modes
Units which the 795x can display
9.22
9.22
9.23
9.24
10.
Configuring using Wizards
10.1
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
Introduction to Wizards
Using Wizards
Quick-view Guide (Set-up Wizards)
Units Wizard Selection
10.1
10.1
10.3
10.4
11.
Configuring without using Wizards
11.1
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
What does this Chapter tell me?

Quick-find Index
A Structured approach to configuring
Reference Page Conventions
Reference Information
Live Inputs
Orifice Flow (ISO 5167-1)
Orifice Flow (AGA 3)
Turbine Flow
Ultrasonic Flow
Linear Flow
Ultrasonic Totalling
Totalling (Orifice/Turbine/Linear Flow)
Temperature
Pressure
Density
Base Density
Specific Gravity
Energy
Live Outputs
Special Equations
Passwords and Security
Multi-Page Multi-View
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.5
11.7
11.7
11.13
11.14
11.26
11.30
11.33
11.38
11.40
11.42
11.44
11.45
11.53
11.60
11.63
11.67
11.70
11.72
11.75
12.
Routine operation (data maps)
12.1
12.1
Viewing the data

12.1.1
Flow rates and Totals
12.1.2
Line density, Base density and Specific gravity
12.1.3
Temperature, Pressure and Energy
12.1.4
Smaller Topics
12.1
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
12.2
Checking the performance of the 795x

12.2.1
Health Check
12.5
12.5
12.3
Printed reports
12.3.1
Types of report
12.3.2
Printing a report
12.3.3
Some Typical Reports
12.8
12.8
12.8
12.10
12.4
Giving your 795X a tag number
12.11
13.
Routine maintenance and fault-finding
13.1
13.1
13.2
Cleaning the instrument

Fault-finding
13.1
13.1
14.
Removal and replacement of parts
14.1
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
14.10
Front panel assembly

Display
Switch panel
Processor board
Power supply board
Connector Board
Fuse
Back-up battery
Rear Panel Assembly
Mother Board
14.1
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.3
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
15.
Assembly drawing and parts list
15.1
15.1
15.2
What the drawing and parts list tells you

How to obtain spare parts
15.1
15.1
16.
HART, SMART and the 7951
16.1
16.1
16.2
16.3

Introduction to SMART and HART with the 7951
Connecting the 7951 to a HART network loop
16.3.1 7951 Electrical connections and impedance requirements
16.3.2 Frequency-shift keying
16.3.3 Cable choice and the 65s rule
16.1
16.1
16.3
16.3
16.4
16.4
16.4
Configuring the 7951 to use a HART network loop

16.4.1 Configuring by using the software wizard (recommended)
16.4.2 Configuring by using the menus
16.6
16.6
16.8
16.5
16.6
Post configuration - viewing HART data

SMART units of measurement
16.10
16.10
Appendices
Appendix A
Glossary
A.1
Appendix B
Blank wiring schedule
B.1
Appendix C
Technical data for the 7951
C.1
What this Appendix contains

External connections
Maximum number of external connections
Specification
Connections
Earthing
C.1
C.1
C.3
C.4
C.9
C.11
Appendix D
Units and conversion factors
D.1
Appendix E
Data tables
E.1
The tables
Equations used to derive data tables
E.1
E.5
Appendix F
Calculations and theory
F.1
Appendix G
Certificate of Conformity
G.1
C.1
C.2
C.3
C.4
C.5
C.6
E.1
E.2
Quick-start Guide
Quick-start Guide
If you want to...
Read....
Find out what's in this manual
Contents pages
Get started quickly
Chapter 2
Get an overview of the instrument
Chapter 3 and Appendix C
Understand how the menu system works
Chapter 6
Make connections to the instrument
Chapters 2, 4, 7 and Appendix C
Install the instrument and set it up
Chapters 2, 4, 10 and 11
Set-up Serial Communications
Chapter 7 + Addendums 7A and 7B
Operate the instrument
Chapters 5 - 9 and 12
Carry out routine maintenance
Chapter 13
Trace and repair faults
Chapters 13 and 14
Remove and replace parts
Chapters 14 and 15
Set-up HART Communications
Chapter 16
Understand what a term means
Appendix A
795x Op Man / BD
Page Q.1
Quick-start Guide
Page Q.2
795x Op Man / BD
Chapter 1 About this manual
1. About this manual

1.1 What this manual tells you
This manual tells you how to install, configure, operate and service the instrument. In addition,
some information is given to help you identify and correct some of the more common faults which
may occur. However, since repairs are done by changing suspected faulty assemblies, faultfinding to board component level is not covered.
This manual assumes that all devices or peripherals to be connected to the 795x have their own
documentation which tells you how to install and configure them. For this reason it is assumed that
anything which you want to link to the 795x is already installed and working correctly in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions.
Since the instrument can be used for a wide variety of purposes, it is driven by software specially
for your application. This manual gives information about the software which applies to your
machine only.
Throughout this manual the term '795x' is used to refer to all members of the 795x family (7950,
7951 and 7955).
1.2 Who should use this manual

This manual is for anyone who installs, uses, services or repairs the 795x.
1.3 Software version covered by this manual

The software version dealt with in this manual is given on the title page. Chapter 3 tells you how to
find out what software is installed in your instrument.
795x Op Man/CB
Page 1.1
Chapter 1 About this manual
Page 1.2
795x Op Man/CB
Chapter 2 Getting started
2. Getting started
2.1 What this Chapter tells you
This chapter shows how to:
Connect different types of instrumentation to a 7951 that is fitted with the D-type rear panel.
Set the DIP switches in the 7951.
Select the appropriate software Wizard to configure the 7951.
2.2 How to use this Chapter

This chapter is designed to introduce the various types of inputs and outputs that the 7951 can
support. Each type of connection (i.e. input-only or output-only) is represented by an easy to
follow, self-contained worked example. Try one example at a time.
After working through the examples that are appropriate, use the information in Chapter 3 to plan
connections and then implement them in conjunction with the subsequent installation chapter.
Important Warnings!!
1. The 795X series is not intrinsically safe and, therefore, can only be used
in officially designated safe (non-hazardous) areas.
2. All examples of connections in this manual are designed to be attempted
in a non-hazardous area.
3. Hazardous area considerations are outside the scope of this manual.
Always refer to installation documentation supplied by the manufacturer
for their instrumentation.
Examples are organised as follows:

Section 2.3 - for 7951 Inputs only
Section 2.4 - for 7951 Outputs only
Each worked example has a comprehensive set of instructions to establish a successful physical
connection. Instructions also show how to select the correct software Wizard.
Some types of connection require DIP switches to be set. These internal switches are located on
the processor board (mA/PRT analogue inputs) and the power supply board (8V/16V turbine).
Worked examples explain when to set a DIP switch. Newer models of the 7951 have DIP switch
access holes on top of the housing. Older models require the removal of the housing.
Note that:
DIP switches which are not shown in the diagrams have no effect on the field transmitter
shown.
Where a field transmitter can be connected to more than one analogue input, the DIP
switch setting depends on which input you have used.
7951 Op Man/DB
Page 2.1
Other sections in this chapter are as follows:

Section 2.5 lists chapters that deal with much more complex connections. (Page 2.25)
Section 2.6 contains 7951 pin designation lists for each hardware configuration. (Page 2.25)
Page 2.2
7951 Op Man/DB
2.3 7951 Inputs

2.3.1 Overview of 7951 inputs
This section features connections with external devices that provide only input signals to the 7951.
Use this list to quickly locate appropriate examples:
Turbine (pulse) flowmeter inputs....................................... Page 2.4

Ultrasonic (pulse) flowmeter inputs................................... Page 2.6
Orifice flowmeter inputs..................................................... Page 2.7
mA-type temperature transmitter.......................................Page 2.9
PRT-type temperature transmitter..................................... Page 2.11
mA-type pressure transmitter............................................ Page 2.13
Gas density transducers (in a SAFE AREA)..................... Page 2.15
Gas specific gravity transducers (in a SAFE AREA)......... Page 2.17
Status Input connections................................................... Page 2.19
Use the Health Check facility on the 7951 to monitor what is being input. Refer to Chapter 13 to
find out how to locate this facility using the 7951 menu system. Once located, select the particular
type of input and then select the instance of that input to see what is happening.
7951 Op Man/DB
Page 2.3
2.3.2 Turbine (pulse) flowmeter inputs

Support is provided for wiring up to 2 flowmeters to the 7951:
A 7951 can accept either single or dual pulse signal trains from each flowmeter. There
are signal pins for each pulse train.
Flowmeters can be powered by the turbine power supply pins on the 7951. These
power pins are an isolated supply source - 8V or 16V (selectable by a DIP switch on the
power supply board). The selected voltage applies to all turbine power pins.
Example: 1 turbine (pulse) flowmeter with dual pulse train outputs

Follow these instructions to work through the example:
Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 7951 is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switch
2. Select the voltage, 8V or 16V, that is required by all the turbine

flowmeters. This diagram shows the 8V selection:
(only if powering
the flowmeter using
the 795X isolated
power source)
16V
8V
3. Wire the flowmeter terminals to the 7951.
Connect the
flowmeter to the
7951
Refer to the table on this page for a full list of applicable 7951 pins.
For this example, pins listed under the the Pin Set #1 heading must
be used. (Note: The Pin Set #2 column is for a second flowmeter).
Notice that each flowmeter terminal (wire) in the diagram below has a
function label. The label identifies the appropriate pin of Pin set #1.
Power
supply unit
Turbine Power +
Turbine Power Turbine signal A +
Turbine signal A -
Pickup A
Pin Set #1
Pin Set #2
Turbine Power +
Turbine Power Turbine Signal A +
Turbine Signal A Turbine Signal B +
Turbine Signal B -
SK6/10
SK6/12
SK6/1
SK6/2
SK6/3
SK6/4
SK6/11
SK6/13
SK6/5
SK6/6
SK6/7
SK6/8
7951 pin connections for a typical

turbine flowmeter
Turbine
Turbine signal B +
Pickup B
Connection label
Turbine signal B -
A typical dual pulse turbine flowmeter

with connections
Important table notes

Flowmeters with a single pulse train output should only use the 7951 pins applicable to the
pickup nominated as A. These are labelled as: Turbine Signal A +, Turbine Signal A -.
Application software use of pulses from these flowmeter (pulse) inputs will depend on the
particular release of the software that is concurrent with this Operating Manual. Refer to
Chapter 3 (About The 7951) and the configuration chapters for details on use of these inputs.
Page 2.4
7951 Op Man/DB
Turn on the power
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a

Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30
seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights
which may appear.
Go to the wizards
menu
5. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you
arent there already).
6. Press the DOWN-ARROW key to go to Page 2 of the menu.
7. Press the c-key to select Configure.
8. Press the a-key twice to go to the wizards menu.
Select the wizard
9. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to

scroll through the option list until Flow meter is shown.
10. Press the b-key to select Flow meter.
11. Press the c-key to select Turbine.
Proceed with wizard
12. Refer to chapter 10 for a map of the route through the wizard.
(End of instructions)
7951 Op Man/DB
Page 2.5
2.3.3 Ultrasonic (pulse) flowmeter inputs

Support is provided for wiring up to 2 flowmeters to the 7951:
A 7951 can accept single pulse signal train from this type of flowmeter.
Flowmeters can be powered by the turbine power supply pins on the 7951. These power
pins are an isolated supply source - 8V or 16V (selectable by a DIP switch on the power
supply board). The selected voltage applies to all turbine power pins.
Example: An ultrasonic flowmeter with a single pulse train output

Turn off the power
1. Ensure that the 795x is NOT powered up.
Set DIP switch
2. Select the voltage, 8V or 16V, that is required by the flowmeter.

This diagram shows the 8V selection:
(only if powering the

flowmeter using the
795X isolated power
source)
16V
8V
3. Wire the flowmeter terminals to the 7951.
Connect the
flowmeter to the
7951
Refer to the table on this page for a full list of applicable 7951 pins.
Notice that each flowmeter terminal (wire) in the diagram below has
a function label. The label identifies the appropriate pin in the table.
Power
supply unit
Power +
Power -
Connection label
Signal A +
Signal A -
Pickup A
Power +
Power Signal A +
Signal A -
7951 Pins
(D-type)
SK6/11
SK6/12
SK6/1
SK6/2
7951 pin connections for a typical

ultrasonic flowmeter
A typical ultrasonic flowmeter with labelled connections

Important table notes
Flowmeters with a single pulse train output should only use the 7951 pins applicable to the
pickup nominated as A. These are labelled as: Signal A +, Signal A -.
Application software use of pulses from these flowmeter (pulse) inputs will depend on the
particular release of the software that is concurrent with this Operating Manual. Refer to
Chapter 3 (About The 7951) and the configuration chapters for details on use of these inputs.
Turn on the power
4. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a

Power On Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30
seconds. When it is finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights
which may appear.
(End of instructions) At present, the Flowmeter Wizard does not have a route for ultrasonic
flowmeters. However, full configuration details can be found in Chapter 11.
Page 2.6
7951 Op Man/DB
2.3.4 Orifice flowmeter inputs

Loop powered differential pressure cells can use any of the analogue inputs on the 7951. There
are 4 analogue inputs on a 7951 without an option board fitted. Appendix C has a list of option
boards that provide extra mA-type analogue inputs.
The maximum number of D.P. cells supported by the application software is indicated in Chapter
3. For the purpose of the example below, 2 D.P. cells are used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
There are complete pin designation lists at the end of this Chapter. Note that the
signal pins of analogue inputs 1 4 are labelled with the term PRT. These
particular pins have a dual role - PRT or mA. Setting a DIP switch (belonging to
an analogue input) will determine the function.
Care is needed when preparing to use any of the first four analogue inputs with a
loop powered (0-20mA or 4-20mA) field transmitters:
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for mA (per analogue
input used)
Ensure that only the analogue power pins are used. The reason for this is that
PRT power is only applied when a measurement is required and, therefore, not
suitable for loop powered mA devices .
Example: 2 cells connected to analogue inputs 1 and 2. Cells are powered by 7951 (24V isolated
supply).
Turn off the power
Set DIP switches as

shown on page 2.8.
2. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 1 is set for mA.
Connect the first

Differential Pressure
cell
4. Wire the first cell to analogue input 1.
+
-
Analogue Power +
Signal +
Signal Analogue Power -
The labels (e.g. Analogue Power+) will each identfy one 7951 pin in
the table below.
Analogue input 1 pins are listed under the Input #1 Pins column.
Table of
applicable 7951
(D-type) pins for
the first four
analogue inputs.
7951 Op Man/DB
Connection label
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
Analogue Power+
Signal +
Signal Analogue Power-
SK8/12
SK7/15
SK7/16
SK8/13
SK8/12
SK7/19
SK7/20
SK8/13
SK8/12
SK8/2
SK8/3
SK8/13
SK8/12
SK8/6
SK8/7
SK8/13
Page 2.7
Connect the second

cell
5. Wire the first cell to analogue input 2.

+
-
Analogue Power +
Signal +
the table on page 2.7.
SW1
A
4-20mA
PRT
DIP switch settings of analogue inputs 1 and 2 for this

example. The SW2 block must be set to match the SW1
block.
SW2
Turn on the
power
6. Turn on the power to the system. The system goes through a Power On
Self Test (POST) routine which takes less than 30 seconds. When it is
finished, ignore any flashing alarm lights which may appear.
Go to the
wizards menu
7. Press the MENU key to go to Page 1 of the Main Menu (if you arent there
already).
Select the
wizard
11. Press the b-key then the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW key to scroll
through the option list until Flow meter is shown.
12. Press the b-key to select Flow meter.
11. Press the d-key to select Orifice.
Proceed with
wizard
12. Refer to Chapter 10 for a guide to wizards.
Page 2.8
7951 Op Man/DB
2.3.5 mA-type temperature transmitter

Loop powered temperature transmitters can use any of the analogue inputs on the 7951. There
are 4 analogue inputs on a 7951 without an option board fitted. Appendix C has a list of option
The maximum number of temperature transmitters supported by the application software is
indicated in Chapter 3. For the purpose of the example below, 2 transmitters are used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
input used)
Example: 1 loop powered temperature transmitter connected to analogue input 3. It is powered by

the 7951 (24V isolated supply).
Turn off the power
Set DIP switches as

shown on page 2.12.
Connect the field

transmitter to the
7951
4. Wire the field transmitter to analogue input 3.

+
-
Analogue Power +
Signal +
the table below.
Table of applicable
7951 (D-type) pins for
the first four analogue
inputs.
7951 Op Man/DB
Connection label
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
Analogue Power+
Signal +
SK8/12
SK7/15
SK7/16
SK8/13
SK8/12
SK7/19
SK7/20
SK8/13
SK8/12
SK8/2
SK8/3
SK8/13
SK8/12
SK8/6
SK8/7
SK8/13
Page 2.9
SW1
A
4-20mA
DIP switch settings of analogue input 3 for this example.

The SW2 block must be set to match the SW1 block.
PRT
SW2
Turn on the
power
Go to the
wizards menu
already).
Select the
wizard

through the option list until Temperature is shown.
10. Press the b-key to select Temperature.
Proceed with
wizard
11. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to wizards.
Refer to section 2.6 (page 2.25) to locate the pins of additional inputs provided by add-on boards.
Page 2.10
7951 Op Man/DB
2.3.6 PRT-type temperature transmitter

PRT-type temperature transmitters can use any of the first four analogue inputs on the 7951.
There are 4 analogue inputs on a 7951 without an option board fitted.
The maximum number of temperature transmitters supported by the application software is
indicated in Chapter 3. For the purpose of the example below, 2 transmitters are used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
PRT-type field transmitters:
Ensure that the DIP switch on the processor board is set for PRT (per analogue
input used)
Ensure that only the PRT power pins are used.
Example: 1 PRT-type temperature transmitter connected to analogue input 4. It is powered by the

7951 (isolated supply).
Turn off the power
Set DIP switches as

shown on page 2.12.
2. Ensure that the DIP switch for analogue input 4 is set for PRT.
Connect the field

transmitter to the
7951
PRT
PRT Power +
Signal +
Signal PRT Power -
The labels (e.g. PRT Power+) will each identfy one 7951 pin in the
table below.
Table of applicable
7951 (D-type) pins
for the first four
analogue inputs.
7951 Op Man/DB
Connection label
PRT Power+
Signal +
Signal PRT Power-
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
SK7/14
SK7/15
SK7/16
SK7/17
SK7/18
SK7/19
SK7/20
SK7/21
SK8/1
SK8/2
SK8/3
SK8/4
SK8/5
SK8/6
SK8/7
SK8/8
Page 2.11
SW1
A
4-20mA
DIP switch settings of analogue input 4 for this example.

The SW2 block must be set to match the SW1 block.
PRT
SW2
Turn on the
power
Go to the
wizards menu
already).
Select the
wizard
through the option list until Temperature is shown.
11. Press the b-key to select Temperature.
Proceed with
wizard
Page 2.12
7951 Op Man/DB
2.3.7 mA-type pressure transmitter

Loop powered pressure transmitters can use any of the analogue inputs on the 7951. There are
4 analogue inputs on a 7951 without an option board fitted. Appendix C has a list of option
The maximum number of pressure transmitters supported by the application software is indicated
in Chapter 3. For the purpose of the example below, 1 transmitter is used.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
input used)
Example: 1 loop powered pressure transmitter connected to analogue input 3. It is powered by the
7951 (24V isolated supply).
Turn off the power
Set DIP switches as

shown on page 2.9.
Connect the field

transmitter to the
7951

+
-
Analogue Power +
Signal +
the table below.
Table of applicable
the first four analogue
inputs.
7951 Op Man/DB
Connection label
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
Analogue Power+
Signal +
SK8/12
SK7/15
SK7/16
SK8/13
SK8/12
SK7/19
SK7/20
SK8/13
SK8/12
SK8/2
SK8/3
SK8/13
SK8/12
SK8/6
SK8/7
SK8/13
Page 2.13
SW1
A
4-20mA
DIP switch settings of analogue input 3 for this example. The

SW2 block must be set to match the SW1 block.
PRT
SW2
Turn on the
power
Go to the
wizards menu
already).
Select the
wizard
through the option list until Pressure is shown.
11. Press the b-key to select Pressure.
Proceed with
wizard
12. Refer to chapter 10 for a guide to wizards.
Page 2.14
7951 Op Man/DB
2.3.8 Gas density transducers (in a SAFE AREA)

The 7810/11/12 gas density transducer connects to a time period input (also known as a density
input). There are 4 time period inputs on a 7951. Dual gas density transducers normally utilise the
first and second input. Check in Chapter 3 for the list of supported connections.
Example: 1 gas density transducer (7812) connected to time period input 1.
1 gas density transducer (7810 or 7811) connected to time period input 2.
Both transducers are powered by the 7951 (isolated supply).
Turn off the power
Connect the first

transducer to the
7951
2. Wire the 7812 to time period input 1.
SIG A
+24V Power
2
Signal +
0V Power
SIG B
Signal -
The labels (e.g. +24V Power) will each identfy one 7951 pin in the
table below.
Time period input 1 pins are listed under the Input #1 Pins column.
Connect the second
transducer to the
7951
3. Wire the 7810 (or 7811) to time period input 2.

7810/11 transducer
POS
+24V Power
SIG
Signal +
NEG
Signal 0V Power
table below.
Note: Always refer to the documentation supplied with the transducer
for wiring arrangements in a hazardous area.
Table of applicable
the 4 time period
inputs.
7951 Op Man/DB
Connection label
+24V Power
Signal +
Signal 0V Power
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
SK6/22
SK6/14
SK6/15
SK6/25
SK6/22
SK6/16
SK6/17
SK6/25
SK6/23
SK6/18
SK6/19
SK6/24
SK6/23
SK6/20
SK6/21
SK6/24
Page 2.15
Turn on the
power
Go to the
wizards menu
already).
Select the
wizard

through the option list until Line density is shown.
10. Press the b-key to select Line density.
Proceed with
wizard
Page 2.16
7951 Op Man/DB
2.3.9 Gas specific gravity transducers (in a SAFE AREA)

The 3096/3098 Gravitometer connects to a time period input (also known as a density input).
There are 4 time period inputs on a 7951. Dual gas specific gravity transducers normally utilise the
third and fourth input. Check in Chapter 3 for the list of supported connections.
Example: 1 gas specific gravitometer (3096 or 3098) connected to time period input 3 in a
non-hazardous area. The transducer is powered by the 7951 (isolated supply).
Turn off the power
Connect the first

transducer to the
7951
2. Wire the transducer terminals to time period input 3.

(a) 2 wire arrangement
3096/3098
transducer
RKPV
+24V Power
Signal +
SIG A
0V Power
3
SIG B
Signal -
(b) 3 wire arrangement

3096/3098
transducer
RKPV
+24V Power
SIG A
2
Signal +
0V Power
SIG B
Signal -
table below.
Note: Always refer to the documentation supplied with the transducer
for wiring arrangements in a hazardous area.
Connection label
Table of applicable
7951 (D-type) pins
for the 4 time period
inputs.
7951 Op Man/DB
+24V Power
Signal +
Signal 0V Power
Input #1 Pins
Input #2 Pins
Input #3 Pins
Input #4 Pins
SK6/22
SK6/14
SK6/15
SK6/25
SK6/22
SK6/16
SK6/17
SK6/25
SK6/23
SK6/18
SK6/19
SK6/24
SK6/23
SK6/20
SK6/21
SK6/24
Page 2.17
Turn on the
power
Go to the
wizards menu
already).
Select the
wizard

through the option list until Specific gravity is shown.
10. Press the b-key to select Specific gravity.
Proceed with
wizard
A second 3096/3098 can be connected to time period input 4.
Page 2.18
7951 Op Man/DB
2.3.10 Status Input connections

Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made to
a 7951:
1. Power usage (two options)
(1a) Internal powered
795x status input (Internal power) notes:
795x
Always use an isolated voltage from the

range 5V to 24V.
+5V to 24V
(Isolated supply)
There are only a few isolated voltage pins,

on the rear panel of the 795x, that are
suitable:
(a) Density power (24V)
(b) Turbine power (8V or 16V)
Status input
3.3k
Circuit operation notes:
Status input common
A closed switch produces a digital

signal that represents a value of 1
0V (Isolated supply)
An open switch produces a digital

Status input using internal

voltage source
Isolated voltage supply pins

These are listed in the following table:
Choice
Power
source
7951 D-type
(Power+)
1st.
2nd.
3rd.
4th.
Density
Density
Turbine
Turbine
SK6/22
SK6/23
SK6/10
SK6/11
7951 D-type
(Power-)
SK6/24
SK6/25
SK6/12
SK6/13
(1b) External powered (recommended)

795x status input (external power) notes:
795x
+5V to +24V
(external)
1. Use a voltage that falls within the range 5V to 24V.

It is possible to use the same voltage source that is
powering the 795x. In this case, the voltage
requirement is 24V.
Status input
2. An isolated power source must be used to maintain

status input isolation.
3.3k
Circuit operation notes:

0V
(external)
Status input common
Status input using external

voltage source
7951 Op Man/DB
A closed switch produces a digital

An open switch produces a digital
Page 2.19
2. Status Input common pin

Select one pin from this list:
7951 D-type
(Stat ip com)
SK4/10
SK4/23
3. Status Input pins

The application function of these pins are not fixed and are, therefore, incorporated into the
configuration tasks in later Chapters.
Status
inputs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
D-type
pins
SK4/1
SK4/2
SK4/3
SK4/4
SK4/5
SK4/6
SK4/7
SK4/8
SK4/9
SK4/14
SK4/15
SK4/16
SK4/17
SK4/18
SK4/19
SK4/20
SK4/21
SK4/22
Table notes:
(a) The default state of each input is non-active.
Page 2.20
7951 Op Man/DB
2.4 7951 Outputs

2.4.1 Overview of 7951 outputs
This section feature connections with external devices that provide only output signals to the 7951.
Use this list to quickly locate appropriate examples:
Mechanical Counter Connections....... Page 2.22
Chart Recorder Connections.............. Page 2.23
Digital Output Connections............. Page 2.24
Use the Health Check facility on the 7951 to monitor what is being output. Refer to Chapter 13 to
find out how to locate this facility using the 7951 menu system. Once locate, select the particular
type of output and then select the instance of that output to see what is happening.
7951 Op Man/DB
Page 2.21
2.4.2 Mechanical Counter Connections

There are 5 pulse outputs available on a 7951 (D-type). The following diagram shows the
recommended method for wiring up a Pulse Output:
+5V to +40V
795X
Pulse output +ve
Relay
Pulse output 1
Pulse output common
Note:
The +24V and 0V could be
taken from a density supply
or somewhere else on the
instrument.
0V
Wiring for pulse output 1 (for all 795X series)

Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made:
1. Pulse Output power+ pins
There is one pin for all of the pulse outputs:
7951 D-type
SK5/25
2. Pulse Output common pins

There is one pin for all of the pulse outputs:
7951 D-type
SK5/13
3. Pulse Output pins

Output
Number
Default
Parameter
Output
1
2
3
4
5
None
None
None
None
None
7951 D-type
SK5/10
SK5/11
SK5/12
SK5/23
SK5/24
Note: Refer to the configuration chapters for details on how to select parameters for output.
Page 2.22
7951 Op Man/DB
2.4.3 Chart Recorder Connections

There are 4 mA-type analogue outputs available on a 7951 without an option board fitted. The
following diagram shows the recommended method for wiring up an Analogue Output:
795x
Analogue Output
Signal
Analogue Output
Commmon
Analogue output wiring (for all 795X series)

Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need to be made:
1. Analogue Output common pins
There is a choice of pins for all of the Analogue Outputs:
7951 D-type
SK7/10
SK7/11
SK7/12
SK7/13
2. Analogue Output Pins

Output
Number
Default
Parameter
Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
7951 D-type
SK7/1
SK7/2
SK7/3
SK7/4
SK7/5
SK7/6
SK7/7
SK7/8
Notes:
Refer to the configuration chapters for details on how to select a parameter for output.
Lightly shaded cells indicate the need for an option card. (See Appendix C)
7951 Op Man/DB
Page 2.23
2.4.4 Digital Output Connections

Status Output 1
Status Output 1 uses a relay with 2 contacts:
1: Normally Open pin (D-Type: SK4/12, Klippon: PL2/8) OR
Normally Closed pin (D-Type: SK4/25, Klippon: PL2/10)
2: Common pin (D-Type: S4/13, Klippon: PL2/9).
This output functions as a Watchdog for indicating the presence of at least one
active alarm. For example, the NO contact is energised only if there is an alarm.
Status Outputs 2 to N
Remaining Status Outputs are of the open-drain type.
Work through parts 1, 2 and 3 to understand all the physical connections that need
to be made to the 7950:
1. Power usage
(a) External power (Recommended)
This diode protects 795x
against reverse voltages
795x
External power supply provides

voltage and current suitable for
user selected relay.
Status output
0V from external power supply

Status output common
A recommended approach to wiring a status outputs (#2 onwards)

2. Status Output Common Pins
D-Type Pin
(Stat op com)
Klippon Pin
(Stat op com)
SK5/9
PL2/7
SK5/22
3. Status Output Signal Pins

Status Outputs, from 6 onwards, do not have a default function but may be allocated a
function as part of configuring a
Status
D-Type
Klippon
Default Function
feature.
Output
Pin
Pin
(See Chapters 8, 9 or 11).
2
Limit Alarm Watchdog
SK5/1
PL2/1
Input Alarm Watchdog
SK5/2
PL2/2
User Alarm X Watchdog
SK5/3
PL2/3
User Alarm Y Watchdog
SK5/4
PL2/4
Refer to Chapter 8 for

information on changing
settings for the Alarm Logger
Output (Watchdog) feature.
Refer to Chapter 11 for information on configuring a Status Output.

Page 2.24
7951 Op Man/DB
2.5 Other 7951 connections

Serial Communications
Turn to Chapter 7 for a full guide to Serial Communications involving the 7951.
HART Communications
Turn to Chapter 16 for a full guide to HART support on a 7951.
2.6 Where to find the 7951 connectors

This section contains full lists of pin designations referred to in this Chapter. There is a separate
list for each possible hardware configuration.
Section 2.6.1
7951 pins without an option board fitted (See page 2.26)
Section 2.6.2
7951 pins with option board 79516 fitted (See page 2.27)
Section 2.6.3
7951 pins with option board 79517 fitted (See page 2.28)
7951 Op Man/DB
Page 2.25
2.6.1 Pin designations for a 7951 (D-type) without an option board fitted.
Pin
PL1
SK1
SK2
SK3
SK4
SK5
SK6
SK7
SK8
Com 2 Rx/Tx+
Com 3 Rx/Tx+
Stat ip 1
Stat op 2
Turb 1 +
Ana op 1
PRT 3 pwr +
Com 1 Tx
Com 2 Tx
Com 3 Tx
Stat ip 2
Stat op 3
Turb 1 -
Ana op 2
PRT 3 sig +
Supply -
Com 1 Rx
Com 2 Rx
Com 3 Rx
Stat ip 3
Stat op 4
Turb 2 +
Ana op 3
PRT 3 sig -
Supply +
Stat ip 4
Stat op 5
Turb 2 -
Ana op 4
Com 0V
Com 0V
Com 0V
Stat ip 5
Stat op 6
Turb 3 +
PRT 4 pwr +
Stat ip 6
Stat op 7
Turb 3 -
PRT 4 sig +
Com 2 CTS
Com 3 CTS
Stat ip 7
Stat op 8
Turb 4 +
PRT 4 sig -
Com 2 RTS
Com 3 RTS
Stat ip 8
Stat op 9
Turb 4 -
PRT 4 pwr -
Com 2 Rx/Tx-
Com 3 Rx/Tx-
Stat ip 9
Stat op com
5
6
10
Stat ip com
11
PRT 3 pwr -
Pulse op 1
Turb pwr +
Ana op com
Pulse op 2
Turb pwr +
Ana op com
Ana op com
+24V dc
0V dc
12
Alarm NO
Pulse op 3
Turb pwr -
13
Alarm com
Pulse op com
Turb pwr -
Ana op com
14
Stat ip 10
Stat op 10
Den 1 +
PRT 1 pwr +
15
Stat ip 11
Stat op 11
Den 1 -
PRT 1 sig +
16
Stat ip 12
Stat op 12
Den 2+
PRT 1 sig -
17
Stat ip 13
Stat op 13
Den 2 -
PRT 1 pwr -
18
Stat ip 14
Stat op 14
Den 3+
PRT 2 pwr +
19
Stat ip 15
Stat op 15
Den 3 -
PRT 2 sig +
20
Stat ip 16
Stat op 16
Den 4+
PRT 2 sig -
21
Stat ip 17
Stat op 17
Den 4 -
PRT 2 pwr -
22
Stat ip 18
Stat op com
+24V dc
Ana op com
23
Stat ip com
Pulse op 4
+24V dc
Ana op com
Pulse op 5
0V dc
Ana op com
+24V dc
Alarm NC
Pulse op pwr
0V dc
Ana op com
0V dc
24
25
SK1
Pin 9
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 25
Pin 25
Pin 25
Pin 25
Pin 25
SK2
Pin 9
Pin 1
SK3
Pin 9
Pin 1
Pin 4
Pin 1
PL1
SK4
SK5
SK6
SK7
SK8
7951 Back Panel: D-type version
Page 2.26
7951 Op Man/DB
2.6.2 Pin designations for a 7951 (D-type) with option board 79516 fitted.
Pin
PL1
SK1
SK2
SK3
SK4
SK5
SK6
SK7
SK8
Com 2 Rx/Tx+
Com 3 Rx/Tx+
Stat ip 1
Stat op 2
Turb 1 +
Ana op 1
PRT 3 pwr +
Com 1 Tx
Com 2 Tx
Com 3 Tx
Stat ip 2
Stat op 3
Turb 1 -
Ana op 2
PRT 3 sig +
Supply -
Com 1 Rx
Com 2 Rx
Com 3 Rx
Stat ip 3
Stat op 4
Turb 2 +
Ana op 3
PRT 3 sig -
Supply +
Stat ip 4
Stat op 5
Turb 2 -
Ana op 4
PRT 3 pwr -
Com 0V
Com 0V
Com 0V
Stat ip 5
Stat op 6
Turb 3 +
Ana op 5
PRT 4 pwr +
Stat ip 6
Stat op 7
Turb 3 -
Ana op 6
PRT 4 sig +
Com 2 CTS
Com 3 CTS
Stat ip 7
Stat op 8
Turb 4 +
Ana op 7
PRT 4 sig -
Com 2 RTS
Com 3 RTS
Stat ip 8
Stat op 9
Turb 4 -
Ana op 8
PRT 4 pwr -
Com 2 Rx/Tx-
Com 3 Rx/Tx-
Stat ip 9
Stat op com
5
6
10
Stat ip com
11
Ana ip 5 +
Pulse op 1
Turb pwr +
Ana op com
Pulse op 2
Turb pwr +
Ana op com
Ana op com
Ana ip 5 -
12
Alarm NO
Pulse op 3
Turb pwr -
13
Alarm com
Pulse op com
Turb pwr -
Ana op com
0V dc
14
Stat ip 10
Stat op 10
Den 1 +
PRT 1 pwr +
Ana ip 6 +
15
Stat ip 11
Stat op 11
Den 1 -
PRT 1 sig +
Ana ip 6 -
16
Stat ip 12
Stat op 12
Den 2+
PRT 1 sig -
Ana ip 7 +
17
Stat ip 13
Stat op 13
Den 2 -
PRT 1 pwr -
Ana ip 7 -
18
Stat ip 14
Stat op 14
Den 3+
PRT 2 pwr +
Ana ip 8 +
19
Stat ip 15
Stat op 15
Den 3 -
PRT 2 sig +
Ana ip 8 -
20
Stat ip 16
Stat op 16
Den 4+
PRT 2 sig -
Ana ip 9 +
21
Stat ip 17
Stat op 17
Den 4 -
PRT 2 pwr -
Ana ip 9 -
22
Stat ip 18
Stat op com
+24V dc
Ana op com
Ana ip 10 +
23
Stat ip com
Pulse op 4
+24V dc
Ana op com
Ana ip 10 -
Pulse op 5
0V dc
Ana op com
+24V dc
Alarm NC
Pulse op pwr
0V dc
Ana op com
0V dc
24
25
+24V dc
SK1
Pin 9
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 25
Pin 25
Pin 25
Pin 25
Pin 25
SK2
Pin 9
Pin 1
SK3
Pin 9
Pin 1
Pin 4
Pin 1
PL1
SK4
SK5
SK6
SK7
SK8
7951 Op Man/DB
Page 2.27
2.6.3 Pin designations for a 7951 (D-type) with option board 79517 fitted.
Pin
PL1
SK1
SK2
SK3
SK4
SK5
SK6
SK7
SK8
Com 2 Rx/Tx+
Com 3 Rx/Tx+
Stat ip 1
Stat op 2
Turb 1 +
Ana op 1
PRT 3 pwr +
Com 1 Tx
Com 2 Tx
Com 3 Tx
Stat ip 2
Stat op 3
Turb 1 -
Ana op 2
PRT 3 sig +
Supply -
Com 1 Rx
Com 2 Rx
Com 3 Rx
Stat ip 3
Stat op 4
Turb 2 +
Ana op 3
PRT 3 sig -
Supply +
Stat ip 4
Stat op 5
Turb 2 -
Ana op 4
PRT 3 pwr -
Com 0V
Com 0V
Com 0V
Stat ip 5
Stat op 6
Turb 3 +
Ana op 5
PRT 4 pwr +
Stat ip 6
Stat op 7
Turb 3 -
Ana op 6
PRT 4 sig +
Com 2 CTS
Com 3 CTS
Stat ip 7
Stat op 8
Turb 4 +
Ana op 7
PRT 4 sig -
Com 2 RTS
Com 3 RTS
Stat ip 8
Stat op 9
Turb 4 -
Ana op 8
PRT 4 pwr -
Com 2 Rx/Tx-
Com 3 Rx/Tx-
Stat ip 9
Stat op com
Stat ip com
Pulse op 1
Turb pwr +
Ana op com
10
11
Ana ip 5 +
Ana ip 5 -
Pulse op 2
Turb pwr +
Ana op com
12
Alarm NO
Pulse op 3
Turb pwr -
Ana op com
13
Alarm com
Pulse op com
Turb pwr -
Ana op com
0V dc
14
Stat ip 10
Stat op 10
Den 1 +
PRT 1 pwr +
Ana ip 6 +
15
Stat ip 11
Stat op 11
Den 1 -
PRT 1 sig +
Ana ip 6 -
16
Stat ip 12
Stat op 12
Den 2+
PRT 1 sig -
17
Stat ip 13
Stat op 13
Den 2 -
PRT 1 pwr -
18
Stat ip 14
Stat op 14
Den 3+
PRT 2 pwr +
19
Stat ip 15
Stat op 15
Den 3 -
PRT 2 sig +
20
Stat ip 16
Stat op 16
Den 4+
PRT 2 sig -
21
Stat ip 17
Stat op 17
Den 4 -
PRT 2 pwr -
22
Stat ip 18
Stat op com
+24V dc
Ana op com
23
Stat ip com
Pulse op 4
+24V dc
Ana op com
Pulse op 5
0V dc
Ana op com
+24V dc
Pulse op pwr
0V dc
Ana op com
0V dc
24
25
Alarm NC
+24V dc
SK1
Pin 9
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 25
Pin 25
Pin 25
Pin 25
Pin 25
SK2
Pin 9
Pin 1
SK3
Pin 9
Pin 1
Pin 4
Pin 1
PL1
SK4
SK5
SK6
SK7
SK8
Page 2.28
7951 Op Man/DB
2.7 If you need help...

If you get into difficulties...
If you get into difficulties when using the wizards, you can abandon the configuration and start
again as follows:
1. From the menu, keep selecting NO (usually by pressing the c-key) or, if that option is
not available:
2. Press ENTER until you can start selecting NO.
3. Carry on with (1) and (2) until you return to the wizards menu where you started.
4. Start the worked example again. The configuration you abandoned is cleared from
the instruments memory when you begin again.
If you dont know where the keys are...
The diagram below shows how to find all the keys referred to in the worked examples.
S solartron
UP
ARROW
DOWN
ARROW
+/-
0
d
CLR
EXP
ENTER
1
2
ALARM
LIGHTS
MULTIVIEW
MENU
The diagram shows those keys referred to in the worked examples,

plus some others you may use. Chapter 6 gives a full explanation of
what all the keys do.
Keys and indicators on the front panel
7951 Op Man/DB
Page 2.29
Page 2.30
7951 Op Man/DB
Chapter 3 About the 7951
3. About the 7951

3.1 Background
The Solartron 7951 is designed to meet the demand for a reliable, versatile, user-friendly and costeffective instrument for liquid and gas metering. It has a Motorola 68332 16-bit microprocessor
and surface-mounted circuit board components so that it is powerful, reliable and compact.
Features of the 7951 include:
simple access to information
comprehensive interrogation facilities
alarm and alarm history facilities
a menu-driven, user-friendly interface
NEMA12, IP52 panel mounted case
dc powered
three serial ports (using RS-232 or RS-485) for
Modbus communications and printing
These facilities are described in more detail in the rest of this chapter.
3.2 The 7951 Single-Stream Gas Flow Computer

The 7951 single-stream gas flow computer is used specifically with gases and may use a number of
types of flow meter (such as turbine, orifice or venturi meters) to measure that parameters of interest.
3.2.1 Connection Support
Note: Lists show the maximum number of instances of a device and do not reflect the maximum I/O
capability of the 7951.
Supported Input Connections (by device):
1 x Single/Dual Pulse Flowmeter (Turbine) or Single Pulse Ultrasonic Flowmeter

5 x 0/4-20mA Differential Pressure Transmitters (DP Cells)
{Primary DP Devices supported: Orifice Plate, Venturi Tube and V-Cone}
1 x 0/4-20mA Linear Flowmeter
2 x 7810/11/12 Gas Density Transducers (use Time Period Inputs 1 and 2)
2 x 3096/3098 Specific Gravity Transducers (use Time Period Inputs 3 and 4)
4 x PT100 or 0/4-20mA Temperature Transmitters
2 x 0/4-20mA Static Pressure Transmitters
2 x HART network loops (Maximum of 4 SMART transmitters on each loop) (See Chapter 16)
1 x 0/4-20mA input for Line Density (Channel B)
1 x 0/4-20mA input for Base Density (Channel B)
1 x 0/4-20mA input for live N2
1 x 0/4-20mA input for live CO2
1 x 0/4-20mA input Cv/m
1 x 0/4-20mA input for live Specific Gravity (Channel B)
8 x Status Inputs for various functions (See Application Feature List)
7951 Op Man/AE
Page 3.1
Supported Output Connections (by device):
5 x Open Collector type Pulse Outputs for transmission of totals

4 x Analogue Outputs for transmission of any numerical parameter
1 x Relay type Status Output for active alarm indication (See Chapters 2 and 8)
7 x Open drain type Status Output for various functions
Other Connections (by device)
1 x Chromatograph (using Serial Port)
3.2.2 Application Feature List

In this application, the main purpose of the 7951 is to calculate flow rates and totals for a single
metering-run (stream).
The following flow measurements are supported:
Indicated Volume (Not applicable to Orifice Flow Metering)

Corrected Volume
Base Volume
Mass (from ISO 5167-1:1991, ISO 5167-1:1991/Amd.1:1998, AGA 3 or HART)
Energy
Also supported:
1
Temperature Measurements (direct from mA, PT100 or HART-networked transmitters)

Line temperature (direct from a transmitter)
Density loop temperature A (direct from a transmitter)
Density loop temperature B (direct from a transmitter)
Pressure Measurements (direct from mA or HART-networked transmitters)
Line pressure (direct from a transmitter)
Atmospheric pressure (direct from a transmitter)
Differential pressure (direct from a transmitter. Pay-Check Cell support)
Line Density Measurements
Line Density A (direct from a 3096/3098 Specific Gravity Transducer)
Line Density B (by Transducer, mA transmitter, HART transmitter, PTZ1 or PTZ2)
Prime Line Density (from A or B Channel)
Base Density Measurements

Base Density A (calculated from prime SG)
Base Density B (by mA transmitter, PTZ1 or PTZ2)
Prime Base Density (from A or B Channel)
A HART option board must be fitted.
Page 3.2
7951 Op Man/AE
Line and Base Compressibility Calculation

NX-19, NX-19mod, NX-19mod3h, S-GERG, AGA8 and Linear Interpolation
Specific Gravity Measurements

SG A (direct from a 7810/11/12 Gas Density Transducer)
SG B (by transducer, mA transmitter, Chromatograph or calculation using Base density)
Prime SG (from A or B Channel)
Energy Measurements
Calorific Value (from ISO 6976, AGA5,mA Input or a Chromatograph)
Other Application Features:

Gas composition feed from a Chromatograph
CO2 and N2 percentages from a mA-type analogue input
Special Equations Type 1 and Type 2
Status inputs, status outputs and pulse outputs

Archiving
7951 Op Man/AE
Page 3.3
3.3 Physical description of the 7951

Either... Klippon connectors
SK1
Power
Supply
Board
Processor
Board
SK2
SK3
Two types of
Rear Panel
PL1
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
PL7
PL8
PL9
Or... D-type connectors

SK1
Connector
Board
SK2
SK3
Mother
Board
SK4
SK5
SK6
SK7
SK8
PL1
Keyboard
and display
The 7951 and its major assemblies

The main body of the 7951 is a one-piece aluminium extrusion which provides the best possible
EMC protection. The keyboard and display is attached to the front of the instrument and all
electrical and communications connectors are mounted on the Rear Panel. The 7951 is available
with two types of rear Panel - one with Klippon connectors, the other with D-type connectors.
The case contains four circuit boards. The Processor Board and the Power Supply Board are
mounted horizontally. These are connected by plugs and sockets to the Mother Board which is
mounted vertically at the back of the case. The Connector Board is parallel to the Mother Board to
which it is joined.
The Keyboard and Display are wired to the Processor Board. The Connector Board holds the
connectors to which external devices are linked.
3.4 Communications
The 7951 can operate as a MODBUS slave. It can:
download a configuration from a PC, DCS, etc.
upload a configuration
monitor data locations in the 7951
interrogate the alarm and data logger buffers
manipulate the alarm and data logger buffers
set locations with new data
instigate printed reports.
There is an entire Chapter covering Serial Communications and Networking in this manual.
Page 3.4
7951 Op Man/AE
3.5 Typical installations

The diagrams below illustrate two typical installations utilising the 7951. One system uses Gas
Turbine metering, the other Gas Orifice metering.
PULSE
OUTPUTS
1 TO 5
4 - 20mA
4 - 20mA
DIC T
PERIO
7951 FLOW COMPUTER
IME
4 - 20mA
4 - 20mA
Std. vol. rate

Temp.
Pressure
Density
3096
4-
SPECIFIC
GRAVITY
mA
20
DP1
A
0m
PERIODIC TIME
PRT OR 4-20mA FOR TEMP.
DP2
-2
-2
0m
A
7812
DENSITY
LINE
T
P
4-20mA
SERIAL
COMMS
RS232
RS485
MODBUS
SLAVE
DP3
GAS
CHROMATOGRAPH
CONTROL
MODBUS MASTER
PRINTER
PORT
ORIFICE METERING SYSTEM
NOTE: Analogue input card option required

for this configuration
Typical installation for Gas Orifice metering system
PULSE
OUTPUTS
1 TO 5
4 - 20mA
4 - 20mA
DIC T
PERIO
7951 FLOW COMPUTER
IME
4 - 20mA
4 - 20mA
Std. vol. rate

Temp.
Pressure
Density
3096
SPECIFIC
GRAVITY
E
LS
PU
E
LS
PU
B
PERIODIC TIME
PRT OR 4-20mA FOR TEMP.
7812
DENSITY
LINE
T
P
4-20mA
SERIAL
COMMS
RS232
RS485
MODBUS
SLAVE
GAS
CHROMATOGRAPH
CONTROL
MODBUS MASTER
PRINTER
PORT
GAS TURBINE METERING SYSTEM
NOTE: Analogue input card option required

for this configuration
Typical installation for Gas Turbine metering system
7951 Op Man/AE
Page 3.5
3.6 Checking your software version

The 7951 is driven by pre-loaded software which differs according to the application for which the
instrument is to be used.
PREFIX
DIGIT 1
DIGIT 2
DIGIT 3
DIGIT 4
HARDWARE
PLATFORM
METERED
PRODUCT
FLOW
METER
STREAMS/
CHANNELS
SPECIAL
50, 51 or 55
for 7950,
7951 or 7955
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
0-9
Gas
Liquid
Both
Other
PREFIX
DIGIT
1
None
Orifice
Turbine
Venturi
Mass
Multi
DIGIT
2
DIGIT
3
Single
Dual
etc...
etc...
DIGIT
4
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION CODE

Software version code
For example, in the case of a 7951 single stream gas turbine flow computer, the software
configuration code is SW511210.
You can find the software version code in two ways:
It is printed on a label inside the instrument. You can find it by removing the terminal cover.
Page 3.6
It is written into the menu structure.
7951 Op Man/AE
Chapter 4 Installing the system
4. Installing the system

4.1

This chapter gives full instructions for installing the 7951.
It does not go into detail about how to install any peripheral devices (such as transducers,
computers or printers) which are connected to the 7951. For this information you must refer to
the documentation supplied with these items.
4.2
Hazardous and non-hazardous environments

If all or part of an installation is in an area where there is the risk of fire or explosion (which is
almost always the case when gases are involved), then safety barriers usually have to be wired
into the circuit. However, some instruments (such as the Covimat) are explosion-proof and
barriers are not, therefore, needed.
You must follow the manufacturers instructions and safety recommendations fully.
4.3
Installation procedure
Briefly, the procedure is:
Step 1: Draw up a wiring schedule
Step 2: Unpack the 7951
Step 3: Set the dip switches
Step 4: Fit the 7951
Step 5: Make all external connections
Step 6: Earth the installation
Step 7: Connect power supply
The steps in the procedure are explained in the following sections.
4.4
Step 1: Drawing up a wiring schedule

Before you make any connections, you must draw up a wiring schedule to help you identify wiring
colours and make sure that you do not connect more items of any given type than are allowed.
(If you are in doubt, check the specification in Appendix C.)
A blank copy of a wiring schedule is given in Appendix B.
7951 Op Man/CF
Page 4.1
4.5
Step 2: Unpacking the instrument

Remove the instrument from its packing and examine it to see if any items are loose or if it has
been damaged in transit. Check that all items on the shipping list are present. If any items are
missing or if the equipment is damaged, contact your supplier immediately for further advice.
What should be supplied with the 7951

7951 with Klippon connectors:
Item
Quantity
Mounting Clamp Assembly
Captive screws
Mounting strap
Location moulding
Socket identification label
9-way D-type plugs
9-way connector hoods
4-way socket
10-way sockets
2 Amp glass fuse (this is a spare)
7951 with D-type connectors:

Item
Quantity
Mounting Clamp Assembly
Captive screws
Mounting strap
Location moulding
9-way D-type plugs
9-way D-type connector hoods
25-way D-type plugs
25-way D-type connector hoods
4-way socket
2 Amp ceramic fuse (this is a spare)
Note: If you have ordered optional, additional facilities (such as extra outputs) these are already
installed in the machine.
Page 4.2
7951 Op Man/CF
4.6
Step 3: Setting dip switches

The 7951 has two blocks of dip switches on the Processor Board, as shown in the diagram:
SW1 switches
select whether each input is 4-20 mA or PRT
SW2 switches
not used in the current version of 7951
The setting of each switch in the SW1 block must be the same as the corresponding pair of
switches in the SW2 block. The 7951 does not work correctly otherwise.
The 7951 is supplied with the dip switches in these default settings:
Turbine power:
Input 1
Inputs 2-4:
8 VOLTS
PRT
4-20mA
SW1
1
4-20mA
PRT
Part of the 7951

Processor Board
SW2
Dip switches on the Processor Board
If you want to change the dip switch settings, you must also configure the inputs. This is
explained in Chapter 10. Later models of 7951 have a small hole in the top of the instrument to
allow access to the switches without removing the cover.
After the configuration has been completed (see Chapters 10 and 11), the 7951 should be
switched into the secure mode to prevent unauthorised or accidental tampering with the
instruments configuration.
Note: The 795x is always shipped from Solartron with the security lock on the front panel set to
the non-secure mode.
7951 Op Man/CF
Page 4.3
4.7
Step 4: Fitting the 7951

Note:
You must not fit the 7951 where it may be subjected to extreme conditions or be liable
to damage. For further information about the environmental conditions within which it
can operate, see Appendix C.
1. Firstly, referring to the diagram, cut out an aperture in the front panel for each instrument
which is to be mounted on it.
291mm
961mm
Aperture for the

instrument
Aperture for the

instrument
Aperture for the

instrument
Aperture for the

instrument
1921mm
17.5mm
171mm
14.5mm
Minimum dimensions for a panel with apertures to fit four 7951s
2. Each instrument is mounted in a clamp which is fixed to the rear of the front panel, as shown
in the two diagrams that follow.
3mm
The 7951 unit
Mounting
Clamp
101mm
278.7mm
Location
Moulding
Panel with
aperture
Before assembly
Page 4.4
7951 Op Man/CF
3mm
Mounting
Clamp
7.2mm
Captive
Clamp
Screws (2)
113mm
Rear Panel
of 7951
256mm
12.5mm
221mm
10mm
Note: Sufficient clearance is required for plugs and cables at the rear of the 7951
After assembly
You can mount the clamp so that it is fixed permanently or can be removed later, if required. If you
want the clamp to be fixed permanently, carry out Steps 3 - 8. If you want to be able to remove the
clamp, carry out Steps 9 - 12.
If the clamp is to be fixed permanently:
3. Make sure that the face of the front panel is in good condition and has no loose or flaking paint.
Use a suitable de-greasing agent to clean the face of the panel.
4. Insert the location moulding through the aperture in the front panel.
5. Peel the protective strip off the adhesive tape on the face of the mounting clamp. Then, working
from the back of the front panel, carefully position the clamp over the location moulding. The
clamp and panel bond on contact.
6. Press firmly on the area where the clamp is bonded to the front panel to ensure that they are
bonded firmly. Remove the Location Moulding and discard it.
7. Slide the instrument through the front panel. Tighten the two captive screws to secure it into the
clamp.
Note that, if you install more than one instrument, it helps to support them if you use a Mounting Strap
to link each clamp to the next one, as shown in the diagram:
Back of
instrument
Back of
instrument
Mounting clamp
Mounting clamp
Inside of
front panel
Mounting
strap
Mounting arrangements for more than one instrument

8. Finally, attach all connectors to the back panel.
7951 Op Man/CF
Page 4.5
If the clamp is to be removable:

9.
Insert the location moulding through the aperture in the front panel.
10. Working from the back of the front panel, carefully position the clamp over the location
moulding. Remove the Location Moulding and discard it.
11. Slide the instrument through the front panel. Tighten the two captive screws to secure it
into the clamp.
Note that, if you install more than one instrument, it helps to support them if you use a Mounting
Strap to link each clamp to the next one, as shown in the diagram.
4.8
Step 5: Making the external connections

1. Refer to the documentation supplied with the external equipment to see if you have to carry
out any special procedures when connecting them to the 7951. Take special notice of any
information about safety requirements in hazardous areas, and complying with EMC
regulations.
2. For each D-type connector, pass the connector hood over the cable and wire up the
connector. Secure the hood and connector body together then connect the earth wire to the
hood. Stick an identifying label on to the connector hood.
3. For each Klippon connector, wire up the connector then stick an identifying label on it.
4. Check the wiring thoroughly against the schedule and wiring diagram.
5. Attach all connectors to the Back Panel.
Refer to Chapter 2 and Appendix C for examples of field transmitter connections and a full list of
7951 pin designations
4.9
Step 6: Earthing the instrument

NOTE:
Incorrect earthing can cause many problems, so you must earth the chassis
and the electronics correctly. However, the way in which you do this
depends almost entirely on the type of installation you have and the
conditions under which it operates. Therefore, because these instructions
cannot cover every possible situation, the manufacturers recommend that
earthing procedures should only be carried out by personnel who are skilled
in such work.
The chassis of the 7951 must be earthed in all cases; both for safety reasons and to ensure that
the installation complies with EMC regulations. Do this by connecting an earth lead from the stud
on the rear panel to a local safety earth such as a cabinet earth or some other suitable metal
structure.
Page 4.6
7951 Op Man/CF
Crinkle
washers
Thumb
nut
Nut
Earth
lead
Plain
washers
Earthing the instrument chassis

In addition to earthing the chassis, you may have to make extra earth connections in some
cases, depending on the installation requirements.
Details of this are given in Appendix C.
4.10
Step 7: Connecting the power supply

Plug the dc power connector into plug PL2 and switch on the power.
The instrument goes through the following Power On Self Test (POST) routine:
The display shows a sequence of characters or patterns to prove that all elements of the
display are working. There is a pause of five seconds between each change of pattern.
The program ROM is checked against a checksum. The display shows how the test is
proceeding.
Critical data are checked. The display shows the result of this check.
The coefficients are checked. The display shows the result of this check.
The battery-backed RAM is checked. The display indicates progress.
Any saved programs are checked. The display shows the number of programs and their
status. Note that, for a new machine, there are no stored programs.
If a battery is fitted, its condition is checked and reported.
Note that, when the power is switched on, the alarms may light up. You can ignore these for the
moment - alarms are explained later in this manual. You can now proceed to configure your
7951 (see Chapters 10 and 11).
If the POST fails to complete, switch off the power supply and check all connections and the dip
switch settings. Then re-connect the power supply. If the POST still fails to complete, switch off
again and contact your supplier.
7951 Op Man/CF
Page 4.7
Page 4.8
7951 Op Man/CF
Chapter 5 The keyboard, display and indicators
5. The keyboard, display and indicators

This Chapter tells you:
how the front panel is laid out
what the keys and indicators do
what characters you can display.
5.2 The layout of the front panel

The diagram below shows the layout of the keyboard. The names of the keys are in bold type,
names of alarms and indicators are in bold italics.
MULTIVIEW
RIGHT
LEFT
S solartron
UP
ARROW
DOWN
ARROW
+/-
0
d
CLR
EXP
ENTER
(UNUSED KEY)
SECURITY LED
INDICATOR
STREAM
SELECT
PRINT
BACK
MAIN
MENU
SYSTEM
ALARM
INFORMATION MENU
INPUT
ALARM
LIMIT
ALARM
The layout of the front panel
The diagrams at the end of this chapter give a visual summary of what each of the keys do.
795x Op Man/CC
Page 5.1
5.3 What the display shows

The display can show the following information:
numerical data in floating point, exponent or integer formats

text descriptors for the data
units of the data (if applicable)
status of the data (if applicable) as set, live, failed or fallback
alarm information
current time and date
soft key, menu and prompting information.
5.4 How the keys work

The keys let you:
move around the menus
view data stored in the 795x
(VIEW mode)
edit the data.
(EDIT mode)
Some keys do different things according to where you are in the menu system. For example:
ENTER key
This key does nothing until you get into EDIT mode. After
you have edited the data, pressing ENTER accepts the
changes and puts the 795x back into VIEW mode.
c key
When you move through the menu structure this selects

any option shown against the key. But, when in VIEW
mode, pressing c lists the display units.
INFORMATION
MENU key
This key does nothing if you are in EDIT mode. At other

times, it takes you to the alarm/event sub-menu.
The sections which follow tell you more about what the keys do and how you use them.
5.5 Using the keys to move around the menus

The keys which you can use to move around the menu system are:
Page 5.2
UP-ARROW
Moves the display up to the previous page of the menu. If

there is no previous page, it does nothing.
DOWN-ARROW
Moves the display down to the next page of the menu. If

there is no next page, this key does nothing.
a - d KEYS
Each key selects the menu option against it. If any of them
does not have an option, the key does nothing.
795x Op Man/CC
BACK
Returns you to the previous step.
MENU
Moves you straight to the top menu.
INFORMATION
Is a short-cut to the ALARM/EVENT sub-menu.
PRINT
Is a short-cut to the PRINTER sub-menu.
MULTIVIEW
(bottom key)
You can define a USER DISPLAY which shows up to four

items of data, lines of descriptive text, or both. Pressing
USER DISPLAY shows the display you have defined.
Note: Keys other than those listed above have no effect.

When you move around the menus, the display appears similar to the one shown in the diagram
below. Points to note are:
The display shows all details right-justified.
A down-arrow at the bottom left of the display means that the menu has one or more
pages after the one being shown.
An up-arrow at the top left of the display means that the menu has one or more
pages before the one being shown.
An arrow (>) at the right-hand end of a line shows that there is an associated menu at
the next level down.
a
Sub-menu 1
Location descriptor
Sub-menu 2
Sub-menu 3
b
c
d
A typical display in the menu structure
795x Op Man/CC
Page 5.3
5.6 Using the keys to view stored data

a
Specific gravity
0.125
Live
c
d
A typical display in VIEW mode

The diagram above shows a typical display when you view data. All information is right-justified.
Line 1
shows the description.
Line 2
shows the current value (or text for indirection type).
Line 3
shows the units (if any). If there are no units this line is blank.
Line 4
shows LIVE, SET, FB (FALLBACK) or FAIL to indicate the state of the current
value shown in Line 2, where appropriate.
These indications mean:
The data shown is live data received from the transducer or
LIVE
transmitter connected to the 795x.
SET
You have entered a fixed value for the data; this value does
not change unless you change it or make it live.
FALLBACK
A fallback or default value has been used to obtain the

value for the data.
FAIL
The input has failed.
Optionally, Line 4 may also show the locations identification and MODBUS identification,
where the data is stored. You can display this information by using the a key.
The keys which you can use to view stored data are:
Page 5.4
a KEY
Toggles between the locations identification or the MODBUS

identification. This is displayed to the left of the status indication
on Line 4 of the display.
b KEY
Puts the 795x into EDIT mode so that you can edit the displayed
data. (See next section)
c KEY
Shows a list of the units in which the data can be displayed.

(Select one by using the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW keys.)
UP-ARROW
After you have used the c KEY to display the list of units in
which data can be displayed, use this key if you want to scroll
up through the list. Stop at the unit you want.
DOWNARROW
After you have used the c KEY to display the list of units in
which data can be displayed, use this key if you want to scroll
down through the list. Stop at the unit you want.
795x Op Man/CC
5.7 Using the keys to edit information

You can edit:
text
multiple-choice information
numerical information
units of measurement
the date and time
a
Base pressure
1.000_
bar abs
Set
b
c
d
A typical display during

numerical editing
To enter the editing mode when viewing data, press the b key.
The keys which you use to edit these types of information are:
(a) Text editing
LEFT
Moves the cursor to the left along the line of text you are editing.
RIGHT
Moves the cursor to the right along the line of text you are
editing.
UP-ARROW
This key changes the character at the current cursor position. It

scrolls forwards through the alpha-numeric character set. Stop
when the character you want is displayed.
DOWNARROW
Changes the character at the current cursor position. It scrolls

backwards through the alpha-numeric character set. Stop when
the character you want is displayed.
0-9 KEYS
Each key enters a single digit.
b KEY
If you are satisfied with the changes you have made, press b to
accept the changes and go back to VIEW mode. (Note: the
ENTER key also does this.)
c KEY
Shows a list of the units in which the data can be displayed.

(Select one by using the UP-ARROW or DOWN-ARROW keys.)
d KEY
If an item of data which is currently displayed can be made LIVE

or SET, use this key to toggle between LIVE and SET .
ENTER
If you are satisfied with the changes you have made, press
ENTER to accept the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
(The b key also does this.)
CLR
This clears a line of text.
BACK
If you dont want to keep the changes you have made, press
BACK to abandon the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
LOWER or
UPPER
CASE TEXT
Toggles between lower and upper case letters.
CLR
+/-
795x Op Man/CC
Page 5.5
(b) Multiple-choice editing
CLR
UP-ARROW
Scrolls up through the available options.
DOWN-ARROW
Scrolls down through the available options.
b KEY
If you are satisfied with the changes you have made, press b
to accept the changes and go back to VIEW mode. (ENTER
also does this.)
ENTER
If you are satisfied with the changes you have made, press
ENTER to accept the changes and go back to VIEW mode.
(The b key also does this.)
CLR
Reverts to the original selection.
BACK
(c) Numerical editing
0
+/-
EXP
CLR
Page 5.6
LEFT
Erases the digit to the left of the cursor.
0-9 KEYS
PLUS/ MINUS
This changes the sign of the number. Pressing it repeatedly

toggles between PLUS and MINUS.
DOT
Inserts a decimal point.
EXP
Use this key if you want to show numbers in exponent form.
b KEY
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press b. The
795x then goes back into VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER also does
this.)
ENTER
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press

ENTER. the 795x then goes back into VIEW mode. (Note: b
also does this.)
CLR
Clears the line you are currently editing.
BACK
795x Op Man/CC
Numerical entry
When you type in a number the first digit appears at the left of the display and each successive
digit is to the right of the one just entered. A number being entered over-types any existing
number.
Location identifiers
These appear on the display in the same way as reals or integers. However, when you accept the
number (by pressing b or ENTER) the contents of the location appears on line 2 of the display.
(d) Units editing
CLR
UP-ARROW
Scrolls forwards through the available options.
DOWN-ARROW
Scrolls backwards through the available options.
c KEY
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press c.

The 795x then goes back into VIEW mode.
(ENTER also does this.)
ENTER

ENTER. the 795x then goes back into VIEW mode.
(The c key also does this.)
CLR
Reverts to the original selection.
BACK
(e) Date and time editing

The data and time are displayed in the format: DD/MM/YYYY HH:MM:SS. When you edit the
date and time the cursor moves to the right but skips the : and / characters.
CLR
795x Op Man/CC
LEFT
Moves the cursor to the left.
RIGHT
Moves the cursor to the right.
0-9 KEYS
b KEY
If you want to accept the changes you have made, press b.

The 795x then goes back into VIEW mode. (Note: ENTER
also does this.)
ENTER

ENTER. the 795x then goes back into VIEW mode. (Note: b
also does this.)
CLR
Restore the previous contents.
BACK
Page 5.7
5.8 Summary of key functions

The diagrams on the next two pages provide a visual summary of the function of each key when in
various modes.
What the key does when...
Key
...moving around
the menus
...in VIEW
mode
...in one of the following

EDIT modes:
Text editing
Multiple-choice editing
Numeric editing
Units editing
Date & time editing
UP-ARROW
Pages UP in a menu.
(Does nothing if top
page already shown.)
Selects which
units to show
on display
Scrolls through character set

Scrolls through available options
Does nothing
Pages DOWN in a menu.

(Does nothing if last page
already shown.)
Selects which
units to show
on display
Scrolls through character set

Scrolls through available options
Does nothing
Goes to the top menu
Goes to the top menu
Does nothing
Goes to the previous

menu
Goes to the previous

menu
Cancels changes and goes

back to VIEW mode
Chooses line a
from a menu
Toggles between:
(1) location ID
(2) nothing
Does nothing
Chooses line b
from a menu
Goes to EDIT mode
Accepts changes and goes

back to VIEW mode
Does nothing
Chooses line c
from a menu
Goes into units editing

mode. (See UP &
DOWN arrow keys)
Does nothing
Accepts changes and goes
back to VIEW mode
Chooses line d
from a menu
Toggles between
LIVE and SET
(where appropriate)
Does nothing
Goes to alarm/event
sub-menu
Goes to alarm/event
sub-menu
Does nothing
Opens the print menu
Opens the print menu
Does nothing
Views the
MULTIVIEW display
you have defined
Views the
MULTIVIEW display
you have defined
Does nothing
DOWN-ARROW
MENU
BACK
a KEY
a
b KEY
b
c KEY
c
d KEY
INFORMATION
PRINT
USER DISPLAY
(TOP blank key)
Summary of what the keys do - part 1
Page 5.8
795x Op Man/CC
What the key does when...
Key
...moving around
the menus
...in VIEW
mode
...in one of the following

EDIT modes:
Text editing
Multiple-choice editing
Numeric editing
Units editing
Date & time editing
BOTTOM blank key

KEY NOT USED
Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Accepts changes and

goes back to VIEW mode
Does nothing
Does nothing
Moves the cursor LEFT

Does nothing
Erases the last digit
Does nothing
Does nothing
Moves the cursor RIGHT

Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Deletes character at cursor

Reverts to original selection
Clears the line of numerals
Restores previous contents
Does nothing
Does nothing
Does nothing
Inserts a decimal point
Does nothing
Does nothing
Change to upper or lower case

Does nothing
Changes the sign of a number
Does nothing
Does nothing
Insert space at cursor

Does nothing
Inserts the exponent
Selects another stream

if there is more than
one supported.
Does nothing
ENTER
LEFT
RIGHT
CLR
CLR
DOT
PLUS/MINUS
+/EXP
EXP
STREAM SELECT
Does nothing
1
2
0-9 KEYS
Do nothing
Do nothing
Enter a digit
Do nothing
Summary of what the keys do - part 2
795x Op Man/CC
Page 5.9
5.9 The 795x character set

You can use any of the 96 characters shown below as part of your display.
The 795x character set
5.10 LED indicators

The alarms and indicators are:
Security Indicator
this shows the current security level of the system. The indicator is:
RED FLASHING - the instrument is at Calibration level
RED - Engineer level: the instrument can be configured.
ORANGE - Operator level: limits can be changed.
GREEN - World level: no parameters can be changed.
For more information about these, refer to Chapter 11.

Alarm Indicators
Page 5.10
these are the Input, System and Limit alarms. For more information
about these, refer to Chapter 8: Alarms.
795x Op Man/CC
Chapter 6 The menu system
6. The menu system

Before you can configure and operate the 795X you must have some understanding of how the
menu system works. The menus are simple, logically-arranged and intuitive so they should
present no problems to the average user.
This chapter tells you how a typical menu structure is arranged. Because instruments in the 795x
family have different software according to the application for which they are being used, the
description given here is general so that it applies to any instrument.
This chapter also explains the conventions used in the diagrams, used throughout this manual,
which show you parts of the menu system.
NOTE:
Diagrams showing the menu system used in your application are given in
Chapters 12 Routine operation.
6.2 What the menu system does

The menu system lets you:
Configure the 795x

Operate it
View data and settings stored in the 795x
Edit data stored in the 795x
6.3 How the menu system works

When you switch on the instrument, a menu (known as the Main Menu) appears. If you make
choices from this menu it leads you on to other, lower-level menus (Levels 2, 3 and so on).
Therefore, you can think of the menu system as having a tree-like structure which repeatedly
branches to lower levels.
Where a menu has more lines than can fit on to the display, it consists of two or more pages. You
can scroll up or down between the pages by using the UP-ARROW and DOWN-ARROW keys.
(These keys do nothing if there is no page to scroll to.)
At the lowest menu level, there is a black, triangle shaped mark in the bottom-left corner of the
795x display. This mark indicates that a data (location) page is on the screen rather than a list of
sub-menu options.
a
Prime density value
265.34
Kg/m3
Live
A typical data location with the triangle shaped mark.
b
c
d
795x Op Man/EB
Page 6.1
PAGE 1 OPTION 1
PAGE 1 OPTION 2
PAGE UP
PAGE 1 OPTION 3
PAGE 1 OPTION 4
PAGE 2 OPTION 1
Select an option to
go to a menu at the
next level down
PAGE 2 OPTION 2
PAGE 2 OPTION 3
PAGE 2 OPTION 4
PAGE 3 OPTION 1
PAGE DOWN
PAGE 3 OPTION 2
Paging up and down a menu
Page 6.2
795x Op Man/EB
6.4 A general example of part of a menu system

Figure 6.1 shows an example of part of a menu system. This particular menu may not appear on
your instrument - it is here only as an illustration.
Figure 6.1: An example of part of a menu system
Main Menu
Flow rates
Flow totals
Line density
Base density / SG
Level 2 menus
a
Line temperature
Pressure
Energy
Raw gas data
Density B temp
Base temperature
Absolute zero
Line temperature
Sensor readings
c
d
a
b
Level 3 menus
Density B temp
c
d
V
Line temp reading
Line pressure
b
c
a
b
Diff press hi lmt
c
d
Base pressure
Limits
c
d
DensA temp reading

DensB temp reading
Line pressure
c
d
6.4.1 Keys
The shaded keys are keys which:
Lead you on to another menu, (such as keys a - d on the first page of the Main Menu)
Take you on to another page in a multi-page menu (these are always DOWN-ARROW keys,
such as the one next to the first page of the Main menu in the previous example).
Take you back to the previous page in a multi-page menu (these are always UP-ARROW
keys).
White keys are keys which:

Dont do anything (such as the d key in the third page of the Main Menu in the previous
example).
Dont lead on to another menu or menu page.
6.4.1 Displays
Each display is shown as it appears, except for variables which are shown as text in brackets. For
example:
(Value)
The display actually shows the value of the parameter.
(Units)
The display actually shows the name of the units.
(Live or set)
The display actually shows LIVE or SET, whichever applies to that item.
795x Op Man/EB
Page 6.3
Page 6.4
795x Op Man/EB
Chapter 7 Serial Communications and Networking
7.
Serial Communications and Networking
7.1. What this Chapter tells you

This Chapter is a comprehensive guide to serial communications and networking with the 795x.
Since, this subject area is vast (with countless reference books), the scope is restricted to the
795x point of view. Therefore, it is assumed that the reader has a reasonable working
knowledge of data communications and networking.
A recommended reference for this Chapter is the 1992 edition of Modicon Modbus Protocol
Reference Guide (PL_MBUS-300 Rev.D). This covers the MODBUS protocol in much greater
depth.
7.2. 795X Communication Capabilities

The 795x has extensive facilities that allow it to communicate with almost any device that has
support for Modicon MODBUS protocol.
Two serial interface standards supported - RS-232C and RS-485 (1/2 duplex). They are
software selectable if there is a choice for a particular port.
Hardware and
connection
7950 (Klippon)
7951
Port 1
RS-232C
RS-232C
Port 2
Port 3
RS-232C
RS-232 or 485
RS-232 or 485
RS-232 or 485
Serial ports and supported serial interfaces
7.3. MODBUS from the 795X point of view

Introduction
The Modicon MODBUS specification is designed to transfer data in 1-bit (coil) or 16-bit (register)
blocks. This protocol has not been designed to deal with data, such as floating point numbers,
which require a minimum of 32-bit blocks. For this reason, every manufacturer of computer
equipment which deals with this type of data must decide in which way the protocol should be
extended. As a result, many different implementations exist for the transfer of 32-bit floating
point data.
Floating Point numbers
Floating point data within the 795x are stored as 64-bit IEEE numbers. When requested over a
MODBUS link, they are automatically translated into 32-bit IEEE numbers.
A requester must ask for the register required with the quantity of registers. The response will be
the 32-bit IEEE number.
Word swap
Since Modicon did not define 32-bit transfers, the order of the words for a 32-bit value is also not
defined. The 795X provides the facility to choose whether the first or second word is the most
significant. This feature is individually selectable for each port.
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.1
Chapter 7 Serial communications and Networking
Flow totalisers
Since a totalisers value builds continuously to a maximum and then is re-set to 0, this type of
data cannot be transferred in quite the same way as a conventional floating point. The reason is
because of the way in which a floating point number is stored.
A 32-bit floating point number can represent only 7 significant digits. Therefore as the value
grows, less and less digits are available for the fractional part. In addition, 7 digits are not
generally acceptable for a totaliser.
For these reasons, the 795X returns totalisers as 32-bit integers. The fractional part is also
available in a separate register if required.
Supported Commands
The 795X supports two commands:
1. Command 3 - Read multiple registers
2. Command 16 - Write multiple registers
All data stored within the 795X is represented by one or more 16-bit registers. There may be
registers which contain a collection of bits. In this case, a 16-bit register is still used rather than
provide individual bit (coil) access.
Register Addressing
The database in the 795X uses a unique index (i.e. location number) for each parameter.
Although a location number is not normally displayed, pressing the a soft-key when a database
th
variable is displayed, will cause the location number to appear on the 4 line.
MODBUS register numbers are always expressed as the database location number minus 1.
Therefore, a requesting device will ask for MODBUS register 16 in order to read the data in
database location 17.
Virtual slaves
The 795X can respond to more than one MODBUS address on a single port. The address set
for the MODBUS slave function is used for the 795x database. However, it is possible to
configure the 795X to make available the alarm logger, event logger and 2 high speed list
systems on consecutive MODBUS addresses beyond the base address.
e.g.
Page 7.2
Modbus slave (base) address
= 10 (0x0A)
Alarm logger address
= 11 (0x0B)
High speed list1
= 12 (0x0C)
High speed list2
= 13 (0x0D)
795x Op. Man/EA
7.4. Connecting the 795X to A MODBUS network

7.4.1.
RS-232 connections
RS-232C serial interface (Port 1)
7950 (Klippon)
Tx 1
Rx 1
Common
7951 (D-type & Klippon)
PL3/1
PL3/2
PL3/3
Com 1 Tx
Com 1 Rx
Com 0V
Function
SK1/2
SK1/3
SK1/5
Transmit data
Receive data
0V GND (Signal Ground)
RS-232C serial interface (Port 2)

7950 (Klippon)
Tx 2
Rx 2
Common
RTS 2
CTS 2
Protect GND
7951(D-type & Klippon)
PL3/5
PL3/6
PL3/7
PL3/8
PL3/9
PL3/4
Com 2 Tx
Com 2 Rx
Com 0V
Com 2 CTS
Com 2 RTS
Not applicable
Function
SK2/2
SK2/3
SK2/5
SK2/7
SK2/8
Transmit data
Receive data
Clear to send
Request to send
Frame (chassis) protection
RS232 Pins (Port 3)

7950 (Klippon)
Tx 3
Rx 3
Common
RTS 3
CTS 3
Protect GND
PL4/1
PL4/2
PL4/3
PL3/4
PL3/5
PL4/8
Com 3 Tx
Com 3 Rx
Com 0V
Com 3 CTS
Com 3 RTS
Not applicable
Function
SK3/2
SK3/3
SK3/5
SK3/7
SK3/8
Transmit data
Receive data
Clear to send
Request to send
A simple MODBUS network can consist of just two devices. They could be an IBM compatible
PC and a 795x connected by a RS-232C straight through cable.
PC D-type
Com port
2
3
5
Rx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Signal Ground
7950
7951
PL3/1
SK1/2
PL3/2
SK1/3
PL3/3
SK1/5
PL3/4
Note:
7950 only. Connect to cable
screen at a single point
PC connection to 7950/7951 port 1

RS-232 wiring with no RTS/CTS handshaking
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.3

PC D-type
Com port
2
3
5
Rx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Signal Ground
7
8
RTS
CTS
7950
7951
PL3/5
SK2/2
PL3/6
SK2/3
PL3/3
SK2/5
PL3/8
SK2/7
PL3/9
SK2/8
PL3/10
Note:
7950 only. Connect to cable
screen at a single point
PC connection to 7950/7951 port 2

RS-232 wiring with RTS/CTS handshaking
Larger and more intricate MODBUS networks are possible. For example, a supervisory system
(such as Solartrons MCS) may want to get flow rates from each 7951 dedicated to a stream.
7.4.2.
RS-485 (half duplex) connections

RS-485 serial interface (Port 1)
There is no support for RS-485 on port one.

7950 (Klippon)
No support
for RS-485
on port 2

Com 2 Rx/Tx+
Com 2 Rx/TxCom 0V
SK2/1
SK2/9
SK2/5
Purpose
Transmit/receive data +
Transmit/receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground)

7950 (Klippon)
Rx/Tx 3a
Rx/Tx 3b
Common
Protect GND
Page 7.4
PL4/6
PL4/7
PL4/3
PL4/8

Com 3 Rx/Tx+
Com 3 Rx/TxCom 0V
Not applicable
SK3/1
SK3/9
SK3/5
Purpose
Transmit/receive data +
Transmit/receive data 0V GND (Signal Ground)
795x Op. Man/EA
Solartron has often established a MODBUS network by connecting a flow-meter prover computer
to multiple stream flow computers with a RS-485 cable.
7951
7951
7951
Prover
Stream 1
Stream 2
SK3/1
Tx/Rx+
SK3/1
SK3/9
Tx/Rx-
SK3/9
SK3/5
Signal Ground
SK3/5
Tx/Rx+
SK3/1
Tx/Rx-
SK3/9
Signal Ground
SK3/5
Connecting 7951s (Prover & multiple streams) on port 3

with RS-485 wiring.
7950
7950
7950
Prover
Stream 1
Stream 2
PL4/6
Tx/Rx+
PL4/6
PL4/7
Tx/Rx-
PL4/7
PL4/3
Signal Ground
PL4/3
Tx/Rx+
Tx/RxSignal Ground
PL4/6
PL4/7
PL4/3
PL4/8
Note:
7950 only. Connect to cable screen at a single point
Connecting 7950s (Prover & multiple stream) on port 3

with RS-485 wiring.
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.5
7.5. Configuring the 795X to be A MODBUS slave

7.5.1.
Port configuration
Select the menu: <Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Communications> and then proceed
through the data location check-lists that are applicable to the installation:
Port one is connected to a MODBUS network
Data name
Comms port1 owner
Port1 Baud rates
Port1 Char Format
Port1 handshaking
P1 MODB slave add
Port1 Modbus mode
P1 Modbus byte order
P1 Modbus Features
Instructions
Select the Modbus slave option. Default selection is None
Choose from a range of rates that go as low as 300 bits per
second (bps) and as high as 19200bps. Default rate is 9600
Choose the appropriate character format that specifies the
number of data bits, number of stop bits and type of parity
checking.
Default format is 8bits none 1stop.
Choose between None and XonXoff. Default option is none.
Choose the numeric MODBUS slave (base) address for the 795x.
Default address is 0.
Choose between RTU and ASCII. Default mode is RTU.
Choose between Modbus default and Word swap.
Default byte order is Modbus default.
This enables virtual slaves and makes their data available to a
MODBUS master. Available options are combinations of the
words Alarm, List1 and List2. Default option is None.
Port two is connected to a MODBUS network
Data name
Comms port2 owner
Port2 Baud rates
Port2 Char Format
Port2 handshaking
Port2 RS232 / 485
P2 MODB slave add
Port2 Modbus mode
P2 Modbus Features
Page 7.6
Instructions
Choose from a range of rates that go as low as 300 bits per second
(bps) and as high as 19200bps. Default rate is 9600
Choose the appropriate character format that specifies the number
of data bits, number of stop bits and type of parity checking.
Choose between None, XonXoff and CTS/RTS.
Default option is none.
Choose between RS 232 or RS 485.
Default signal standard is RS 232.
MODBUS master. Available options are combinations of the
words Alarm, List1 and List2. Default option is None.
795x Op. Man/EA

Port three is connected to a MODBUS network
Data name
Instructions
Comms port3 owner

Choose from a range of rates that go as low as 300 bits per second
(bps) and as high as 19200bps. Default rate is 9600
Choose the appropriate character format that specifies the number
of data bits, number of stop bits and type of parity checking.
Choose between None, XonXoff and CTS/RTS. Default option
is none.
Port3 Baud rates

Port3 Char Format
Port3 handshaking
Port3 RS232 / 485
Choose between RS 232 or RS 485. Default signal standard is

RS 232.
P3 MODB slave add

Port3 Modbus mode

MODBUS master. Available options are combinations of the words
Alarm, List1 and List2. Default option is None.

P3 Modbus Features
7.5.2.
High speed list configuration

This facility allows groups of data locations to be kept together for easy access.
High speed list one
Step 1 Find the <MODBus Comms list1> sub-menu.
Step 2 Set location numbers into the pointers.
There are 20 pointers available:
Data names
MODB DBM list1 ptr 1
:

High speed list two
Step 1 Find the <MODBus Comms list2> sub-menu.
Step 2 Set location numbers into the pointers.
There are 20 pointers available:
Data names
:
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.7
7.6. Database access over A MODBUS network

7.6.1.
Introduction
There are three types of information that can be obtained from the 795x database - Data values,
data states and reply data size and type.
Examples are provided for each information type . They show the command (hexadecimal
values) that needs to be transmitted by the MODBUS master and the reply to expect from the
MODBUS slave. Abbreviated meanings are shown, under the transmission and reply lists, to
distinguish the important elements. An analysis of the response from the 795x is provided at the
end of the example.
Abbreviation
Slv.
Err.
Fn.
Reg. Cnt
Reg. ID
D.C.
The data
Chk sum
Meaning
The slave (base) address. It is 0x0A for the examples.
Error code. E.g. 83 = Error reading / Exception
Function code. E.g. 03 = Read multiple registers
Number of registers requested
Register identification number
Number of data bytes in reply
Data bytes that contain the useful information
Calculated checksum - always two bytes at the end
Some data locations may not be in use or may have a No access security attribute and,
therefore, be permanently un-available. The response from a command to read such data is of
the form:
Receive
Meaning
0A
Slv.
83
Err.
B1
Chk
33
sum
Important note :
The database construction is dependent on the software version and issue. For a full list of data
locations, locate the ASCII text file with the filename extension .MAN on your FC CONFIG
installation disk. Otherwise, contact the Service Department at Solartron.
7.6.2.
Database information type 1 : Data values

795x data values are mapped within the first 10,000 MODBUS registers.
Example 1: Read Prime SG value from location 0718
Action
Read MODBUS register 0717:
Transmit
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
02
Reg.
CD
ID
00
Reg.
02
Cnt.
55
Chk
37
sum
Receive
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
04
D.C.
41
C8
The
00
data
00
D5
Chk
31
sum
Result
The data value, 0x41C8000, translates from a 32bit IEEE number into the floating point number
25.0
This is a very useful PC based package, developed by Solartron, for interacting with the 795x. It is supplied only when
requested.
Page 7.8
795x Op. Man/EA
Example 2: Write a new value to Prime SG value (location 0718)

Action
Write to MODBUS register 0717:
Transmit
Meaning
0A
Slv.
10
Fn.
02
Reg.
CD
ID
00
Reg.
02
Cnt
04
D.C.
1B
IEEE
00
32b
00
data
00
val.
04
Chk
C6
sum
Result
Prime SG value changes value. The 0x1B000000, translates from a 32bit IEEE number into the
floating point number 1.05879118E-22.
Example 3 : Read Alarm state from location 0308

Action
Transmit
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
01
Reg
33
ID
00
Reg
0B
Cnt.
F4
Chk
85
sum
Receive
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
16
D.C
20
The
20
data
30
A
31
B
31
X
30
Y
00
00
6E
Chk
33
sum
Result
There are 22 (0x16) bytes of returned data. It is padded out with sixteen ASCII spaces (0x20).
Alarm
digit
A
B
X
Y
7.6.3.
Data
30
31
31
30
Alarm
state
0
1
1
0
Database information type 2 : Data states

795x data states (i.e. Live, Set, etc.) are mapped within MODBUS registers that range from
30001 to 40000.
Example 1: Read the default power-on status of Prime SG value (location 0718)
Action
Transmit
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
77
Reg.
FD
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
0F
Chk
Receive
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
02
D.C.
00
The
01
data
DC
Chk
45
sum
35
sum
Result
The data value, 0x0001, indicates that SG Prime value has a SET status at present.
Example 2: Change status of Prime SG value (location 0718)

Action
Change status to LIVE by writing 0x0000 to MODBUS register 30717:
Transmit
Meaning
795x Op. Man/EA
0A
Slv.
10
Fn.
77
Reg.
FD
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
02
D.C.
00
Data
00
Val.
0F
Chk
35
sum
Page 7.9
Example 3: Read status of Alarm state (location 0308)

Action
Transmit
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
76
Reg.
63
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
6F
Chk
Receive
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
02
D.C.
00
The
FF
data
5D
Chk
C5
sum
27
sum
Result
The data value, 0x00FF, indicates that Alarm state does not have a status.
7.6.4.
Database information type 3 : Reply size and type

The size and type of data value registers are sequentially mapped to MODBUS registers that
are in the range 20001 to 29999. This information is extremely useful for determining how many
registers to request.
Example 1: Read size and type of data available from register 0717 (i.e. Prime SG value)
Action
Transmit
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
50
Reg.
ED
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
63
Chk
Receive
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
02
D.C.
09
The
16
data
9A
Chk
1B
sum
B4
sum
Result
2 bytes of data returned:
0x09 = String type
0x16 = 22 bytes of data that will be returned
Example 2: Read size and type of data available from register 0307 (i.e. Alarm state)
Action
Transmit
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
4F
Reg.
53
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
04
Chk
Receive
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
02
D.C.
07
The
04
data
1E
Chk
76
sum
44
sum
Result
2 bytes of data returned:
07 = Type : IEEE 32-bit floating point number
04 = Size : 4 bytes of data that will be returned. Therefore Reg. Cnt. Will be 00 02.
Page 7.10
795x Op. Man/EA
This table should be used for interpreting responses for other data locations:
Database type
Character
Un-signed 8-bit integer
Signed 16-bit integer
32-bit floating point number
64-bit floating point number
String
Option
Location pointer
Time and date
795x Op. Man/EA
Database
size (bytes)
MODBUS
Size (bytes)
Type value
1
1
2
2
4
4
4
8
22
2
2
16
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
22
2
2
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Page 7.11
7.7. Alarm logger access over A MODBUS network

Alarm logger information is available from virtual slave one. It is not advisable to clear or accept
alarms using the front panel while the alarm log is being queried by a MODBUS master. Doing
so, could result in the MODBUS master having an in-correct view of the alarm log.
The example, that follows, demonstrates the correct procedure for obtaining current alarm
information. Slave one address is 0x0B for this example.
Commands are a list of hexadecimal values. These values need to be transmitted by the
MODBUS master. Replies from the MODBUS slave are also shown as hexadecimal values.
Abbreviated words are shown, under the transmission and reply lists, to distinguish the
important elements. An analysis of the response from the 795x is provided.
Abbreviation
Slv.
End
Err.
Fn.
Reg. Cnt
Reg. ID
D.C.
The data
Chk sum
Meaning
String terminator
Step one : Find out how many alarms have been logged.
Action
Read MODBUS register 1999 (quantity of registers=1):
Transmit
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
07
Reg.
CF
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
Chk
Receive
Meaning
0A
Slv.
03
Fn.
02
D.C.
00
The
02
data
Chk
sum
sum
Result
Reply indicates that there are two alarms in the alarm log.
Step two : Obtain current ID for the second alarm.

(Current alarm IDs are held in registers 1 to 30. The first entry in the alarm log is at register 0.)
Action
Transmit
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
00
Reg.
01
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
D5
Chk
Receive
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
02
D.C.
00
The
1B
data
60
Chk
4E
sum
60
sum
Result
Reply indicates that the unique current alarm ID is 0x001B.
Step three : Set and then check current alarm ID

(This makes further alarm information available for the remaining steps)
Page 7.12
795x Op. Man/EA

Action 1
Write 0x001B to MODBUS register 999 (request 1 register):
Transmit
Meaning
0B
Slv.
10
Fn.
03
Reg.
E7
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
02
D.C.
00
The
D3
sum
1B
data
BC
Chk
2C
sum
Action 2 (optional)
Read MODBUS register 999 (request 1 register)
Transmit
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
03
Reg.
E7
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
34
Chk
Receive
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
02
D.C.
00
The
1B
data
60
Chk
4E
sum
Result
Current alarm ID is confirmed to be 0x001B.
Step four : Get further information about the current alarm

(To get information for another alarm, use step three with another current alarm ID)
Action 1 (optional) - Obtain time and date
Transmit
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
03
Reg
F1
ID
00
Reg
08
Cnt.
15
Chk
11
sum
Receive
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
10
D.C
00
22
00
3A
00
0B
data
00
08
07
CD
00
0E
Result
Reply data is interpreted as follows:
0022 = 34 seconds
003A = 58 minutes
000B = 11 hours
0008 = Month of August
07CD = Year
th
000E = 14 . Day of month
Time and date is 11:58:34 AM, 14/08/1997
Action 2 (optional) - Obtain alarm code, qualifier, etc.
Transmit
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
03
Reg.
F2
ID
00
Reg.
02
Cnt.
65
Chk
16
sum
Receive
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
04
D.C.
00
36
The
48
data
20
86
Chk
E5
sum
Result
0036 = An alarm code
48
= Additional alarm text letter : H for high limit
20
= Type : 2 = Present, State : 0 = Pending
Notes on other results:

1. Type of alarm. 0=Off, 1=On, 2=Present
2. State of alarm. 0=Pending, 1=Accepted
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.13
Action 3 (optional) - Obtain alarm text length

Read MODBUS register 2001 (quantity of registers=1)
Transmit
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
07
Reg.
D0
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
84
Chk
2D
sum
Receive
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
02
D.C.
00
The
12
data
A0
Chk
48
sum
Result
Alarm text length is 18 bytes (0x0012).
At present, the length returned is always 18 bytes (i.e. 9 registers). The request for 9 registers
has been assumed for command to the get the alarm text. Do not assume it will always be 18
bytes.
Action 4 (optional) - Obtain alarm text

Transmit
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
03
Reg
F3
ID
00
Reg
09
Cnt.
75
Chk
11
sum
Receive
Meaning
0B
Slv.
03
Fn.
12
D.C.
53
S
47
G
20
6C
l
69
I
6D
m
69
I
74
t
20
20
00
End
Note : Checksum of reply is B9 98
Page 7.14
795x Op. Man/EA
7.8
High speed list access over A MODBUS network

Two high speed lists can be configured (see earlier section) to make a collection of locations
sequentially accessible.
High speed list one
This is addressable through virtual slave 2 (i.e. slave address+2). Twenty contiguous pointers
can be set-up to make twenty locations available for this list.
This is the full MODBUS register map:
MODBUS
Register
0
Read (Command 3)
Write (Command 16)
21+
Register association table length

Read value from location associated
with pointer 1.
with pointer 2.
Read value
with pointer 20.
Not allowed
Not allowed
Write value to location associated with
pointer 1
pointer 2
Write value pointer 3 to 19
pointer 20
Not allowed
10000
Register association table length
Not allowed
10001
Read location number for pointer 1
Not allowed - Set using menus
10002
:

Read location
10020
10021+
Not allowed
Not allowed
20000
Type + size for register 10000
Not allowed
20001
Type & size for location (pointer 1)
Not allowed
20002
Not allowed
Type & size .
Not allowed
20020
Not allowed
20021+
Not allowed
Not allowed
30001
Read data location status (pointer 1)
Write data location status (pointer 1)
30002
Read data
Write data
30020
1
2
:
20
High speed list two

This is addressable through virtual slave 2 (i.e. slave address+3). Twenty contiguous pointers
can be set-up to make twenty locations available for this list.
Note that the register map is identical to high speed list one.
The examples, that follow, show how to get all different types of information from the high speed
list register map.
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.15
Each example shows the command as hexadecimal values. These are the values that should be
transmitted by the MODBUS master. Also shown is the reply to expect from the MODBUS slave.
An analysis of the response from the 795x is provided at the end of the example.
Abbreviated meanings are shown, under the transmission and reply lists, to distinguish the
important elements.
Abbreviation
Meaning
Slv.
End
Err.
Fn.
Reg. Cnt
Reg. ID
D.C.
The data
Chk sum

String terminator
Some data locations may not be in use or may have a No access security attribute and,
therefore, be permanently un-available. The response from a command to read such data is of
the form:
Receive
Meaning
0A
Slv.
83
Err.
B1
Chk
33
sum
Note : Data availability is dependent on the software version and issue.

For these examples, high speed list one has been configured with MODB DBM list2 ptr 1 (i.e
pointer 1) set to location 0756 (Software version).
Example 1: Read location ID from first pointer

Action
Transmit
Meaning
0C
Slv.
03
Fn.
27
Reg.
11
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
DF
Chk
Receive
Meaning
0C
Slv.
03
Fn.
02
D.C.
02
The
F4
data
95
Chk
62
sum
A6
sum
Result
The data value, 0x2F4, indicates location 0756.
Example 2: Read data type and size value for location 0756 (through pointer 1)
Action
Transmit
Meaning
0C
Slv.
03
Fn.
4E
Reg.
21
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
C2
Chk
Receive
Meaning
0C
Slv.
03
Fn.
02
D.C.
09
The
16
data
12
Chk
1B
sum
35
sum
Result
0x09 = Type : String
0x16 = Size : 22 bytes (11 registers)
Page 7.16
795x Op. Man/EA
Example 3: Read value from location 0756 (through pointer 1)

Action
Transmit
Meaning
0C
Slv.
03
Fn.
00
Reg.
01
ID
00
Reg.
0B
Cnt.
54
Chk
D0
sum
Receive
Meaning
0C
Slv.
73
s
03
Fn.
73
s
16
D.C.
20
20
20
31
1
2E
.
39
9
31
1
30
0
35
5
00
End
Meaning
31
1
00
End
30
0
40
Chk
20
49
I
AB
sum
Result
Software version string is 1510 Iss 1.90
Example 4: Read status for location 0756 (through pointer 1)

Action
Transmit
Meaning
0C
Slv.
03
Fn.
75
Reg.
31
ID
00
Reg.
01
Cnt.
CE
Chk
Receive
Meaning
0C
Slv.
03
Fn.
02
D.C.
00
The
FF
data
D5
Chk
C5
sum
D4
sum
Result
0x00FF indicates that there is not status for location 0756.
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.17
7.8. Chromatograph access over A MODBUS network

This section is a guide to setting up a 7950/7951 Gas Flow Computer to operate with a single
Gas Chromatograph . A brief overview is followed up by practical examples with connection

diagrams and configuration instructions.
It is advisable to bookmark Chapters 3 (for the lists), 7 and 11 (for PTZ) for easy reference.
7.8.1.
Overview
Gas Flow Computer software can be set-up to regularly request raw gas composition
information, the calorific value and the specific gravity directly from a Gas Chromatograph.
Retrieved gas data is normalised (against the totalled fractions) and then be forwarded on to
7950/7951 Modbus Slaves for calculations or collection by a Supervisory system.
Requests are first made to the Chromatograph for several status flags (Modbus registers) so that
a brief series of checks can be performed.
Checks:
Has a new gas analysis been completed since the last time raw gas data was obtained?
Is data from that new analysis available for retrieval?
No errors reported by the Chromatograph?
The answer has to be yes to all questions before progressing with a request for new gas data.
Otherwise, the whole cycle re-starts with checking the flags again after a selected, fixed interval.
The following table is a list of raw gas components that can be obtained by a 795X Gas Flow
Computer:
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Neo Butane
Iso Butane
Neo Pentane
Iso Pentane
C6+
Nitrogen
Carbon Dioxide
Water
Helium
Oxygen
Carbon Monoxide
Hydrogen
Argon
Raw Gas Composition Components

Each component in the above table is identified to the 795X by a Set Modbus register number.
These numbers are visible within the 795X menu system and can be edited to correspond to a
Modbus register map of the Chromatograph.
The raw C6+ component can, optionally, be split by the 795X Master into weighted fractions of C6
(Neo Hexane), C7 (Neo Heptane) and C8 (Neo Octane). The C6 split/no split option and the
several weighting options are determined during the configuration process.
Newly received raw gas component values are automatically forwarded to all known 795X
Modbus Slaves and then automatically normalised locally by the 795X recipients (Slaves).
Normalisation will also take place on the 795X Master.
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Neo Butane
Iso Butane
Neo Pentane
Iso Pentane
Neo Hexane *
Neo Heptane *
Neo Octane *
Neo Nonane **
Neo Decane **
C6+ *
Nitrogen
Carbon Dioxide
Water
Helium
Oxygen
Carbon Monoxide
Hydrogen
Argon
Normalised Gas Fractions
ABB, Daniels Industries (2221, 2350 and 2551) or Hartmann & Braun 8000 models at present. Contact Solartron for the latest
support information.
Page 7.18
795x Op. Man/EA

Notes:
* C6 can be split into C6, C7 & C8
** Neo Nonane and Neo Decane can be set values but are always forced (set) to 0 when
splitting C6+. There is presently no support for retrieving them from a Chromatograph.
The Modbus Master-Slave arrangement enables two different types of network topology. Two
worked examples are provided as a guide to what can be achieved. Adapt these examples to suit
an installation.
Arrangement One
Master
795X
Port
2* or 3
* 7950 does not

support the
RS-485
interface
on Port 2
RS-485
Chromatograph
(Slave Device 1)
Port 2* or 3
795X
(Slave Device 2)
Port 2* or 3
795X
(Slave Device 3)
Port 2* or 3
795X
(Slave Device 4)
Arrangement Two
Master
795X
Port
1, 2 or 3
Port
2* or 3
* 7950 does not

support the
RS-485
interface
on Port 2
RS-232
RS-485
Chromatograph
(Slave Device 1)
Port 2* or 3
795X
(Slave Device 2)
Port 2* or 3
795X
(Slave Device 3)
Port 2* or 3
795X
(Slave Device 4)
A mixture of 7950 and 7951 Flow Computers is possible in either arrangement. However, there
are a few physical connection restrictions with regards to support for the RS-485 interface. (See
page 7.1)
Note: Each inter-connected 7950 and 7951 must be running the same version and issue of gas
flow computer software.
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.19

7.8.2.
Worked Example 1 (Arrangement Type One)

There are two parts to this worked example:
1. Physical Connections
(See below)
2. Configuration Tasks
(See page 7.21)
7.8.2.1 Physical Connections

The 795X Master, Chromatograph and up to three 795X Slaves can all networked with the same
wiring.
7950
Master
7950
Slave Device 4
7950
Slave Device 3
Port 3
PL4/6
PL4/7
PL4/3
7950
Slave Device 2
Port 3
Port 3
Port 3
Rx/Tx+
PL4/6
PL4/6
PL4/6
Rx/Tx-
PL4/7
PL4/7
PL4/7
Signal
Ground
PL4/3
PL4/3
PL4/3
Chromatograph
Slave Device 1
PL4/8
7950 only:
Connect to cable screen
at a single point.
7950 (Klippon) - RS-485 wiring (no handshaking)
7951
Master
Port 2
SK2/1
SK2/9
SK2/5
7951
Slave Device 4
7951
Slave Device 3
7951
Slave Device 2
Port 3
Port 3
Port 3
Rx/Tx+
SK3/1
SK3/1
SK3/1
Rx/Tx-
SK3/9
SK3/9
SK3/9
Signal Ground
SK3/5
SK3/5
SK3/5
Chromatograph
Slave Device 1
7951 (Klippon/D-Type) - RS-485 wiring (no handshaking)
Page 7.20
795x Op. Man/EA

7.8.2.2 Configuration Tasks
What to do
Review the objectives list and then work through the two
configuration tasks: 795X Master and 795X Slaves.
The Chromatograph is assumed to be already operational.
All communications wiring is assumed to be completed.
Arrangement One
Master
795X
RS-485
* 7950 does not

support the
RS-485
interface
on Port 2
Objectives
1. Configure the Master 795X (See below)
Port
2* or 3
Basic Serial Port Details

Modbus Master Details
Modbus Slave Details
Chromatograph Functionality
Chromatograph
(Slave Device 1)
Port 2* or 3
795X
(Slave Device 2)
Port 2* or 3
795X
(Slave Device 3)
Port 2* or 3
795X
(Slave Device 4)
2. Configure each 795X Slave (Page 7.24)

795X Master
Follow these instructions with the 795X Master:
(Basic Serial Port Details)
1. Select the menu: <Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Communications>/<Ports>
2. Select the appropriate menu for the serial port being used to connect 795X Master to the same
Modbus network as the Chromatograph and all of the 795X Slaves.
3. Work through this data check-list:
Data name
(Some menu searching is required)

Instructions and Comments
Comms port owner
Select the Modbus master option.
Port Baud rates
Select a transmission rate that is suitable for all devices on the Modbus
network.
Port Char Format
Select a format that will be understood by the Chromatograph and all the
795X Slaves.
Port handshaking
Select no handshaking.
Port RS232 / 485
Select RS485.
Port Modbus mode
Select the Modbus transmission mode required for the Modbus network.
P Modbus word order
This selection for this is dependent on what the Chromatograph requires.
P Long reg access
P MODB precision
Notes:
(a) On-screen data names may vary to those shown here. There is usually a number included
in the name to identify a serial port.
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.21
(Modbus Master Details)

4. Select the menu:
<Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Communications>/<MODBus master>
5. Locate the menu data (page) with the Length of timeout descriptor.
6. Select the allowable interval for the Modbus Master send a command and then receive a
response without invoking a time-out condition.
The Modbus command is re-submitted following a time-out only if the maximum number of
command re-submissions is not exceeded.
7. Locate the menu data (page) with the No of retries descriptor. Select the maximum number of
times a Modbus command can be re-submitted before a failure is recorded by a raised alarm.
(Inform Modbus Master of Modbus Slave Details)

8. Navigate into this Modbus Master sub-menu: <Slave devices>
9. Work through this data check-list once for each slave:
Data name
(as displayed)
Slave device func
Select the Chromat option for the Chromatograph (slave device 1 in

arrangement one). For all other 795X Modbus Slave devices, use the
FC Gas option.
Port number
Select the port of the Master 795X that is wired to the same Modbus network
as all the Modbus Slave devices.
Slv device address
Set the value to the Modbus address of the slave device.
Port handshaking
Device word swap
Select the option that is compatible with all Modbus slaves on the Modbus
network.
Slave device data
The Gas basic data is appropriate if Calorific Value and Specific Gravity
are not of interest. Otherwise, select Gas extended data.
Note: Any selection made here only involves the individual slave being
detailed.
Note:
(a) On-screen data names may vary to those shown here. There is usually a number included
to identify a serial port.
10. Navigate into this Modbus Master sub-menu: <Slave data table>
(This is a list of the all the gas composition related data that a Master 795X could broadcast to all known
795X Slaves. Default values are identification numbers that are specific to a release of 795X software.)
Data name
(as displayed)
Slv Gas Data flag
Page 7.22
Ensure the value is the same as the location identification number of the
new gas data flag location on the 795X Slaves.
DO NOT SET THIS VALUE TO ZERO.
795x Op. Man/EA

(Check-list continued )
Data name
(as displayed)
Slv Methane reg
Slv Ethane reg

Slv Propane reg
Ensure that values correspond to the location identification numbers of this

data in the <Raw gas data> menu on all 795X slaves.
Set value to 0 if data is not required to be transmitted or simply not available.
Slv N-Butane reg

Slv I-Butane reg
Slv N-Pentane reg
Slv I- Pentane reg
Slv Nitrogen reg
Slv CO2 reg
Slv Water reg
Slv Helium reg
Slv Oxygen reg
Slv Hyrdogen reg
Slv Argon reg
Slv C6+ reg
Slv N-Hexane
Slv N-Heptane
Slv N-Octane
Chromat CV reg
Ensure the value matches the location identification number of the Calorific
value data location on the 795X Slaves.
Chromat SG reg
Specific gravity data location on the 795X Slaves.
Note:
(a) On-screen data names may vary to those shown here.
(Chromatograph Details)
11. Select the menu: <Configure>/<Chromat>
Data name
(as displayed)

Chromat poll rate
Select the fixed interval between requests for gas composition data.
Chromat C6-Plus type
Select the code that will determine the weighting for the C6 split.
108 - C6 = 0.47466, C7 = 0.3534, C8 = 0.17194
109 - C6 = 0.5, C7 = 0.5, C8 = 0.0
110 - C6 = 0.5, C7 = 0.25, C8 = 0.25
111 - C6 = 0.57143, C7 = 0.28572, C8 = 0.14285
(The following list refers to all the gas composition related data that a Master 795X could get from a
Chromatograph).
Chromat Methane reg
Chromat Ethane reg
See Menu: <Chromatograph data>

Edit register identification numbers to match the register map of the
Chromatograph.
(List is continued on the next page)
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.23

(Check-list continued )
Data name
(as displayed)
Chromat Propane reg
Chromat Neo Butane reg
Chromat Iso Butane reg
Chromat Neo Pentane reg
Chromat Iso Pentane reg
Chromat C6-Plus reg
Chromat Nitrogen reg
Chromat CO2 reg
Chromat Water reg
Chromat Helium reg
Chromat Oxygen reg
Chromat Argon reg
Chromat CV reg
Chromat SG reg
Chromat gas flag reg
Chromat anal flag reg
Chromat ErrReg1 reg
Chromat ErrReg2 reg
Chromat enable
Set value to 0 if the component is not required or not available from the
Chromatograph.
See Menu: <Chromatograph conf regs>

Edit register identification numbers to what they are on the Chromat.
Default register values are applicable to a Daniels Chromatograph.
Set all these registers to 0 if components are to be retrieved regardless of
status.
Select the Enable option.
Note:
(End of Master 795X instructions)
Slave 795X
Follow these instructions with each 795X Slave:
(Basic Serial Port Information)
2. Select the appropriate menu for the port being used to connect the 795X Slave to same Modbus
network as the Chromatograph and other 795X Slaves.
Data name

Comms port owner
Select the Modbus slave option.
Port Baud rate
Select the agreed transmission rate for all devices on the MODBUS network.
Port Char Format
Select a format that will be understood by the 795X Modbus Master.
Port handshaking
Port RS232 / 485
Select RS485.
P MODB slave add
Set the Modbus address of the Modbus Slave being configured.
Port Modbus mode
Select the Modbus transmission mode that has been agreed for the Modbus
network
P Modbus word
order
P Long reg access
The selection will need to be the same as the 795X Modbus Master.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 on each 795X Slave.
Page 7.24
795x Op. Man/EA

7.8.3.
Worked Example 2 (Arrangement Type Two)

There are two parts to this worked example:
1. Physical Connections (See below)
2. Configuration Tasks
(See page 7.26)
7.8.3.1 Physical Connections

The 795X Master and Chromatograph are networked with one set of RS-232 wiring. Master
795X and Slaves are networked with a separate set of wiring (RS-485).
7950
Master
7950 only:
Connect to cable screen
at a single point.
Port 1
PL3/1
PL3/2
Chromatograph
PL3/3
(Slave Device 1)
PL3/4
7950
Slave Device 2
7950
Slave Device 3
Port 3
PL4/6
PL4/7
PL4/3
7950
Slave Device 4
Port 3
Port 3
Port 3
Rx/Tx+
PL4/6
PL4/6
PL4/6
Rx/Tx-
PL4/7
PL4/7
PL4/7
Signal
Ground
PL4/3
PL4/3
PL4/3
PL4/8
7950 (Klippon) wiring for arrangement two
7951
Master
Port 1
SK1/2
SK1/3
Chromatograph
SK1/5
(Slave Device 1)
7951
Slave Device 2
7951
Slave Device 3
Port 2
SK2/1
SK2/9
SK2/5
7951
Slave Device 4
Port 3
Port 3
Port 3
Rx/Tx+
SK3/1
SK3/1
SK3/1
Rx/Tx-
SK3/9
SK3/9
SK3/9
Signal Ground
SK3/5
SK3/5
SK3/5
7951 (Klippon or D-Type) wiring for arrangement two
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.25

7.8.3.2 Configuration Tasks
What to do here:
Review the objectives and then follow the two
configuration tasks: 795X Master and 795X Slaves.
The Chromatograph is assumed to be already
operational. All communications wiring is assumed to be
completed.
Objectives of tasks:
1. Configure the Master 795X (See below)
Arrangement Two
Master
795X
Port
1, 2 or 3
Port
2* or 3
RS-232
RS-485
* 7950 does not

support the
RS-485
interface
on Port 2

Modbus Master Details
Modbus Slave Details
Chromatograph Functionality
Chromatograph
(Slave Device 1)
Port 2* or 3
795X
(Slave Device 2)
Port 2* or 3
795X
(Slave Device 3)
Port 2* or 3
795X
(Slave Device 4)
2. Configure each 795X Slave (Page 7.29)

Master 795X
Follow these instructions with the 795X Master:
(Basic Serial Port Details)
1. Select the menu: <Configure>/<Other parameters>/ <Communications>/<Ports>
2. Select the appropriate menu for the serial port being used to connect the 795X Master to the
same Modbus network as the Chromatograph.
Data name
Comms port owner
Select the Modbus master option.
Port Baud rate
Select a transmission rate suitable for all devices on the Modbus

network.
Port Char Format
Select a format that will be understood by the Chromatograph and

795X Slaves.
Port handshaking
Select RS 485 for the Modbus network with the 795X Slaves.
Select RS 232 for the Modbus network with the Chromatograph.
Port Modbus mode
Select the Modbus transmission mode for the Modbus network
P Modbus word order
The selection must be suitable for the Modbus Slaves attached to the
network.
P Long reg access
The selection must be suitable for the Modbus Slaves attached to the
network.
Port RS232 / 485 **
Notes:
(a) On-screen data names may vary to those shown here. There is a number included to
identify a port.
(b) ** Port 1 has no corresponding menu data since it only supports the RS-232 interface.
4. Select the appropriate menu for the serial port being used to connect the 795X Master to the
same Modbus network as the 795X Slaves.
5. Repeat step 3 for that second Modbus network.
Page 7.26
795x Op. Man/EA

(Modbus Master Details)
6. Select the menu:
<Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Communications>/<MODBus master>
7. Locate the menu data (page) for Length of timeout.
8. Select the allowable interval for the Modbus Master send a command and then receive a
response without causing a time-out condition.
The Modbus command is re-submitted following a time-out only if the maximum number of
command re-submissions is not exceeded.
9. Locate the menu data (page) for Num of retries. Select the maximum number of times a
Modbus command can be re-submitted before a failure is recorded by an alarm.
(Inform Modbus Master of Modbus Slave Details)

10. Select this Modbus Master sub-menu: <Slave devices>
11. Work through this data check-list for each Slave:
Data name
Slave device func
Select the Chromat option for the Chromatograph (slave device 1 in

arrangement two). For all other 795X Modbus Slave devices, use the
FC Gas option.
Port number
Select the port of the795X Master that is wired to the same Modbus network
as the slave device being configured.
Slv device address
Set the value to the Modbus address of the slave device.
Port handshaking
Device word swap
Select the option that is to compatible with all Modbus slaves in the Modbus
network.
Note: Chromatograph is on a different Modbus network to the 795X Slaves.
Slave device data
The Gas basic data is appropriate if Calorific Value and Specific Gravity
are not of interest. Otherwise, select Gas extended data.
Note: Any selection made only involves the individual slave being
configured.
Check-list Note: (a) On-screen data names may vary to those shown here. There is usually a
number included to identify a serial port.
12. Select this Modbus Master sub-menu: < Slave data table>
(This is a list of the all gas composition related data that a Master 795X could broadcast to all known
795X Slaves. Default values are identification numbers that are specific to a release of 795X software.)
Data name
(as displayed)
Slv Gas Data flag
new gas data flag location on the 795X Slaves. DO NOT SET THIS
VALUE TO ZERO.
Slv Methane reg
Slv Ethane reg

Slv Propane reg
Ensure that values correspond to the location identification numbers of

this data in
the <Raw gas data> menu on all 795X slaves.
Set value to 0 if data is not required to be transmitted or simply not

available.
Slv N-Butane reg
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.27

Data name
(as displayed)
Slv I-Butane reg

Slv N-Pentane reg
Slv I- Pentane reg
Slv Nitrogen reg
Slv CO2 reg
Slv Water reg
Slv Helium reg
Slv Oxygen reg
Slv Hyrdogen reg
Slv Argon reg
Slv C6+ reg
Slv N-Hexane
Slv N-Heptane
Slv N-Octane
Chromat CV reg
Ensure the value matches the location identification number of the

Calorific value data location on the 795X Slaves.
Chromat SG reg
Specific gravity data location on the 795X Slaves.
Note: (a) On-screen data names may vary to those shown here.
(Chromatograph Details)
14. Select the menu: <Configure>/<Chromat>
15. Work through this data check-list :Data name (as displayed)
Chromat poll rate
Select the fixed interval between requests for gas composition data.
Select the code that will determine the weighting for the C6 split.
108 - C6 = 0.47466, C7 = 0.3534, C8 = 0.17194
109 - C6 = 0.5, C7 = 0.50, C8 = 0.00
110 - C6 = 0.5, C7 = 0.25, C8 = 0.25
111 - C6 = 0.57143, C7 = 0.28572, C8 = 0.14285
(The following list refers to all the gas composition related data that a Master 795X could get from a
Chromatograph. Default values are register numbers that are specific to a Daniels Chromatograph.)
Chromat Methane reg
See Menu: <Chromatograph data>
Chromat Ethane reg
Edit register identification numbers to match the Chromatograph register
map.
Chromat Propane reg
Chromat C6-Plus type
Chromat Neo Butane reg

Chromat Iso Butane reg
Chromat Neo Pentane reg
Chromat Iso Pentane reg
Chromat C6-Plus reg
Chromat Nitrogen reg
Chromat CO2 reg
Chromat Water reg
Chromat Helium reg
Chromat Oxygen reg
Chromat Argon reg
Chromat CV reg
Chromat SG reg
Page 7.28
Set value to 0 if the component is not required or not available from the
Chromatograph.
795x Op. Man/EA
Chromat gas flag reg

Chromat anal flag reg
Chromat ErrReg1 reg
Chromat ErrReg2 reg
Chromat enable
See Menu: <Chromatograph conf regs>

Edit register identification numbers to what they are on the Chromat.
Default register values are applicable to a Daniels Chromatograph.
Set all these registers to 0 if components are to be retrieved regardless of
status.
Start polling with the Enable option
Note:
(End of Master 795X instructions)
Slave 795X
Follow these instructions with each 795X Slave :(Basic Serial Port Information)
2. Select the appropriate menu for the port being used on the 795X Slave.
3. Work through this data check-list:Data name
Comms port owner
Select the Modbus slave option.
Port Baud rate
Select the agreed transmission rate for all devices on the Modbus network.
Port Char Format
Select a format that will be understood by the 795X Modbus Master.
Port handshaking
Port RS232 / 485
Select RS485.
Port Modbus mode
Select the Modbus transmission mode that has been agreed for the Modbus
network
P MODB slave add
Set the Modbus address of this Modbus slave.
P Modbus word order
P Long reg access
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 on each 795X Slave.
795x Op. Man/EA
Page 7.29
7.8.4.
Checking on results
Chromatograph data to monitor is located within the menu: <Health Check>/<Chromat>
Chromat status
Chromat poll count
Normalised data is located within the menu: <Health Check>/<Normalise gas data>
Norm Methane
Norm Ethane
Norm Propane
Norm N-Butane
Norm I-Butane
Page 7.30
Norm N-Pentane
Norm I-Pentane
Norm N-Hexane *
Norm N-Heptane *
Norm N-Octane *
Norm N-Nonane
Norm N-Decane
Norm C6+ *
Norm Nitrogen
Norm CO2
Norm water
Norm Helium
Norm Oxygen
Norm CO
Norm Hydrogen
Norm Argon
Norm H2S
Chromat energy
795x Op. Man/EA
PEER-TO-PEER
COMMUNICATIONS
(CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM A)
Solartron
a division of Solartron Group Ltd.
Victoria Road, Farnborough,
Hampshire, GU14 7PW. UK.
Addendum Issue: AA, February 2000
2000, Solartron
Chapter 7(a) Peer-To-Peer Communications
Page 7a.2
Software Version 15x0, Issue 4.40 (or higher)
Issue: AA
ABOUT THIS ADDENDUM

7a.1
What is the purpose if this addendum?

This addendum has been written to provide a guide to the software support for peer-to-peer MODBUS
network communications.
To use this guide effectively, it is essential to be familiar with the 795x keypad functions, moving around the
menu system and editing. (Chapter 5 can help with this)
The data necessary for configuring a measurement/feature can be found in separate parts of the menu
structure. A notation has been used as a short method of explaining how to move from the present menu to
another menu.
As an example, the notation of <Configure>/<Flow rate> translates into these steps:
Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key
Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW (V) key to scroll through pages until the word Configure is seen.
Step 3: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word Configure.
Step 4: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word Flow rate is seen.
Step 5: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word Flow rate.
Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the BACKARROW key is a much more common method of returning to a menu level.
Note: The menu structure will vary in other software versions and releases.
Issue: AA
Page 7a.3
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATIONS
7A.2
INTRODUCTION
FEATURE: 795X COMMUNICATION OF PARAMETERS USING PEER-TO-PEER LISTS

What to do:
An overview is in Section 7a.2.1.. Page 7a.4

A list of configuration instructions is in Section 7a.2.2.... Page 7a.6
7A.2.1 WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THIS FEATURE?

This feature is typically used when a Header Flow Computer must send various measurements (e.g.
pressure, temperature, etc.) over a MODBUS protocol network to one or more Stream Flow Computers.
The 795x Flow Computer network can be a mixture of members from the 795x series.
USE OF THE MODBUS PROTOCOL
In MODBUS protocol terms, a Header Flow Computer is usually given the role of a MODBUS Master device.
It has the responsibility for the peer-to-peer transmission of measurement values during every machine cycle.
The Stream Flow Computers are all MODBUS Slave devices and they are the recipients of peer-to-peer
transmissions.
When an RS-232 point-to-point network is the vehicle for this feature
A 795x Master device continuously broadcasts values of peer-to-peer nominated parameters directly to
the database of a single 795x Slave device. The two MODBUS devices can be wired together via any
serial port supporting RS-232 standard. A peer-to-peer topology is shown in Figure 2on page 7a.4.
When an RS-485 multiple-drop network is the vehicle for this feature
A 795x Master device continuously broadcasts values of peer-to-peer nominated parameters to a
maximum of sixteen 795x MODBUS slaves. The 795x MODBUS devices can be wired together via any
serial port supporting the RS-485 standard. A peer-to-peer topology is shown in Figure 3on page 7a.4
At present, peer-to-peer communications will operate through one serial port. Configuring another serial
port of the Header 795x to function as a Master device and connecting it to a duplicate MODBUS network
will cause unpredictable results.
THE PEER-TO-PEER LISTS
1
On the 795x Master there are two peer-to-peer lists for compiling a collection of up to 40 measurement
parameters (795x database locations) in total. The list is simply a look-up reference for the Master, when
2
preparing transmissions, and is programmed with database location IDs.
Figure 7a.2.1 shows how an individual peer-to-peer list comprises of entries (menu data pages) for
nominating from 1 up to 20 parameters. Each list entry requires a programmed source a database
location ID on the 795x Master device - and a programmed destination a database location ID on the
795x Slave devices.
Figure 7a.2.1 : Peer-To-Peer List Anatomy
PEER-TO-PEER LIST
(with practice values)
Source
"Indicated
Volume Rate"
"Actual Cycle
Time"
Destination
(Location IDs)
661 01
256
(Off)
02
(Off)
20
03
(Location IDs)
661 01
662
(Off)
02
(Off)
20
03
"Indicated
Volume Rate"
"Gross
Volume Rate"
These lists are wholly independent of the High Speed Lists that are set-up on one (or more) 795x MODBUS slaves for access by
non-795x MODBUS Master devices.
To find out the database location ID for any parameter, navigate the menu system to the applicable menu data page and then
press the a soft-key once. The 4-digit database location ID is then displayed on the fourth line of the LCD display.
Page 7a.4
Issue: AA
INTRODUCTION
Each 795x Slave device is allocated one of the two lists. This is a user-selection and is made when defining
slaves whilst setting up the 795x Master device.
Once lists are programmed, peer-to-peer operations are commenced on the 795x Master by a selecting an
Enable option (soft-command) through a menu data page. For each correctly listed parameter, a value is then
read from the database, incorporated into a MODBUS write command message and transmitted from the 795x
Master device to the database on designated 795x Slave devices.
All peer-to-peer lists, in use, are processed in full during a single machine cycle. This is repeated once every cycle
until peer-to-peer operations are stopped by a disable soft-command.
In a network of two 795x Flow Computers a Master device and a Slave device, the Master is able to detect all
failures to communicate with the slave and it raises a system alarm. With one slave, every MODBUS (write)
command message is explicitly addressed and that solicits a response from that slave. The absence of a response
3
after a period (of retries) is how the Master detects a failure .
In a network of multiple slaves, MODBUS write command messages use an all-slave broadcast address, which
does not solicit any response and, therefore, the Master does not detect a communication failure. In this case, the
system alarm is not raised.
When the system alarm can not be cleared without it re-appearing during the next machine cycle, there are
continuous communication failures. It is advisable to temporarily halt peer-to-peer operations, clear all related
alarms and investigate (and correct) the difficulty before resuming.
Figure 2: Peer-To-Peer - Basic RS232 Arrangement

MODBUS
Commands
795x MODBUS
Master Device
Logical
Link
LIST ONE
DATABASE
P1
RS-232
LINK
P2
DATABASE
795x MODBUS
Slave Device 1
LIST TWO
Figure 3: Peer-To-Peer - Basic RS485 Arrangement
795x MODBUS
Master Device
P3
DATABASE
795x MODBUS
Slave Device 1
P2
DATABASE
795x MODBUS
Slave Device 2
P3
DATABASE
795x MODBUS
Slave Device 3
LIST ONE
DATABASE
P2
RS-485
LINK
LIST TWO
MODBUS
Commands
Logical
Link
This type of failure is normally the symptom of a faulty/unsuitable cable, incorrect set-up of communication parameters or the
absence of a physical connection to a MODBUS network.
Issue: AA
Page 7a.5
INSTRUCTIONS
7a.2.2 Configuring and activation instructions

Follow these instructions to configure and activate peer-to-peer communications
1. Ensure that 795x Flow Computers are already interconnected to form a MODBUS network
4
Guidance on the necessary RS-232 or RS-485 wiring connections is in Chapter 7. Several peer-to-peer
arrangements are shown on page 7a.5.
2. Program a 795x Flow Computer to be the MODBUS master device

(2a) Navigate to this menu: <Configure>/<Other Parameters>/<Communications>/<Ports>
(2b) Select the menu for the serial port that is connected to the MODBUS network
(2c) Program the basic communications parameters for that serial port, as shown in Menu Data List 1. Some
localised menu searching is required.
CONNECTING MORE THAN ONE SERIAL PORT TO THE A PEER-TO-PEER

MODBUS NETWORK WILL CAUSE UNPREDICTABLE RESULTS
Menu Data List 1: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters

Menu Data *
Comms port owner

Port Baud rate
Port char format
Port handshaking
Port RS232 / 485
P Modbus word order ***
Port Modbus mode
P MODB slave addr ***
P Modbus features
P long reg access ***
P MODB precision ***
Select the option with Modbus master as the description

Select a rate that is agreed for the 795x Master device and all the slaves devices
Select a character transmission format (as agreed for the MODBUS network)
Select either None or XonXoff unless the cable (wiring) supports CTS/RTS
Select the signalling standard for the MODBUS network **
Not applicable to the 795x Master device
Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices.
Not applicable to a 795x Master device. The existing setting does not affect it.
Not applicable to a 795x Master device. The existing setting does not affect it.
Choose either single register or multiple register formatted MODBUS commands
Choose a precision option that is agreed for the Master and all the slaves devices
* On-screen version of a menu data page descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port
** A 795x may perform warm restarts if it is configured to use RS-232 when connected to an RS-485 network
*** Abbreviations: P = Port, reg = register, addr = address, char = character, MODB = MODBUS
(2d) Navigate to this menu:

<Configure>/<Other Parameters>/<Communications>/<Modbus master>/<Peer to peer>
(2e) Program the peer-to-peer lists
Menus:
Peer List One: <Configure>/<Modbus master>/<Peer to Peer>/<Peer list 1>
Peer List Two: <Configure>/<Modbus master>/<Peer to Peer>/<Peer list 2>
When programming a list, it is very important to use the first available (unused) entry and to not leave
gaps. This will avoid inadvertently shortening the list.
Programming a valid location number for a source will immediately result in the number changing to the
parameter descriptor. The destination does not do this because the edited location number stays
displayed as the edited number. Editing a location number for a parameter that does not exist is
responded with a *** ERROR *** message appearing briefly and the original setting is then restored.
By default, destinations (location IDs) are automatically synchronised with the corresponding sources.
This is ideal for when Flow Computers are running the same software release. However, the source and
destination (IDs) do not have to be the same. For each list, there is a peer-to-peer configuration
4
To avoid the risk of warm restarts, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard RS-232 or RS-485 for 795x serial ports
before establishing the physical connections.
Page 7a.6
Issue: AA
INSTRUCTIONS
parameter, <Peer L dest/src>, to stop the synchronising action and enable IDs to be different.
This feature allows 795x slave devices to run releases other software versions and still get updates from
the Master device. Re-enabling the synchronising will immediately trigger the overwriting of all destination
IDs with the source IDs, losing the destination IDs forever.
Values go directly into the 795x database of a slave unless serial communications is prohibited. Security
parameters for serial communications are found within <Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Security>.
(2f) Inform the 795x Master about all 795x slave devices on the network
(Note: Start by programming details of your first slave using parameters within the Device 1 menu)
Menu Data *
Slave device func **
Slv device port no **
Slv device address **
Device word swap
Device precision
Device peer list

Select the option with Peer as the description.
Select the serial port that is connected to same the network as the slave
Use 0 if there are multiple slaves. Otherwise, use the address of the slave
Not applicable to the 795x but may be needed by protocol listening devices
Use a precision option that is the same as the 795x MODBUS Master
Select the option that corresponds to one of the two peer-to-peer lists
* On-screen version of menu data descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port
** Abbreviations: Slv = Slave, func = Function, no = number
3.
Program each remaining 795x to be a MODBUS slave device

(3b) Select a menu that corresponds to the serial port that is connected to the RS-485 network
(3c) Set-up basic communications parameters
Menu Data *
Comms port owner

Select the option with Modbus slave as the description
Port Baud rate
Select a rate that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices
Port char format ***
Select a rate that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices
Port handshaking
Select the same option as used for the 795x Master device
Port RS232 / 485
Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices
Port Modbus mode
Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices
Edit a value that does not conflict with other MODBUS network devices
P Modbus features ***
Not applicable to peer-to-peer operations
* On-screen version of menu data descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port
4. Start peer-to-peer communications at the 795x Master device

(4a) Navigate to: <Configure>/<Other Parameters>/<Communications>/<Modbus master>
(4b) Locate the menu data page with Peer enable on-screen
(4c) Select the Enable soft-command (option)
Once enabled, it is advisable to stop (deactivate) peer-to-peer communications prior to adjusting the
communications set-up. Once changes have been made, re-enable the peer-to-peer function with step 4.
Issue: AA
Page 7a.7
Page 7a.8
Issue: AA
HIGH-SPEED LIST
COMMUNICATIONS
(CHAPTER 7 ADDENDUM B)
Solartron
a division of Solartron Group Ltd.
Victoria Road, Farnborough,
Hampshire, GU14 7PW. UK.
Addendum Issue: AA, February 2000
2000, Solartron
Chapter 7(b) HSL Communications
Page 7b.2
Issue: AA
ABOUT THIS ADDENDUM

7b.1
What is the purpose if this addendum?

This addendum has been written to provide a guide to the software support for HSL - High Speed List
communications over a MODBUS protocol network.
To use this guide effectively, it is essential to be familiar with the 795x keypad functions, moving around the
menu system and editing. (Chapter 5 can help with this)
The data necessary for configuring a measurement/feature can be found in separate parts of the menu
structure. A notation has been used as a short method of explaining how to move from the present menu to
another menu.
Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key
Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW (V) key to scroll through pages until the word Configure is seen.
Step 3: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word Configure.
Step 4: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word Flow rate is seen.
Step 5: Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word Flow rate.
Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the BACKARROW key is a much more common method of returning to a menu level.
Issue: AA
Page 7b.3
Page 7b.4
Issue: AA
INTRODUCTION
7B.2
HIGH-SPEED LIST COMMUNICATIONS
FEATURE: COMMUNICATION OF PARAMETER DATA USING HIGH-SPEED LISTS

What to do here:
An overview is in Section 7b.2.1....Page 7b.3

A list of configuration instructions is in Section 7b.2.2..... Page 7b.11
A guided example in Section 7b.2.3.....Page 7b.14
Wonderware compatibility notes are in Section 7b.3...Page 7b.20
7b.2.1 WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF THIS FEATURE?

1
This feature is typically used when a MODBUS Master device must get parameter data from a 795x series
Flow Computer, where both are attached to the same MODBUS protocol network.
High-speed list communications facilitate the quick collection and transmission of data from up to 300 usernominated parameters. This is achieved by using just a small quantity of MODBUS protocol messages. It
would otherwise require an exchange of hundreds of messages.
The 795x Flow Computer also helps by collecting all the data of nominated (listed) parameters from its
database and keeping it local. This activity is completed during every machine cycle. Keeping parameter
data locally allows faster data access, allowing the 795x to service requests from a Master device as quickly
as possible. Hence, the term of high-speed lists.
There are two aspects to high-speed list communications:
the MODBUS protocol (network arrangements, communication parameters and message exchanges)
a list of parameters (i.e. 795x database locations) and
Read about each aspect in the sections that follow this overview and then look at the setting-up instructions
and the guided example.
USE OF THE MODBUS PROTOCOL
In MODBUS protocol terms, the MODBUS Master device is likely to be a supervisory system, such as
Solartrons MCS (Modular Computer System). The Master device is responsible for acquiring parameter
data through an exchange of MODBUS protocol messages with one ore more a MODBUS networked
slave devices. The 795x Flow Computer is the MODBUS slave device, supporting RS-485 and RS-232
signalling standards.
When an RS-232 point-to-point network is the vehicle for this feature
A Master device can request parameter data from one 795x slave device. The two MODBUS devices
can be wired together via any serial port supporting RS-232 Standard. (See Figure 1 on page 7b.5)
When an RS-485 multiple-drop network is the vehicle for this feature
A Master device can request parameter data from one or more 795x slaves. The 795x MODBUS slave
devices can be wired together via any serial port supporting the RS-485 Standard.
(See Figure 2 on page 7b.6)
Figure 1: High Speed List Overview (RS-232 Example)
Read/Write
Database
Operations
795x MODBUS
Slave Device
High Speed List One
MODBUS
Master Device
(Virtual Slave 2)
DATABASE
MODBUS
Messages
P1
RS-232
LINK
P2
APPLICATION
High Speed List Two

(Virtual Slave 3)
Direction of flow
(HSL Data)
This MODBUS Master device cannot be a 795x series Flow Computer. Direct communication of a parameter value between
795x Flow Computers can be performed using the Peer-To-Peer Lists feature.
Issue: AA
Page 7b.5
INTRODUCTION
Figure 2: High Speed List Overview (RS-485 Example)

MODBUS Master Device
Read/Write
Operations
MODBUS
Messages
APPLICATION
Direction of flow
(HSL Data)
Serial
Port
High Speed List 1
High Speed List 1
(Virtual Slave '2')
795x MODBUS
Slave Device
(Virtual Slave '2')
DATABASE
P2
RS-485
Link
795x MODBUS
Slave Device
DATABASE
P3
High Speed List 2
High Speed List 2
(Virtual Slave '3')
(Virtual Slave '3')
Figure 3: High Speed List Activity Within 795x Slave Devices
HIGH SPEED LIST ONE

795x MODBUS
Slave Device
LIST ONE
1
Loc ID: 0661
2
Loc ID: 0662
3
Loc ID: 0000
50
Loc ID: 0000
V
S
V
S
V
S
V
S
450.015
Live
448.011
Live
Copying Activity
Every Cycle
DATABASE
LIST TWO
Loc ID: 0661
Loc ID: 0662
Loc ID: 0663
V
S
V
S
V
S
450.015
Live
448.011
Live
795X DATABASE
Figure 4: Parameter List Block Organisation
HIGH-SPEED LIST ONE

Indicated
Volume
flow rate
Gross
Volume
flow rate
BLOCK A
(Location IDs)
BLOCK B
(Location IDs)
BLOCK C
(Location IDs)
661
662
(Off)
0718
0595
1548
01
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
01
(Off)
50
(Off)
50
(Off)
01
02
03
50
02
03
(Off) = Unused Entry
Page 7b.6
HIGH SPEED LIST TWO
02
03
Prime
Dynamic
Viscosity
Prime
Kinematic
Viscosity
BLOCK D
(Location IDs)
BLOCK E
(Location IDs)
BLOCK F
(Location IDs)
2048
2111
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
01
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
01
(Off)
50
(Off)
50
(Off)
01
02
03
50
02
03
02
03
Issue: AA
INTRODUCTION
THE HIGH-SPEED PARAMETER LIST

2
On 795x slaves there are two individual lists for nominating the parameters labelled as High-speed List 1
and High Speed List 2 within the communications area of the menu system.
Each list has the capacity for nominating up to 150 parameters, organised into three blocks of 50 parameters.
Figure 4 on page7b.6 illustrates the three block structure for both lists. The figure shows that blocks are set-up
on an individual basis. Parameters are nominated using their own unique database location identification (ID)
number. Each entry in a block has a dedicated menu data page for editing in a location ID.
The parameter list is primarily for the 795x slave device to extract data of specific parameters from its database
during every machine cycle. All extracted data is stored locally for faster and more efficient data access. It is
then accessible only to a Master device by means of MODBUS read command messages. Figure 3 on page
7b.6 illustrates the process.
MODBUS read command messages must be addressed to either virtual slave 2 or virtual slave 3 through any
MODBUS slave configured port. Virtual slave addressing is explained in Chapter 7.
MODBUS Address
Information Available
Virtual Slave 2
High-speed List One
Virtual Slave 3
High-speed List Two
The register map at each virtual slave is initially in a pre-set format but it can be individually re-organised to suit
applications on the Master device. There are several basic styles available for selection. Follow the links in
Table 1 to get a graphical overview of default register maps for each basic style. You will also get to see how the
blocks of a parameter list are linked to a register map.
Table 1: Links to graphical overviews of high-speed lists and register maps

Styles
Graphical Representation
Old Style (Legacy) *
See Figure 5 on page 7b.8
Grouped
Ungrouped
* As found in 795x software released before the year 2000
These lists are wholly independent of the peer-to-peer lists that are set-up on a 795x MODBUS Master device.
Issue: AA
Page 7b.7
INTRODUCTION
Figure 5: Default Register Mappings for "Old Style" High-speed Lists 1 and 2
HSL-1 Grouped
Start Register = 0
2051 - 10000
are unused
BLOCK A
PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK B
PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK C
PARAMETER LIST
01
02
01
02
01
02
50
50
50
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS

(VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS

(VIRTUAL SLAVE 2 REGISTER M AP)
BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS

Values
10001
Location IDs
20001
Types and Sizes
30001
Status
40001
Full Attributes
50
00
- 10 d
51 nuse
u
are
10050
Values
20050
11050
Types and Sizes
31001
30050
1050
Location IDs
21001
Status
41001
21050
31050
Full Attributes
40050
Block A
HIGH-SPEED
LISTS
Block B
0
2001
200 d
1e
105 unus
12001
are
22001
32001
42001
41050
HSL-1 BLOCK B
HSL-1 BLOCK A
VIRTUAL SLAVE 2
1001
11001
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
2050
12050
22050
32050
42050
HSL-1 BLOCK C
Block C
HIGH-SPEED LIST 1
HSL-1 BLOCKS
HSL ONE
HSL TWO
VIRTUAL SLAVE 3
HSL-2 BLOCKS
Block D
2051 - 10000
are unused
BLOCK 'D' SECTIONS

1
10001
20001
30001
40001
Page 7b.8
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
Block F
HIGH-SPEED LIST 2
HSL-2 BLOCK F
HSL-2 BLOCK E
HSL-2 BLOCK D
HSL-2 Grouped
Start Register = 0
Block E
50
0
100
51 - nused
u
are
10050
20050
30050
40050
BLOCK 'E' S ECTIONS

1001
11001
21001
31001
41001
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
BLOCK 'F' SECTIONS

2001
00
- 20 d
051 use
1050 1 re un
12001
a
11050
21050
31050
41050
22001
32001
42001
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
BLOCK D
PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK E
PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK F
PARAMETER LIST
01
02
01
02
01
02
50
50
50
2050
12050
22050
32050
42050
Issue: AA
INTRODUCTION
Figure 6: Default Register Mappings for "Grouped" High-speed Lists 1 and 2
HSL-1 Grouped
Start Register = 0
BLOCK A
PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK B
PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK C
PARAMETER LIST
01
02
01
02
01
02
50
50
50
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS

0
Values
150
300
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
450
Status
600
Full Attributes
BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS

50
49
199
349
499
350
99
Location IDs
249
Types and Sizes
500
399
Status
650
549
Full Attributes
649
250
400
550
700
699
HSL-1 BLOCK B
HSL-1 BLOCK A
VIRTUAL SLAVE 2
100
Values
200
BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS (VIRTUAL

SLAVE 2 REGISTER MAP)
HIGH-SPEED
LISTS
Block A
Block B
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
149
299
449
599
749
HSL-1 BLOCK C
Block C
HIGH-SPEED LIST 1
HSL-1 BLOCKS
HSL ONE
HSL TWO
VIRTUAL SLAVE 3
HSL-2 BLOCKS
Block D
HSL-2 Grouped
Start Register = 0
Block F
HIGH-SPEED LIST 2
HSL-2 BLOCK D
HSL-2 BLOCK E
HSL-2 BLOCK F
BLOCK 'D' SECTIONS

BLOCK 'E' S ECTIONS

BLOCK 'F' SECTIONS

0
150
300
450
600
Issue: AA
Block E
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
50
49
199
349
499
649
200
350
500
650
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
100
99
249
399
549
699
250
400
550
700
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
BLOCK D
PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK E
PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK F
PARAMETER LIST
01
02
01
02
01
02
50
50
50
149
299
449
599
749
Page 7b.9
INTRODUCTION
Figure 7: Default Register Mappings for "Ungrouped" High-speed Lists 1 and 2
HSL-1 Grouped
Start Register = 0
BLOCK A
PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK B
PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK C
PARAMETER LIST
01
02
01
02
01
02
50
50
50
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS

BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS

BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS

Values
50
100
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
150
Status
200
Full Attributes
250
49
99
149
199
300
350
299
Location IDs
349
Types and Sizes
400
399
Status
450
449
Full Attributes
249
550
600
650
700
499
HSL-1 BLOCK B
HSL-1 BLOCK A
VIRTUAL SLAVE 2
500
Values
HIGH-SPEED
LISTS
Block A
Block B
Values
549
Location IDs
599
Types and Sizes

Status
649
699
Full Attributes
749
HSL-1 BLOCK C
Block C
HIGH-SPEED LIST 1
HSL-1 BLOCKS
HSL ONE
HSL TWO
VIRTUAL SLAVE 3
HSL-2 BLOCKS
Block D
HSL-2 Grouped
Start Register = 0
Block F
HIGH-SPEED LIST 2
HSL-2 BLOCK D
HSL-2 BLOCK E
HSL-2 BLOCK F
BLOCK 'D' SECTIONS

BLOCK 'E' SECTIONS

BLOCK 'F' SECTIONS

0
50
100
150
200
Page 7b.10
Block E
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
250
49
99
149
199
249
300
350
400
450
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
500
299
349
399
449
499
550
600
650
700
Values
549
Location IDs
599
Types and Sizes
649
Status
699
Full Attributes
749
BLOCK D
PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK E
PARAMETER LIST
BLOCK F
PARAMETER LIST
01
02
01
02
01
02
50
50
50
Issue: AA
INSTRUCTIONS
7b.2.2 Configuring and Activation Instructions

Follow these instructions to configure and activate high-speed list communications:
1. Ensure that 795x Flow Computers are already interconnected to form a MODBUS network
3
Guidance on the necessary RS-232 or RS-485 wiring connections is in Chapter 7.
2. Program a 795x Flow Computer to be the MODBUS slave device

(2b) Select the menu that is appropriate for the serial port that is connected to the MODBUS network
(2c) Program the basic communications parameters for that serial port, as shown in Menu Data List 1. Some
localised menu searching is required.
Menu Data List 1: Basic Serial Port Communication Parameters
Menu Data *
Comms port owner

Port Baud rate
Port char format
Port handshaking
Port RS232 / 485
Port Modbus mode
P Modbus features
Select the option with Modbus slave as the description

Select a rate that is agreed for the Master device and all the 795x slaves devices
Select a character transmission format (as agreed for the MODBUS network)
Select either None or XonXoff unless the cable (wiring) supports CTS/RTS
Select an option that is compatible with the Master device
Select the option that is compatible with the other MODBUS network devices.
Program the base address of this slave
Select an option that includes L1/List1 for HSL-1 and L2/List2 for HSL-2
Choose to accept either the single or multiple register MODBUS command format
Select a precision option that is compatible with the Master device
* On-screen version of a menu data page descriptor includes a digit to identify the directly associated serial port
3. Program High Speed List 1 (if applicable)

(3a) Navigate to this menu: <Configure>/<Other Parameters>/<Communications>/<Modbus slave>
(3b) Select the menu that is appropriate for HSL-1
(3c) Program the configuration parameters for HSL-1, as guided in Menu Data List 2
Menu Data List 2: HSL-1 Configuration Parameters (Part One)
Menu Data
(as displayed)
List 1 word order
This selection overrides the serial port setting
List 1 block layout
Select default register map organisation: Old Style, Grouped or Ungrouped *
L1 grouped start reg
Program the number of the first register space for the complete register map **
* See pages 7b.8, 7b.9 and 7b.10 for a graphical view of the default register map for each selectable style
(3d) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in Block A (if applicable)
Note: This step does not apply when the Old Style (legacy) register map layout is chosen in step 3c
Table 2 lists descriptors for identifying the menu data pages associated with viewing and editing the
existing register map in Block A. Alongside the descriptors are default settings for every selectable block
layout style.
3
To avoid the risk of warm restarts, it is advisable to pre-set the signalling standard RS-232 or RS-485 for 795x serial ports
before establishing the physical connections.
Issue: AA
Page 7b.11
INSTRUCTIONS
Editing of the start registers is only required when the default settings form a register map that is
unsuitable for the application on the Master device.
Table 2: Configuration Parameters for Section Start Registers of HSL-1 Block A
Menu Data
(as displayed)
Default Start Registers

(Old Style mapping)

(Grouped mapping)

(Ungrouped mapping)
L1A vals start reg

L1A locs start reg
1
10001
0
150
0
50
L1A types start reg

L1A status start reg
20001
30001
300
450
100
150
L1A attrs start reg
40001
600
200
Note: Also see Table 3 and Table 4 for the default settings of the other HSL-1 blocks
(3e) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in Block B (if applicable)
Note: This step does not apply when Old Style (legacy) register map has been chosen in step 3c
present register map of Block B. Alongside the descriptors are the default settings for every selectable
block layout style.
Table 3: Configuration Parameters for Section Start Registers of HSL-1 Block B
Menu Data *
(as displayed)

(Old Style map)

(Grouped map)

(Ungrouped map)
L1B vals start reg

L1B locs start reg
L1B types start reg
L1B status start reg
1001
11001
21001
31001
50
200
350
500
250
300
350
400
L1B attrs start reg
41001
650
450
Note: Also see Table 2 and Table 4 for the default settings of the other HSL-1 blocks
(3f) View/Edit the number of the first register for each register map section in Block C (if applicable)
Note: This step does not apply when Old Style (legacy) register map has been chosen in step 3c
present register map of Block C. Alongside the descriptors are the default settings for every selectable
block layout style.
Table 4: Configuration Parameters for Section Start Registers of HSL-1 Block C
Menu Data *
(as displayed)

(Old Style map)

(Grouped map)

(Ungrouped map)
L1C vals start reg

L1C locs start reg
L1C types start reg
2001
12001
22001
100
250
400
500
550
600
L1C status start reg

L1C attrs start reg
32001
42001
550
700
650
700
Note: Also see Table 2 and Table 3 for the default settings of other HSL-1 Blocks
Page 7b.12
Issue: AA
INSTRUCTIONS
(3g) Program the high-speed list with the location ID of each parameter to be made available to the Master
Menu Data List 3 lists the descriptors of the menu data pages for programming the Block A partition with
location IDs of up to 50 parameters. The menu data pages are easily located within the 795x menu
system under the <Block A> sub-menu.
Menu Data List 3 : BLOCK A Parameter Entries 150
Menu Data (as displayed)
Purpose
DBM list 1A ptr 1 *
BLOCK A PARAMETER LIST ENTRY 1
DBM list 1A ptr 2 *
DBM list1A ptr 50 *
* Abbreviation: ptr = pointer (a programming term)
The menu data pages for programming entries in Block B and Block C are easily located within the
menu system under the <Block B> and <Block C> sub-menus.
It is good practice to start with Block A before progressing to Block B. Likewise, start with Block B
before progressing to Block C. It is not necessary to fully utilise a block before using another.
When programming in location identification numbers (IDs), it is very important to use the first available
(unused) entry and to not leave gaps. This will avoid inadvertently shortening the list. (See Figure 8)
Figure 8: Correct and Incorrect Programmed Parameter Lists
HIGH SPEED LIST '1'
HIGH SPEED LIST '1'
(Programmed Correctly)
"Indicated
Volume Rate"
"Gross
Volume Rate"
(Programmed Incorrectly)
BLOCK A
(Location IDs)
BLOCK B
(Location IDs)
BLOCK C
(Location IDs)
661
662
(Off)
01
03
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
01
03
0718
0595
1548
(Off)
50
(Off)
50
(Off)
50
01
02
02
02
03
"Indicated
Volume Rate"
"Gross
Volume Rate"
BLOCK A
(Location IDs)
BLOCK B
(Location IDs)
BLOCK C
(Location IDs)
661
(Off)
662
01
03
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
01
03
0718
(Off)
0595
(Off)
50
(Off)
50
(Off)
50
01
02
02
02
03
Programming in a valid location number will immediately result in the number changing to the parameter
descriptor. Editing a location number for a parameter that does not exist is responded with a
** ERROR ** message appearing briefly and the original setting is then restored.
4. Program High Speed List 2 (if it is to be used )

Repeat steps 3a to 3g but this time it is for configuring HSL-2.
Issue: AA
Page 7b.13
GUIDED EXAMPLE
7b.2.3 Guided Example: Accessing a HSL over a MODBUS network

This section is a practical guide to collecting parameter data from a 795x MODBUS Slave through the high-speed list
feature. For this guided example, High-speed List 1 (HSL-1) has been used.
What to do here:
1. Review the 795x slave configuration

Menu Data List 4 and Menu Data List 5, both on page 7b.15, show configuration details for this guided
example. These checklists should be used in conjunction with the Instructions section on page 7b.11.
MODBUS feature settings for the serial port have been chosen especially to obtain the MODBUS message
sequences that are shown later. For a full list of configuration parameters for serial communications, please
refer to the Instructions section on page 7b.11.
For the purpose of this guided example, instructions assume that the Master device is already set-up.
2. Review the MODBUS message sequences

MODBUS message sequences aim to show the best approach to accessing high-speed list parameter data
through a MODBUS register map at a virtual slave address. For this guided example, the Old Style default
register map has been used.
Every example features an objective, an action and a result
Objective(s)
For an example, the objective could be to read a value from two listed parameters.
Action(s)
Actions consist of one or more read and write MODBUS protocol commands. They are represented in
this documentation as tabulated hexadecimal values in sequence for transmission by the Master device.
Expected replies from the 795x MODBUS slave device are also shown as tabulated values.
Table 5 is a list of all the abbreviations of meanings that can appear with a sequence. Use them to
distinguish the important elements of the message.
Result
This is a brief analysis of the MODBUS slave response to an action. There may be a reference to
additional information.
3. Experiment
Try out the examples and then adapt them to suit your requirements
Table 5 : Abbreviations for Interpreting Elements of Transmit and Receive Sequences

Abbreviation
Meaning
Slv.
Virtual slave address. It is 0x03 for this guided example.
Err.
Fn.
Reg. Cnt
Reg. ID
MOBUS register number
DC
Page 7b.14
The Data
Chk sum
Issue: AA
GUIDED EXAMPLE
Menu Data List 4: HSL-1 Set-up for Guided Example

Value/Option
Comment
List 1 word order

List 1 block layout
L1 grouped start reg
DBM list 1A ptr 1
DBM list 1A ptr 2
DBM list 1A ptr 3
DBM list 1B ptr 1
DBM list 1B ptr 2
DBM list 1B ptr 3
DBM list 1B ptr 4
DBM list 1B ptr 5
DBM list 1C ptr 1
Modbus default
Old-style
0
0661
0662
0000
0773
0772
0779
0778
0000
0000
The register map for this example is shown in Figure 9.

ID is for Indicated Volume flow rate
ID is for Corrected Volume flow rate
ID is for Off - terminates the parameter list for Block A
ID is for integer part of the Indicate Volume flow total
ID is for fractional part of the Indicate Volume total
ID is for integer part of the Corrected Volume flow total
ID is for fractional part of the Corrected Volume flow total
ID is for Off - terminates the parameter list for Block B
ID is for Off - terminates the parameter list for Block C
Notes:
1. Metering totals are stored in the database in two parts. There is one database location for the integer part and
one database location for the fractional part. They are usually not displayed within the menu system. When
communicating totals over MODBUS, transmit both the integer and fractional values. All totals displayed within
the menu system are also database locations. However, they are not suitable for transmission.
2. Abbreviations: L1 = High-speed List 1, reg = register, DBM = Database Manager, ptr = pointer
3.
Location identification numbers (IDs) and descriptors may differ to those listed here if you are using a later
software release
Menu Data List 5: Serial Port Set-up for Guided Example

Menu Data *
Value/Option
Comms port owner

P Modbus word order
Port Modbus mode
P MODB slave addr
P Modbus features
P long reg access
P MODB precision
Modbus slave
Modbus default
RTU
1
Alarm+List1+List2
Single register
Single
Comments
This is the base slave address

Enables virtual slaves 1, 2 and 3
Request 1 register per parameter
Require 32-bit floating-point values
* Location descriptors may differ to those listed here if you are using a later software release
Figure 9: Register Map for Guided Example 1

HIGH-SPEED
LISTS
HIGH-SPEED LIST
HSL BLOCKS
HSL ONE
Block A
HSL TWO
Block C
HSL-1 BLOCK A
HSL 1 BLOCK B
HSL 1 BLOCK C
BLOCK 'A' SECTIONS

BLOCK 'B' SECTIONS

(REGISTER MAP)
BLOCK 'C' SECTIONS

(REGISTER M AP)
1
10001
20001
30001
40001
Issue: AA
Block B
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
50
10050
20050
30050
40050
1001
00
d
- 10
51 nuse
u
11001
are
21001
31001
41001
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
00 2001
- 20 d
051 use
1050 1 re un
12001
a
11050
21050
31050
41050
22001
32001
42001
Values
Location IDs
Types and Sizes
Status
Full Attributes
2050
12050
22050
32050
42050
Page 7b.15
GUIDED EXAMPLE
MODBUS MESSAGE SEQUENCES:

4
All transmit and receive sequences , shown here, demonstrate use of default word ordering, single precision
(32-bit) data representation and single register formatted commands. Transmitted messages are addressed to the
second virtual slave (base slave address + 2) for access to the Old style default register map of High-speed List 1.
(1a)
Objective: Read values from all of the parameters listed in High-speed List One (HSL-1)
Action 1 of 3: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 1 (Values Section, Block A)
3
Values expected in the reply are 3600.125 and 3546.123, both in base units of m /hour.
Transmit
Meaning
03
Slv.
03
Fn.
00
Reg.
01
ID
00
Reg.
02
Cnt.
94
Chk
29
Sum
Receive
Meaning
03
Slv.
03
Fn.
08
D.C.
45
The
61
Data
02
00
The
45
Data
5D
A1
The
F8
Data
D7
Chk
88
sum
Result:
3
45610200 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3600.125 (in base units of m /hour)
3
455DA1F8 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3546.123 m /hour
Note:
When using the single register mode, the number of registers to be read is the same as the number of
parameters to be read from the associated block. This happens to be two for Block A in this example.
Action 2 of 3: Read four registers starting from MODBUS register 1001 (Values Section, Block B)
Transmit
Meaning
03
Slv.
03
Fn.
03
Reg.
E9
ID
00
04
Reg.
Cnt.
94
Chk.
5B
sum
Receive
Meaning
03
Slv.
03
Fn.
10
D.C.
46
The
18
Data
3C
00
The
3F
Data
Receive
Meaning
F4
Data
00
3E
The
E3
Data
40
94
24
Chk.
24
Sum
19
0A
The
B1
Data
46
15
The
Result:
st
1 . Volume Flow Total (Integer + Fraction)
3
46183C00 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 9743 (in base units of m /hour)
3
3F190AB1 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.59781936 (in base units of m /hour)
nd
2 . Volume Flow Total (Integer + Fraction)

3
4615F400 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 9597 (in base units of m /hour)
3
3EE34094 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 0.44385207 (in base units of m /hour)
Note:
Fractional values of a rollover total are always accurate to 8 decimal places irrespective of the selected
display format for volume categorised data.
Action 3 of 3: Read 1 register starting from MODBUS register 2001 (Values Section, Block C)
Transmit
Meaning
03
Slv.
03
Fn.
07
Reg.
D1
ID
00
01
Reg.
Cnt.
Receive
Meaning
03
Slv.
83
Fn.
02
D.C.
61
Chk
31
sum
D4
Chk
A5
Sum
Result: Response indicates that there are no parameters listed in Block C

4
The MODBUS message sequences were all tested using the direct communication feature of Solartrons free-of-charge
FC-Config software utility. You can find it on the Solartron web site at www.solartron.com
Page 7b.16
Issue: AA

(1b)
GUIDED EXAMPLE
Objective: Write new fixed values to the two known parameters listed under Block A of High-speed List One
Block A
Entry 1
Decimal Value
(Before Update)
Decimal Value
(After Update)
Block A
Entry 2
Decimal Value
(Before Update)
Decimal Value
(After Update)
IV rate
3664
CV rate
3712
Abbreviations: IV = Indicated Volume, CV = Corrected Volume
Action 1 of 1: Write values to two registers starting from MODBUS register 1 (Values Section, Block A)
45650000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3664
45680000 is the 32-bit IEEE hexadecimal representation for 3712
Transmit
03
10
00
01
00
02
08
45
65
00
00
45
68
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
DC
The
Data
The
Data
The
Transmit
00
4C
7E
Meaning
Data
Chk
Sum
Receive
03
10
00
01
00
02
11
EA
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Result:
Indicated Volume and Corrected Volume rates are updated with new fixed values.
Notes:
3
The new parameter values are expected by the slave device to be in base measurement units of m /hour.
To find out the base units for other parameter categories, turn to Chapter 9.
(2a)
Objective: Read the location IDs of the first three entry configuration parameters of Block B
Block A Entry 1
Loc. ID
Block A Entry 2
Loc. ID
Block A Entry 3
Loc. ID
DBM list 1B ptr 1
2459
DBM list 1B ptr 2
2460
DBM list 1B ptr 3
2461
Action 1 of 1: Read three registers starting from MODBUS register 11001 (Loc. IDs Section, Block B)
Transmit
03
03
2A
F9
00
03
DC
00
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive
03
03
06
09
9B
09
9C
09
9D
59
1B
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
data
The
Data
Chk
sum
Result:
099B is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2459 the database location ID of <DBM list 1B ptr 1>
099C is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2460 the database location ID of <DBM list 1B ptr 2>
099D is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2460 the database location ID of <DBM list 1B ptr 3>
Note:
2AF9 (Reg. ID) is the hexadecimal representation for 11001
Issue: AA
Page 7b.17
GUIDED EXAMPLE
(2b)
Objective: Add an entry to High-speed List 1 via the parameter list of Block C
Action 1 of 1: Write the database location ID of <Mass flow rate> into the database location of
<DBM list1C ptr 1> (ID: 2509)
09CC is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 2508 the MODBUS address for <DBM list1C ptr 1>
029D is the 16-bit hexadecimal representation for 0669 the database location ID of <Corrected Vol rate>
Transmit
01
10
09
CC
00
01
02
02
9D
EE
55
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
DC
The
Data
Chk
Sum
Receive
01
10
09
CC
00
01
C2
6A
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Note:
At present, the remote manipulation of a parameter list is achieved through the register map for the 795x
database (at the base slave address). See Chapter 7 for further examples of accessing the database.
(3a)
Objective: Read data type and size of a value from all parameters listed in Block A of High-speed List One
Action 1 of 1: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 20001 (Types Section, Block A)
Transmit
03
03
4E
21
00
02
82
CB
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive
03
03
04
07
04
07
04
9A
B5
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
Data
Chk
Sum
Result:
0704: 07 = 32-bit floating-point data type, 04 = 4 bytes for representing the value
Note:
See Table 7 on page 7b.19 when interpreting other codes for the data type and size
(4a)
Objective: Read value status from each parameter listed in Block A of High-speed List One
Action 1 of 1: Read two registers starting from MODBUS register 30001 (Status Section, Block A)
Transmit
03
03
75
31
00
02
8E
2A
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
Reg.
ID
Reg.
Cnt.
Chk
Sum
Receive
03
03
04
00
01
00
00
88
33
Meaning
Slv.
Fn.
D.C.
The
Data
Chk
Sum
Result:
There are four bytes of parameter data returned: 0x0001 and 0x0002
0x0001 = Set value status

0x0000 = Live value status
Note:
For the interpretation of other codes, refer to Table 6 on page 7b.19.
Page 7b.18
Issue: AA
GUIDED EXAMPLE
Table 6: Codes for all returned states

Value *
State Return
0x0000
Live
0x0001
Set
0x0002
Fail
0x0003
Fallback
0x00FF
No state
* All values in this table are hexadecimal numbers
Table 7: Interpreting Data from Type and Size Requests

Database Location Type
Character
Unsigned 8-bit integer
32-bit floating-point number
64-bit floating-point number
Character String
Multiple-choice (List) Option
Location pointer
Time and date
Size (Bytes) *
Type (Code)
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
8
22
2
2
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
* All values in this column are decimal numbers
Issue: AA
Page 7b.19
WONDERWARE COMPATIBILITY NOTES

7b.3
Using Wonderwares Modbus I/O Server With High-Speed Lists

Background
The MODBUS specification glances over the concept of different address ranges containing different data
types (and only those types in that range), and therefore using different MODBUS command numbers to
manipulate the data. The specification goes on to say that It is perfectly acceptable, and very common, to
regard all four tables as overlaying one another, if this is the most natural interpretation on the target
machine in question. While individual manufacturers have mostly banded their data somewhat, but in
smaller bands that do not fit this four-table approach, Wonderwares software has stuck to the separate
address range method rigidly. For some individual manufacturers it has knowledge of, it has allowed them
to specify their own arrangements, and will honour them; without that, you must use absolute addressing,
which relies on the different command numbers for different ranges. Because Solartron flow computers only
support commands 3 and 16 covering the whole range of 0 65535, absolute addressing cannot be used;
up until now, none of the other manufacturers implementations could be used either.
Now
With the flexibility of the new high-speed lists, it is now possible to get most important data by simulating
one of the other manufacturers. In the future, Wonderware will support Solartrons 795x series directly.
For now, here is how you can read floating-point data types and long integers (totals in their most accurate
representation) using Wonderware:
1. Configure the communications parameters on the 795x

<Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Communications><Ports>
<Port X>/<Modbus parameters>/<Slave features>
Alarm+L1+L2+Dlog (recommended)
<Port X>/<Modbus parameters>/<Long reg access> Single register
<Port X>/<Modbus parameters>/<Real precision> Single precision
<Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Communications>/<Modbus slave>
<High-speed list 1>/<Word order> Modbus default
<High-speed list 1>/<Layout> Grouped (recommended)
<High-speed list 1>/<Grouped start address> 7001 (required for compatibility reasons)
<High-speed list 2>/<Word order> Modbus default
<High-speed list 2>/<Layout> Grouped (recommended)
<High-speed list 2>/<Grouped start address> 15001 (required for compatibility reasons)
With this arrangement floating-point values can be read from high-speed list 1 and long integers read
from high-speed list 2. If you need to be able to read floats and longs from the same high-speed list,
you will need to choose the Ungrouped style of register map and re-organise the start registers for
each block section as appropriate. You will not be able to read floats and longs from within the same
block, as they require different address ranges.
2. Configure Wonderwares Modbus I/O server:

(2a) Configure the Topic Definition - choose a name such as Solar15x0L1
(2b) Select the MODBUS slave address - the base address + 2 (for high-speed list 1)
(2c) Select Omni as the Slave device type Omnis arrangement is the only one currently which can
be used with the 795x series
(2d) Repeat for 2a 2c for High-speed List 2 (if applicable)
You should now be able to use the I/O server via, for example, In Touch.
Page 7b.20
Issue: AA
Chapter 8 Alarms and events
8. Alarms and Events

8.1 Alarms
8.1.1 Alarm types
The types of alarms which are detected and recorded are:
System alarms, caused by one or more of:
Power failure
Battery low (if a battery is fitted)
Watchdog
RAM checksum failure
ROM checksum failure.
Input alarms, caused by one or more of:
Failure of analogue inputs

Failure of density transducers
Incorrect data has been entered.
Limit alarms, caused by one or more of:
Limits which you have set

Limits defined by the system.
These always result in two alarms - one when the change first happens and another when the system
returns to its normal state.
8.1.2 Alarm indicators

The 795x has three LED indicators (one each for Input, System
and Limit Alarms) to show alarm status.
Each alarm indicator can be in one of three states:
Off
The system is working normally.
Flashing
An alarm has been received but has not yet

been accepted.
On
All alarms has been accepted but not yet cleared.

The conditions which caused the alarms in the
first place may still exist.
SYSTEM
ALARM
INPUT
ALARM
LIMIT
ALARM
Alarm indicators on
the front panel
8.1.3 How alarms are received and stored

When a new alarm is received, the appropriate indicator LED on the front panel starts flashing. If the
indicator is already flashing because of a previous alarm, it continues to do so. If the indicator is already ON
(steady), it starts to flash.
Information about alarms is stored in two logs:
The Alarm Status Display
This gives:
(1) a summary of the contents of the Historical Alarm Log
(2) an indication of the current status of the system.
The Historical Alarm Log
This contains an individual entry for every alarm stored in the log.
795x Op Man/DE
Page 8.1
The Historical Alarm Log can store up to 30 entries. When a new alarm is received, one of two things can
happen:
If the Historical Alarm Log is NOT full :
An entry for the new alarm is simply added to the list.
If the Historical Alarm Log is full :
It depends on how the system is set up: Either (1) the oldest entry is deleted and the new one is added to
the top of the list, or (2) the new alarm is discarded. In either case, the Status Display is updated
automatically.
8.1.4 Examining the Alarm Status Display and Historical Alarm Log
Press the INFORMATION button If you want to examine the Alarm Status Display or the Historical Alarm Log.
To bring up the Alarm Status Display, select the Alarm Summary option.
To bring up the first entry in the Historical Alarm Log, select the Alarm History option.
Figure 8.1.1: How to get to the alarm log
Alarm Summary
Alarm History
Event Summary
Event History
The Alarm Status Display
b
c
Summary:
System
Input
Limit
Live New
03 04
00 00
00 04
(Typical display)
b
c
d
The Historical Alarm Log

a
b
c
(Typical entry)
To other entries (if any)

in the Historical Alarm Log
8.1.5 What the Alarm Status Display tells you

A typical Alarm Status Display is shown in the Figure 8.1.1. The display lists, for each type of alarm
(System, Input or Limit), the number of alarms which are live and new.
New alarms are alarms which have been received but not yet accepted.
Live alarms are alarms which refer to conditions which are still active.
An example of a live alarm is when there is a fault in the system. This produces two alarms - one when the
fault first occurs (ON) and the second when it is put right (Off). If only the first alarm of the pair has been
received, the alarm is said to be live because the condition still exists.
Page 8.2
795x Op Man/DE
The number of live alarms tells you how many faults are still active. If you look at the Historical Alarm Log
this tells you more about these faults.
8.1.6 What the entries in the Historical Alarm Log tell you
The diagram, below, shows the function of the relevant keys, and what is on the display.
Figure 8.1.2: A typical entry in the log
1
4
a
13
Alarm ON INPUT *
Dens API fail
X
08-01-99 11:34:38
#1
Clear
12
11
10
5
6
c
d
CLR
14
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Indicates if there are entries BEFORE this one.

Alarm is either ON (fault occurrence) or OFF (fault cured).
Type of alarm.
Indicates alarm not accepted.
Accept this alarm.
Extra identifier to qualify the alarm description.
Clear this alarm entry
Date and time that this alarm (message) was raised.
Identifies a metering-run (stream)
(This feature is not applicable to single-stream software)
10. Indicates that there are alarm entries AFTER this one.
11. Scroll DOWN through the entries.
12. Description of alarm.
13. Scroll UP through the alarm entries.
14. Clear all alarm entries.
Each alarm has its own entry in the Historical Alarm Log which tells you:
Type of alarm
Whether it is a System alarm, Input alarm or Limit alarm and if the alarm is on or off.
Extra identifier for the alarm

This is not always shown for every entry but, where it is shown, it could be one of the following:
A digit
This indicates the channel number on which the fault occurred.
A letter
H and L are for high and low Limit alarms, S is for a step alarm.
Date and time

The date is in the format DD-MM-YY and the time HH:MM:SS. These are entered automatically by the
system when the alarm is received. The time is accurate to within one second.
Acceptance indication
This is only shown for those entries which have not been accepted. When the entry is accepted, the
indicator disappears.
Other entries indication

An up-arrow symbol shows that there are entries before the present one, a down-arrow symbol
shows that there are others after. If the entry currently shown is first in the list, there is no up-arrow. If
it is last, there is no down-arrow.
Description of the alarm

This is an abbreviated description of the alarm and should be sufficient to help you trace the cause of
the problem. A full list of all alarm messages and what they mean, are listed on page 8.3.
8.1.7 Clearing all entries in the Historical Alarm Log

To clear all the alarm entries in the Historical log, press the CLR key. This clears all entries in the Historical
Alarm Log, zeroes the entries in the Status Display and sets all LED indicators to OFF.
795x Op Man/DE
Page 8.3
8.1.8 User-defined Alarms

There are several types of user-defined alarms :User-defined Alarms
1st page
User Alarm Type 1: Measurement Limit Alarm
8.4
User Alarm Type 2: Comparison limit alarm
8.5
8.1.8.1 User Alarm Type 1: Measurement Limit Alarm

Two user limit alarms (nominated as X and Y) are available for monitoring values of any parameters that
do not have low/high alarm limits.
Configuring involves:
1. Editing the identification number of the parameter (menu data) to be monitored by the 795x
2. Editing values for the high and low limits
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Solartron recommend using the 795x set-up Wizard, Alarms, when
configuring these alarms. Wizards are described in Chapter 10.
Configuration task (Limit Alarm X or Limit Alarm Y)

Follow these instructions if you want to configure without using a Wizard.
1. Navigate to the menu data page of the parameter to be monitored and then press the a soft-key
once to display the database location identification (ID) number. Make a note of that number.
2. Navigate to this menu: <Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Alarms>

3. Locate and edit parameters as shown in Table 8.1.1
Table 8.1.1: User Limit Alarm Parameters
Menu Data *
User alarm ptr.
Edit the value to be the ID number of the parameter to be monitored. The

number will be replaced with the associated data name if the parameter exists.
Note: Default setting is 0000 (Off) - not in use
User alarm HI lmt
Set the maximum allowed value for the selected parameter.
User alarm LO lmt
Set the minimum allowed value of the selected parameter.
* On-screen descriptions include an extra letter to identify the alarm nomination.
Summary
The up-to-date state of all user-defined alarms is shown in this menu: <Health check>/<User Alarms>.
Alarms X and Y each have a dedicated digit:
0 = Not in use/No Alarm/Alarm accepted
1 = Alarm active
Page 8.4
795x Op Man/DE
8.1.8.2 User Alarm Type 2: Comparison limit alarm

Two user comparison alarms (nominated as A and B) are available for comparing values of two
parameters and raising an alarm when the difference is outside a Set limit.
Configuring involves:
1. Editing the identification numbers of the two parameters (menu data) to be monitored
2. Editing a value for the comparison limit
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Solartron recommend using the 795x set-up Wizard, Alarms, when
configuring these alarms. Wizards are described in Chapter 10.
Configuration task (Comparison Alarm A or Comparison Alarm B)

Follow these instructions if you want to configure without using a Wizard.
1. Navigate to the menu data pages of the two parameters to be compared. Use the a soft-key to
display the database location identification (ID) number. Make a note of each ID number.
2. Navigate to this menu: <Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Alarms>

3. Locate and edit parameters as shown in Table 8.1.2
Table 8.1.2: User Comparison Alarm Parameters
Menu Data *
Comp alarm ptr1
Edit the value with the ID number of the first parameter to be used in the
comparison. The number will be replaced with the associated menu data name
(if the parameter exists). Note: Default setting is 0000 (Off) - not in use
Edit the value line with in the ID number of the second parameter to be used in
the comparison. The number will be replaced with the associated menu data
name (if parameter exists).
Comp alarm ptr2
Note: Default setting is Off. (i.e. not in use)
Comp alarm limit
Set the maximum allowed difference between values of the two parameters
without needing to raise an alarm.
Note: Default limit is 0 feature is switched off
* On-screen descriptions include an extra letter to identify the alarm nomination
Summary
The up-to-date state of all user-defined alarms are shown in this menu:<Health check>/<User Alarms>
Alarms A and B each have a dedicated digit:
0 = Not in use/No Alarm/Alarm accepted
1 = Alarm active
795x Op Man/DE
Page 8.5
8.1.9 Alarm Logger Output (ALO)

Status Outputs 1 to 5 are dedicated to indicating the presence of active alarms. By default, the ALO is
enabled and pre-configured as shown in Table 8.1.3.
Table 8.1.3: ALO Default Set-up
Digital Output
Default Function
Status Output 1
Indicate System Alarms only
Status Output 2
Indicate Limit Alarms only *
Status Output 3
Indicate Input Alarms only
Status Output 4
Indicate User Limit Alarm X
Status Output 5
Indicate User Limit Alarm Y
* User Comaprison Alarms A and B are also indicated
ALO Re-configuration Options

ALO use of the first three Status Outputs can be re-configured at any time by changing the selected alarm
grouping. Parameters for making a change are found within the menu system.
To change the alarm grouping
1.
2.
Navigate to this menu: <Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Alarms>/<Alarm logger>

Locate parameters as identified in Table 8.1.4 and change the alarm grouping option to suit your
requirements. Available options are summarised in Table 8.1.5.
Table 8.1.4: ALO Configuration Parameters
Menu Data
(as displayed)
Purpose of Configuration Parameter
Alarm output 1
Show/Change alarm group for Status Output 1
Alarm output 2
Alarm output 3
Table 8.1.5: Alarm Grouping Options

Option
Purpose of option
None
Do not indicate presence of any alarms *
System
Indicate System alarms only
Input
Indicate Input alarms only
Limit
Indicate Limit alarms only
Any
Include System, Input and Limit alarms.
System Input
Indicate System alarms and Input alarms
System Limit
Indicate System alarms and Limit alarms
Input Limit
Indicate Input alarms and Limit alarms
* This does not free up the digital (status) output for another function
Notes:
1. For further information on Digital (Status) Outputs, refer to Chapter 2 and Appendix C.
2. The presence of active User-defined Comparison Alarms (A, B, etc.) are indicated by Status Outputs
nominated to include Limit Alarms.
Page 8.6
795x Op Man/DE
8.1.10 Alarm Message List

* Alarm can be cleared immediately
Base Alarm
Message
Type
5167 orif dia lmt
Limit
Limit for Orifice diameter exceeded.

Additional alarm message letters: H = High limit, L = Low limit
5167 orif pipe lmt
Limit
Limit for Orifice pipe diameter exceeded.

5167 re/beta lmt
Limit
Limit for (Reynolds number/Beta ratio) value exceeded.

Arch refmt failed
System
The Archiving re-format command was not successful. There was not enough memory.
Archive too small
System
Not enough archive space is available. Reduce the number of items.

Additional alarm message letters:
A = Alarm archive, D = Daily archive, I = Interval archive, M = Manual archive
AGA8 energy limit
Limit
AGA8 <Gas> lmt
Limit
AGA8 press limit
Limit
The AGA-8 calculation could not be performed due to the Line Pressure measurement
being outside a limit as defined in the AGA 8 Standard.
AGA8 rel dens lmt
Limit
The AGA-8 calculation could not be performed due to the relative density measurement
AGA8 temp limit
Limit
Atmos press limit
Limit
Bad gas data
System
What it means
The AGA-8 calculation could not be performed due to the energy value measurement being
outside a limit as defined in the AGA 8 Standard.
The AGA-8 calculation could not be performed due to the normalised gas percentage being
outside a limit as defined in the AGA 8 Standard.
The AGA-8 calculation could not be performed due to the Line Temperature measurement
Limit for Atmospheric Pressure exceeded.
Additional alarm message letters: H = High limit, L = Low limit, S = Step limit
Raw gas composition data is incorrect.
Base dens limit
Limit
Limit for Base Density exceeded.

Base volume limit
Limit
Limit for Base Volume flow rate exceeded.

Battery failed
System
795X needs a new battery. Configuration has been lost.
Battery low
System
795X needs a new battery as soon as possible. (See Battery failed message)
Chromat error
Limit
Chromatograph problem. Check configuration.
Chromat slv fail
Limit
Slave Chromatograph is not responding. Check cabling and configuration.
Comparison limit
Limit
User-defined alarm.
A = User Comparison Alarm A, B = User Comparison Alarm B
Compress. fail
Limit
Compressibility calculation could not be completed. Check configuration.
Database corrupt
System
DBM bad chksum
System
The 795X Database has become corrupted. It is normal to see this alarm when software is
started for the first time. Clear the alarm and then configure the 795X.
The memory checksum has failed.
Additional alarm message letters: V = Volatile Memory, N = Non-Volatile Memory
This is a notification that one or more of the copies of data were corrupted. Corruption is
corrected automatically but check the configuration.
Additional alarm message characters:
0 = RAM copy, 1= Non-Volatile Memory copy #1,
2 = Non-Volatile Memory copy #2, 3= Padding, ! = Beyond repair.
DBM bad triple
System
Dens comp limit
Limit
Limit for differences between Density A and B values exceeded.

Additional alarm message letters: B = Base Density, L = Line density
Dens temp 1 limit
Limit
Limit for Density loop Temperature 1 exceeded.

795x Op Man/DE
Page 8.7

(Alarm Message List continued)
Limit for Density loop Temperature 2 exceeded.

Dens temp 2 limit
Limit
Density cal fail
System
Diff press limit
Input
DLG list non-real
Limit
DP calib error
Limit
Gas slave fail
Limit
Unable to communicate with a 795X Modbus Slave. Check cabling and configuration.
Hart input fail
Input
SMART field transmitter has failed or not wired to the appropriate SMART Analogue Input.
Additional alarm message letters: 1 = Hart Input #1, 2 = Hart Input #2, etc.
Hart unit error
Input
HART unit of measurement not supported. (See Chapter 16 for a list)
HSL addr conflict
System
ISO 5167 beta lmt
Limit
Limit for Beta ratio value exceeded.

Line dens limit
Limit
Limit for Line Density value exceeded

Line temp limit
Limit
Limit for Line Temperature value exceeded.

Linear mtr limit
Limit
Limit for Linear Flow (Volume rate) value exceeded.

LineTxdr calc fail
Input
Transducer Density calculation not completed.
Linr K-factor err
Input
Live CO2 limit
Limit
Live energy limit
Limit
Limit for Energy value exceeded.

Live N2 limit
Limit
Limit for N2 value exceeded.

mA input cal fail
System
A mA input calibration has failed.

Additional alarm message digits:
1 = Analogue Input #1, 2 = Analogue Input #2, etc.
mA input failed
Input
mA-type transmitter failed or not wired to 795X.

mA input no cal
System
A mA-type Analogue Input is not been calibrated

mA out cal fail
System
A mA output calibration has failed.

1 = Analogue Output #1, 2 = Analogue Output #2, etc.
mA output failed
System
A mA output is not configured correctly or is not working.

mA output no cal
System
Mass rate limit
Limit
Page 8.8
Calibration of a Time Period Input (Density Input) has failed.

Additional message digits:1=Time Period Input #1, 2=Time Period Input #2, etc.
Limit for Differential Pressure exceeded.
An attempt has been made to configure an Archive parameter list with a parameter that
does not have a floating point value.
This message is simply for notification only and can be cleared at any time.
Calibration error check failed while a selected (prime) DP Cell was in a range transition
region.
L = Low range, M = Medium range, H = High range
High Speed List address conflict due to a HSL block overlapping.

Additional alarm message letters: A = Block A, B = Block B, , F = Block F
Linear Flowmeter K-factor could not be linearised from a programmed Frequency versus
K-factor correction curve profile.
Limit for CO2 value exceeded.
A mA Output is not calibrated

Limit for Mass Rate value exceeded.
795x Op Man/DE

Serial Port configuration conflicts with the configuration of another port

Extra Message Character: 1 = Serial Port 1, 2 = Serial Port 2, etc.
MODB slave clash
System
NX19 <Gas> lmt
Limit
The AGA-NX19 calculation could not be performed due to the normalised gas percentage being
outside a limit as defined in the supported Standard.
NX19 press limit
Limit
The AGA-NX19 calculation could not be performed due to the Line Pressure measurement being
outside a limit as defined in the supported Standard.
NX19 SG limit
Limit
The AGA-NX19 calculation could not be performed due to the Specific Gravity measurement
being outside a limit as defined in the supported Standard.
NX19 temp limit
Limit
The AGA-NX19 calculation could not be performed due to the Line Temperature measurement
NX19m3h energy lmt
Limit
The AGA-NX19mod3h calculation could not be performed due to the energy value measurement
being outside a limit as defined in the Standard.
NX19m3h <Gas> lmt
Limit
The AGA-NX19mod3h calculation could not be performed due to the normalised gas percentage
NX19m3h press lmt
Limit
The AGA-NX19mod3h calculation could not be performed due to the Line Pressure
measurement being outside a limit as defined in the Standard.
NX19n3h SG limit
Limit
The AGA-NX19mod3h calculation could not be performed due to the Specific Gravity
measurement being outside a limit as defined in the supported Standard.
NX19m3h temp lmt
Limit
The AGA-NX19mod3h calculation could not be performed due to the Line Temperature
NX19mod <Gas> lmt
Limit
The AGA-NX19mod calculation could not be performed due to the normalised gas percentage
NX19mod LO T/HI P
Limit
The AGA-NX19mod calculation could not be performed due the E4 range limit.
NX19mod press lmt
Limit
The AGA-NX19mod calculation could not be performed due to the Line Pressure measurement
NX19mod temp lmt
Limit
The AGA-NX19mod calculation could not be performed due to the Line Temperature
Orif ISO5167 lmt
Limit
An ISO 5167-1 orifice calculation limit has been exceeded.

Check all configured Discharge Coefficient calculation parameters against the limits that are
written in the Standard.
Pbase<>101.325kPa
Input
Base pressure must be 101.325kPa for the ISO 6976 (MJ/m3) calculation
Peer target fail
System
Peer-to-peer communication failed.

Additional alarm message letter: <MODBUS Slave device number>
Power fail
System
Power to the system has failed
Pressure limit
Limit
Limit for Line Pressure exceeded.

Prover temp limit
Limit
Limit for prover temperature exceeded.

Prt input failed
Input
RTD/PT100 transmitter failed or not wired to 795X.

Prt no cal
System
A PRT-type Analogue Input is not calibrated

Prv press limit
Limit
Limit for prover pressure exceeded.

Pulse out limit
Input
Maximum pulse output frequency reached. (10 pulses/second)

Additional alarm message digits: 1 = Pulse Output #1, 2 = Pulse Output #2, etc.
SG compare limit
limit
Limit for the difference between SG A and SG B values exceeded.
795x Op Man/DE
Page 8.9

Limit
Limit for Specific Gravity value exceeded.

SGERG data confl.
Limit
The SGERG calculation could not be performed due to a conflict:

Case (1) CO2+H2 fractions, when combined, exceed limit for Specific Gravity. Case (2)
N2+CO2+H2 fractions, when combined, exceed limit for Specific Gravity.
Case (3) N2 + H2 fractions, when combined, exceed limit for Specific Gravity.
Additional alarm message letters: None
SGERG energy limit
Limit
The SGERG calculation could not be performed due to the energy value measurement being
outside a limit as defined in the S-GERG Standard.
SGERG rel den lmt
Limit
The S-GERG calculation could not be performed due to the relative density measurement being
outside a limit as defined in the supported S-GERG Standard.
SGERG <Gas> lmt
Limit
The S-GERG calculation could not be performed due to the normalised gas percentage being
SGERG press limit
Limit
The S-GERG calculation could not be performed due to the Line Pressure measurement being
SGERG temp limit
Limit
The S-GERG calculation could not be performed due to the Line Temperature measurement
being outside a limit as defined in the S-GERG Standard.
SpEq1 calc fail
Input
Incorrect data caused Special Equation 1 to fail
SpEq2 calc fail
Input
Incorrect data caused Special Equation 2 to fail
Tbase <> 0, 15, 20
Input
Base temperature must be 0C, 15C or 20C
Tcombust<>0,15,20
Input
Combustion temperature must be 0C, 15C, 20C or 25C for the ISO 6976 (MJ/M3) calc.
Timeperiod failed
Input
Transducer failed or not wired to 795X.

Additional message digits: 1=Time Period Input #1, 2 =Time Period Input #2, etc.
Timeperiod glitch
Input
An anomaly has occurred. There have been unusual frequency readings for longer than is
tolerated. An adjustment to a filter (menu data) value may be required. (Refer to Density
configuration pages)
1 = Time Period Input #1, 2 = Time Period Input #2, etc.
Timeperiod no cal
System
A Time Period Input (Density Input) is not been calibrated.

1 = Time Period Input #1, 2 = Time Period Input #2, etc.
Totaliser limit
System
Roll-over of a main (standard) total has ocurred.

I = Indicated Volume Total, V = Corrected Volume Total, M=Mass Total,
B=Base Volume Total, E = Energy Total, A = Alarm Total
Turb freq limit
Limit
Limit for calculated pulse input frequency value exceeded.

Additional alarm message digits: M = Main turbine
Turb K-factor err
Input
K-factor could not be linearised from a programmed Frequency versus K-factor correction
curve profile.
Turb limit failed
Input
Count of missing pulses from Turbine Flowmeter exceeded Set limit.

1 = Pulse (Turbine) Input #1, 2 = Pulse (Turbine) Input #2, etc.
Turb pcent failed
Input
Percentage of missing (error) pulses, in terms of pulses accumulated for the pulse frequency
calculation, has exceeded 0.05%.
Turbine no cal
System
User input alarm
Input
Status Input activated alarm. See page 8.Error! Bookmark not defined. for details.
Additional alarm message letters: I = Alarm I, J = Alarm J
User limit alarm
Limit
User-defined hi/low limit alarm. (See page 8.4 for details)

Additional alarm message letters: X = Alarm X, Y = Alarm Y,
Water cntnt limit
Input
Water content is in excess of a defined limit.

Additional qualifying letters seen after the base message:
H = High limit, L = Low limit, S = Step limit
SG limit
Page 8.10
A Pulse Input is not calibrated.

795x Op Man/DE
8.2 Events
8.2.1 Introduction to 795X events
The 795X keeps a record of important system changes in an Event Log. This is very similar, in concept, to
the alarm log, but the nature of the information kept is different.
Event details that can be viewed in the event log:
Changes to the status of pre-determined data that affects calculations

Changes to the value of data pre-determined data that affects calculations.
Event details that can be seen only in a printout of the event log:
Messages from hardware diagnostics

Download of a configuration completed.
8.2.2 Event indicators

Unlike alarms, there are no event indicators on the front panel of the 795x.
8.2.3 How events are received and stored

Information about events is stored in two logs:
Event Status Display
This gives:
(1) a summary of the contents of the Historical Event Log
(2) an indication of the current status of the system.
Historical Event Log
This contains an individual entry for every event stored in the log.
There is enough room, in the historical event log, to store up to 150 event records. When a new event is
received, one of two things can happen:
If the event log is NOT full :
A new event record is simply added
If the event log is full :
The event configuration data, Event full action, has two options, Replace and Ignore, for determining
how to deal with a new event when the event log is full. (See Table 8.2.1)
Table 8.2.1: Event Full Action - Available Options

<Event full action>
Option
Replace
Ignore
Purpose of Option
Always overwrite the oldest event in the event log
Always discard a new event when the event log is full
Note: The default action is Replace
This can not be changed. The list of auditable data is fixed.
795x Op Man/DE
Page 8.11
8.2.4 Examining the Event Summary and the Event Log

Press the INFORMATION button If you want to examine the Event Status Display or the Historical Event Log.
To bring up the Event Status Display, select the Event Summary option.
To bring up the first entry in the Historical Event Log, select the Event History option.
Figure 8.2.1: How to get to the event log
The Event Status Display

a
a
Alarm Summary
Alarm History
Event Summary
Event History
b
c
Summary: Act Live

Auto
003 004
User
150 150
Periodic
000 000
(Typical display)
b
c
d
The Historical Event Log

a
b
c
(Typical entry)
To other entries (if any)

in the Historical Event Log
8.2.5 What the Event Status Display tells you

A typical Status Display is shown in the diagram (below). It lists, for each type of event (Auto, User or
Periodic) the numbers of alarms which are active and live.
Active events are events which have been received but not yet accepted.
Live events are events which refer to conditions which are still active.
The number of live events tells you how many of them are still active. If you look at the Historical Event Log
this tells you more about these events.
8.2.6 What the entries in the Historical Event Log tell you
Figure 8.2.2 shows the function of the relevant keys, and what is on the display.
Key to figure:
Figure 8.2.2: A typical entry in the Historical

Event Log
1
4
a
11
Loc:0002 USER
*
Security level
25-01-99 09:56:49
Clear
10
Page 8.12
5
6
c
d
CLR
12
1. Indicates if there are entries BEFORE this one.

2. Location identifier.
3. Type of event.
4. Indicates alarm not accepted.
5. Accept this alarm.
6. Event description.
7. Clear this alarm entry
8. Date and time that this alarm (message) was raised.
9. Indicates that there are alarm entries AFTER this
one.
10. Scroll DOWN through the entries.
11. Scroll UP through the alarm entries.
12. Clear all alarm entries.
795x Op Man/DE
Each event has its own entry in the Historical Event Log which tells you:
Type of event
Whether it is Auto, User or Periodic and on or off.
Type
What it means
Auto
Changes made by the 795x application software.
User
Changes made by the keypad or done over serial communications.
Periodic
This event type is not used at present.
Date and time

The date is in the format DD-MM-YY and the time HH:MM:SS. These are entered automatically by the
system when the alarm is received. The time is accurate to within one second.
Acceptance indication
This is only shown for those entries which have not been accepted. When the entry is accepted, the
indicator disappears.
Other entries indication

An up-arrow shows that there are entries before the present one, a down-arrow shows that there are
others after. If the entry currently shown is first in the list, there is no up-arrow. If it is last, there is no
down-arrow.
Description of the event

This is an abbreviated description of the event and should be sufficient to help you trace the reason for it.
Old value and new value

Pressing the RIGHT ARROW key displays another screen
with the old and new values of data.
Press the LEFT ARROW (or the RIGHT ARROW ) key for
the previous display to re-appear.
a
New Value
1.000
Old Value
0.000
b
c
d
8.2.7 Clearing all entries in the Historical Event Log

To clear all the event entries in the Historical Event log, press the CLR key. This clears all entries in the
Historical Event Log and zeroes the entries in the Event Status Display.
795x Op Man/DE
Page 8.13
Page 8.14
795x Op Man/DE
Chapter 9 Additional facilities
9. Additional facilities
9.1 Feature: Archiving
9.1.1 Introduction
The 795x series can perform data logging to generate historical records archives - of parameter data. The
archived data can be retrieved on-demand and displayed within the menu system. It can also be printed out as
a report and retrieved by MODBUS (protocol) networked devices.
Values from user-selected parameters can be statistically prepared (e.g. average, maximum, etc.) according to
user requirements. Statistical results are recorded at intervals that are defined by the type of data logging.
Each logging type has a separate archive with a 20-parameter capacity and the ability to keep statistics from the
past.
There are four types of data logging available:
1. Interval
Statistical results are automatically recorded in an Interval Log archive at a user-selected time-span.
An interval can be as short as a 795X machine cycle or as long as twelve hours.
A user-selected date and time marks the start of the very first interval.
2. Daily
Statistical results are automatically recorded in a Daily Log archive at the same time each day (i.e. 24hour intervals). A user-selected date and time marks the start of the very first 24-hour period.
3. Manual
Statistical results are recorded in a Manual Log archive only when triggered manually from the front panel
or over serial communications. The beginning of this variable time-span occurs on enabling this type of
data logging.
4. Alarm
Statistical results are recorded in an Alarm Snapshot Log archive whenever an alarm is raised or is
removed. (This is separate from the Alarm History log). The beginning of this variable time-span occurs on
enabling this type of data logging.
All the types can operate in parallel if required.
The size of an archive is finite but flexible enough to allow re-sizing by hand. Re-sizing actions cause all
previously recorded values to be lost forever and should be done prior to data logging commencing.
Archives can be selectively viewed on screen and printed out as a report. Printouts of reports can also occur
automatically after new statistical results have been archived. Associated parameters (database locations)
can be manipulated or retrieved by MODBUS networked device.
Important notice!
The two sections that follow should be read and understood before embarking on the
configuration task. It is also advisable to try out at least one of the worked examples.
795x Op Man/CB
Page 9.1
9.1.2 Statistical Information

The following statistical options are available you:
1.
Average
This calculates the average of a parameter value sampled every 795X machine cycle. The resulting
average is ready for whenever it is to be recorded to an archive.
2.
Difference
This calculates the difference between the latest sampled parameter value and the result that was last
copied to an archive. A result is ready for whenever it is to be recorded to an archive.
3.
Maximum
This results in the largest sampled parameter value (since that last archived statistic) being copied to an
archive.
4.
Minimum
This results in the smallest sampled parameter value (since that last archived statistic) being copied to
an archive.
5.
None
This results in the very latest sampled parameter value being copied to an archive.
9.1.3 Analysis of an archive

This section explains:
archive space and how it can change

how new statistical data is added to an archive
Archive space and how it changes

Each archive has a default amount of memory space in the 795x. The initial amount is the same for each
archive. Archive memory space is 2 dimensional.
Depth
Depth corresponds to the quantity of parameter values that can be kept.
Width
Width corresponds to the total number of bytes required to store a single value from
every nominated parameter. (See Table 9.1.1)
Available memory space for increasing the size of an archive can be viewed by pressing the PRINT MENU
key and then selecting the menu: <Archives>/<Re-size archives>/<Spare arch. memory>.
Table 9.1.1: Bytes Required for all Database Location Types

Width
(bytes)
Page 9.2
Data Type
Selection code for an option in a multiple-choice list
A database location without a status attribute (i.e. Set or Free) where the
value (e.g. 1.25) is automatically generated by a measurement task. This
does not include totals.
A data location with a status attribute (i.e. Set or Free) where the value (e.g.
1.25) may be generated by a measurement task.
Totals only. For example, Indicated Volume Flow Total
16
Dates and/or times.
21
Text only.
795x Op Man/CB
It is very important to carefully plan the set-up of all archive space before data logging to archives
commence. Otherwise, be prepared for inevitable data loss when making changes or setting up other
archives at a later stage.
Archive space can be changed as follows:
Action
Effects on associated archive
Extent of data loss
Parameter added to nomination list
Width increases. Depth decreases to compensate.
Associated archive
Parameter removed from list.
Width decreases. Depth increases to compensate.
Associated archive
Space increase granted
Depth increases.
All archives
This is best illustrated in the following sequence of diagrams involving one archive:(2) Archive after adding another parameter:-
(1) Archive with an initial depth of 8 and

a list with 1 defined parameter:-
Parameter 2 = Time and date
Parameter 1 = Line temperature

Parameter 1
Statistic entry 1
Width=4
Statistic entry 2
Parameter 2
Width=4
Width=16
Statistic entry 2
Statistic entry 3
:
Parameter 1
Statistic entry 1
Depth = 5
Statistic entry 3
Depth = 8
Statistic entry 7
Statistic entry 5
Statistic entry 8
The last available record
Diagram notes:
(a) Parameters shown here are defined with a data location number. An archive can have a maximum
of 20 parameters.
(b) The width value of a parameter is dependent on the type of data location. It is not displayed.
(c) Depth is affected by the total width of parameters. Depth will therefore vary from the example shown
here.
(3) Archive after requesting room to allow 9

entries for each parameter.
Parameter 1
Statistic entry 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 1
Statistic entry 1
Width=20
Statistic entry 2
Statistic entry 2
Statistic entry 3
:
(4) Archive after removing

parameter 2 from list
Width=4
Statistic entry 3
:
Depth=9
Depth=9
Statistic entry 7
Statistic entry 8
Statistic entry 8
Statistic entry 9
Statistic entry 9

795x Op Man/CB
Page 9.3
Adding new statistics to an archive

Several questions can be asked about adding new statistics to an archive
Q1. How are they inserted?
Q2. What happens when all records of statistic results are full?
The answers to these questions are provided in the exaples that follow.
(a) Fixed time-span data logging

This is described with two sequences of diagrams.
Sequence 1: Archive is not full
This shows what will happen when adding statistics to an empty archive. Notice how older statistics are
pushed downwards.
Fixed time-span of data logging and archiving

Record:
(1)14.55
(2)1.0132
1 second
samples
T0
T1 = 8s
Record:
(1)14.50
(2)1.0133
T2 = 8s
Record:
(1)14.53
(2)1.0130
T3 = 8s
Record:
(1)?
(2)?
T5
T4 = 8s
Diagram notes:
(a) "Interval" type data logging is shown
with an 8 second time-span.
"Daily" type logging operates in the
same way except T1=24 hours, T2=24
hours, etc.
(b) 1 sampled value taken every second
from each defined parameter.
(Assume cycle time is 1 second for this).
(c) Parameter 3 is not defined.
(1) Archive state after 8 seconds
(d) Recorded values shown here are not

the result of a specific statistical
calculation.
Newest and oldest statisitic at present
Statistic entry 1
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
(f) Data logging continues beyond T5 until

disabled.
Statistic entry 3
:
(e) T0 is the date and time that this data

logging first began.
Statistic entry 6
The last possible record for a statisitc in this archive

Newest
statisitic at
present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
14.53
1.0130
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
14.50
1.0133
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
Statistic entry 6
The last possible
record for a statisitc
in this archive
Page 9.4
Oldest statistic
at present
795x Op Man/CB
Sequence 2: Archive is full

This shows what will happen when adding statistics to a full archive. Notice how the oldest statistics have
to be lost to make space for new statistics.
Fixed time-span data logging and archiving
Record:
(1)14.55
(2)1.0132
1 second
samples
T0
T1 = 8s
Record:
(1)14.50
(2)1.0133
T2 = 8s
Record:
(1)14.53
(2)1.0130
T3 = 8s
Record:
(1)14.51
(2)1.0130
T4 = 8s
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
15.1
1.0128
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
15.0
1.0129
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
14.51
1.0130
(Not used)
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
Statistic entry 6
T6 = 8s
Record:
(1)15.2
(2)1.0127
T7 = 8s
Record:
(1)?
(2)?
T8 = 8s
T9
(a) "Interval" type data logging is shown

with an 8 second time-span.
calculation.
Oldest statisitic at present
The last possible

in this archive
T5 = 8s
Record:
(1)15.1
(2)1.0128
Diagram notes:
Newest statistic at present
Record:
(1)15.0
(2)1.0129


Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
15.2
1.0127
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
15.1
1.0128
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
15.0
1.0129
(Not used)
14.50
1.0133
Statistic entry 6
The last possible
795x Op Man/CB
14.55 is
now lost

disabled.
1.0132 is
now lost
Page 9.5
(b) Variable time-span data logging

This is described with two sequences of diagrams.
Sequence 1: Archive is not full
This shows what will happen when adding statistics to an empty archive. Notice how older statistics are
pushed downwards.
Variable time-span data logging and archiving
Record:
(1)14.55
(2)1.0132
1 second
samples
T0
Record:
(1)14.50
(2)1.0133
T1 = 8s
T2 = 16s
Record:
(1)?
(2)?
T4
T3 = ?s
Diagram notes:
(a) "Manual" or "Alarm" type data logging is

shown here with two completed timespans. Third time-span is unknown until
an alarm is raised (or cleared) or
logging is next triggered manually by a
user.

Newest and oldest statisitic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
Statistic entry 1
Statistic entry 2
:
(e) T0 is when this data logging first began.

disabled.
Statistic entry 3
:

calculation.
Statistic entry 6
The last possible record for a statisitc with this archive

Newest
statisitic at
present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
14.50
1.0133
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
:
Statistic entry 6
The last possible
in this archive
Page 9.6
Oldest statistic
at present
795x Op Man/CB
Sequence 2: Archive is full

This shows what will happen when adding statistics to a full archive. Notice how the oldest statistics have
to be lost to make space for new statistics.
Variable time-span data logging and archiving
Record:
(1)14.55
(2)1.0132
1 second
samples
T0
T1 = 6s
Record:
(1)14.50
(2)1.0133
T2= 7s
Record:
(1)14.53
(2)1.0130
T3 = 9s
Record:
(1)14.51
(2)1.0130
T4 =
5s
T5 = 8s
Newest statisitic at present
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
15.1
1.0128
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
15.0
1.0129
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
14.51
1.0130
(Not used)
14.55
1.0132
(Not used)
Statistic entry 6
T6 = 12s
Record:
(1)15.2
(2)1.0127
T7 = 8s
Record:
(1)?
(2)?
T8 = ?s
T9
(a) "Alarm" and "Manual" type data logging

are both represented with multiple
variable time-spans.
calculation.
Oldest statisitic at present
The last possible

in this archive
Record:
(1)15.1
(2)1.0128
Diagram notes:
Record:
(1)15.0
(2)1.0129


Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Statistic entry 1
15.2
1.0127
(Not used)
Statistic entry 2
15.1
1.0128
(Not used)
Statistic entry 3
15.0
1.0129
(Not used)
14.50
1.0133
(Not used)
Statistic entry 6
The last possible
in this archive
795x Op Man/CB
14.55 is
now lost
(f) Data logging to archive continues

beyond T9 until disabled.
1.0132 is
now lost
Page 9.7
9.1.4 Configuration details

Use the following table to find the instructions for configuring an archiving activity. It is advisable to try out an
example before embarking on the configuration task.
Configuration task
Page 9.8
1st. Page
Interval Archiving
9.9
Daily Archiving
9.10
Manual Archiving
9.11
Alarm (snapshot) Archiving
9.12
Re-sizing of archives
9.13
795x Op Man/CB
Configuration task: Interval logging

Objectives:
(i) Set-up a parameter list,
(ii) Set a start date/time,
(iii) Set a fixed interval and
(iv) enable this data logging type.
Instructions:
1.
Before proceeding, ensure that you have a list of parameters and their database location IDs . The
identification numbers are important because they will be input to identify parameters to be archived.
2.
Press the PRINT-MENU key
3.
Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<Configure logs>/<Interval log>
4.
Nominate the parameters to be archived

(a)
(b)
(c)
5.
Browse through the Configure list sub-menu to locate the pointer and action menu data pages.
Starting with the first entry, program in a location ID and then select a statistical (action) function.
(See Menu Data List 9.1.1 for further guidance)
Repeat (4b) with the next entry until all parameters have been nominated.
Work through the remaining configuration parameters as guided in Menu Data List 9.1.2.
Menu Data List 9.1.1: First Entry Configuration Parameters

Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Purpose
Int snap loc 1
Nominate parameter 1 with a database location ID
Int snap action 1
Choose a statistical/non-statistical function to be applied to all values sampled from

parameter 1. (Page 9.2 has a summary of the various supported functions)
* Abbreviations: Int = Interval, loc = location, snap = snapshot
Menu Data List 9.1.2: Configuration Parameter Checklist of Interval Archiving

Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Purpose
Interval start time
Set the date and time for start of the first interval period.
Interval time
Select the interval frequency.
Interval log/print
Options:
(1) Disabled deactivate data logging type / already deactivated
(2) Log data only - activate data logging type but do not print-out a report after archiving
(3) Log and print data activate data logging type and print-out a report after archiving *
* Requires an RS-232 port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Interval Archiving Notes:
A The interval type of data logging operates independently of the other types.
B Intervals are always synchronised to the 795x calendar clock. For example, a 10-second interval will first
occur on the minute rollover and then re-occur every multiple of 10 seconds. An interval start time that is
not divisible by the interval will effectively be delayed to the next multiple of the interval.
C Some or all values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging
will re-synchronise to the calendar clock after the re-start.
The location identification of a parameter can be seen on-screen by navigating the menu data page and then pressing the a-key.
795x Op Man/CB
Page 9.9
Configuration task: Daily logging details

Objectives:
(i) Set-up a parameter list,
(ii) Set a start date/time and
(iii) enable this data logging type
Instructions:
1.
2.
3.
Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<Configure logs>/<Daily log>
4.
(4a) Browse through the Configure list sub-menu to locate the pointer and action menu data pages.
(4b) Starting with the first entry, program in a location ID and then select a statistical (action) function.
(4c) Repeat step 4b with the next available list entry until all parameters have been nominated.
5.
Menu Data List 9.1.3: Daily Archive - Configuration Parameters for First Entry of List
Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Purpose of Parameter
Daily snap loc 1

Daily snap action 1

* Abbreviations: Loc = Location, snap = snapshot
Menu Data List 9.1.4: Daily Archive Configuration Parameters

Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Daily start time
Set the date and time for commencement of the first 24 hour period
Daily log/print
Options:
* Requires a serial port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Daily Archive Notes:
Daily type data logging can operate independently of the others.
A period that falls within an adjustment for daylight saving will be 24 +/- 1 hour.
Some or all values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging
The identification number of a parameter can be seen on-screen by navigating to the menu data page and then pressing the a-key.
Page 9.10
795x Op Man/CB
Configuration task: Manual logging details

Objectives:
(i) Set-up a parameter list and
(ii) enable this data logging type
Instructions:
1.
2.
3.
Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<Configure logs>/<Manual log>
4.
5.
Menu Data List 9.1.5: Manual Trigger Archive - Configuration Parameters for First Entry of List
Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Manual snap loc 1
Manual trig actn 1

* Abbreviations: snap = snapshot, loc = location, actn = action, trig = trigger
Menu Data List 9.1.6: Manual Trigger Archive Configuration Parameters

Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Manual log/print
Options:
* Requires an RS-232 port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Manual Trigger Archive Notes:
The trigger for manual type data logging is activated by selecting a soft-command through the menu
data page with Trigger manual log as the label. It is found under: <Archives>/<Trigger manual log>
Manual type data logging operates independently of the others.
Some or all values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging
795x Op Man/CB
Page 9.11

Configuration task: Alarm (snapshot) logging details
Objectives:
(i) Set-up a parameter list and
(ii) enable this data logging type
Instructions:
1.
2.
3.
Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<Configure logs>/<Manual log>
4.
5.
Menu Data List 9.1.7: Alarm Triggered Archive - Configuration Parameters for First Entry of List
Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Alarm snap locn 1
Alarm snap action 1

* Abbreviations: snap = snapshot, locn = location
Menu Data List 9.1.8: Alarm Triggered Archive Configuration Parameters

Menu Data *
(as displayed)
Log/print on alarm
Options:
* Requires a serial port to be configured for connection to a printer or terminal. For further information, refer to Chapter 7
Alarm-Trigger Archive Notes:

A Alarm type data logging can operate independently of the others.
B Some or all values could be lost if a power failure occurs while they are being logged. The data logging
Page 9.12
795x Op Man/CB
9.1.5
Re-sizing Archive Space
Important notices!
1. Adding a parameter to a data logging list causes all recorded statistics to be immediately
lost from the associated target archive. Other archives are not affected by this.
2. Removing a parameter from a data logging list causes all recorded data to be immediately
lost from the associated target archive. Other archives are not affected by this.
3. Increasing or decreasing space will result in all recorded data being lost from all archives.
Re-size Instructions:
1. Press the PRINT-MENU key

2. Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<Re-size archives>
3. Check how much spare archive memory is available
Note: If the spare archive memory is reported as 0 bytes and archiving has not been in use, format
the archives and then re-check the reported value
4. Re-size archives according to your requirements
The following are re-size menus:(1) Alarm log Alarm Trigger Archive re-sizing
(2) Manual log Manual Trigger Archive re-sizing
(3) Daily log Daily Archive resizing
(4) Interval log Interval Archive resizing
Each re-size menu features two menu data pages. One menu data page is for requesting an
increase or decrease to the depth i.e. the maximum number of values per parameter that can be
presently stored in the associated archive. The other menu data page shows the maximum number
allowed at present.
To request more space for an archive
(4a) Set a new value in the appropriate request parameter
(4b) Confirm this request for more space by selecting the "Reformat soft-command (option
descriptor) through data page under the <Re-format archives> menu.
Warning!
795x Op Man/CB
Increasing or decreasing space will cause all recorded values to be lost from all archives.
Use the max snaphot menu data page to check on the result of a request.
Page 9.13
9.1.6 Operation details (Reporting)

Operations involve selective viewing and printing out of the archives.
Viewing Archives
Recorded values can be viewed on the 795x display. No configuration is required for this feature. Follow the
self-contained instructions that are provided below.
How to view the Interval Archive
1. Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<View/print logs>/<Interval trig log>

2. Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the <Num snaps stored> menu. The
menu data page shows how many values (per parameter) are available from previous intervals.
3. There are menu data pages (database locations) for displaying a previously recorded value for every
listed (nominated) parameter. For example, the value of the first nominated parameter is found in the
Intvl snap value 1 menu data location.
By default, the most recently recorded values from the last interval can be seen. The Select snapshot
menu option is for selecting another elapsed interval. For example, snapshot 1 is for showing the
oldest interval of recorded values. Selecting a snapshot that does not yet exist will always cause all
the most recent recorded values to be selected and then displayed.
4. The date and time, of when the presently displayed statistics were recorded, can be seen by selecting
View snapshot time menu.
How to view the Daily Archive
1. Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<View / print logs>/<Daily log>

2. Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the Num snaps stored menu option.
The menu data page shows how many values (per parameter) are available from previous 24-hour
periods.
3. There are menu data pages (database locations) for displaying a previously recorded value for every
listed (nominated) parameter. For example, the value of the first nominated parameter is found in the
Daily snap value 1 menu data page.
By default, only the most recently recorded values from the previous 24-hour period can be seen. Use
the Select snapshot menu option to select another 24 hour period. For example, snapshot 1 is for
showing the very first 24-hour period of recorded values. Selecting a snapshot (i.e. 24-hour period) that
does not yet exist will always cause all the most recent recorded values to be selected and then
displayed.
View snapshot time option.
How to view the Manual Trigger Archive
1. Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<View / print logs>/<Manual log>

2. Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the Num snaps stored menu option. The
menu data page shows how many recorded values (per parameter) are available.
3. There are menu areas for viewing previously recorded values for each listed parameter. Look for the
numerous Snap item value sub-menus. By default, only the most recently recorded values from the
last trigger can be seen. Use the Select snapshot menu option to select and display recorded values
from previous triggers. For example, edit a value of 1 to retrieve the oldest snapshot. Selecting a
snapshot that does not yet exist will cause all of the most recent recorded statistics to be re-displayed.
View snapshot time menu option.
Page 9.14
795x Op Man/CB
How to view the Alarm Trigger Archive
1.
Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<View / print logs>/<Alarm log>
2.
Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the Num snaps stored menu option.
The menu data page shows how many recorded values (per parameter) are available.
3.
There are a number of menu data pages for viewing previously recorded values for all listed
parameters. Look for the numerous Snap item value sub-menus.
By default, only the recorded values since the last alarm can be seen. The Select snapshot menu
option is for selecting and displaying recorded values from previous new alarm occurrences. For
example, editing a value of 1 will select the oldest set of values. Selecting a snapshot that does not
yet exist will always cause the most recent recorded values to be selected and then displayed.
4.
The date and time, of when the presently displayed values were recorded, can be seen by selecting
View snapshot time option.
How to view the Batch Archive
1.
Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<View / print logs>/<Transaction log>
2.
Find out if data has been recorded in the archive by selecting the <Num snaps stored> menu option.
The menu data page shows how many batch transactions were recorded.
3.
There are a number of menu data pages for viewing previously recorded values for all listed
parameters. Look for the numerous Snap item value sub-menus.
By default, recorded values since the last alarm can be seen. The Select snapshot menu option is for
selecting and displaying recorded values from previous batch transactions. For example, editing a
value of 1 will select the oldest set of values. Selecting a snapshot that does not yet exist will always
cause the most recent recorded statistics to be selected and then displayed
Printing Archives (through a configured RS-232 port)

Archives can printed out in several ways:
1.
Method: On-demand
(1a) From outside the <Archives> menu
This feature requires no configuration. To activate, press the PRINT-MENU soft-key and then
select the Print report menu option. Now choose a report by selecting from the multiple-choice
of options.
Option
(as displayed)
Purpose of option
Interval log
Printout the Interval archive as a report.
Daily log
Printout the Daily archive as a report.
Manual log
Printout Manual archive as a report.
Alarm log
Printout Alarm (Snapshot) archive as a report.
(1b) From inside the <Archives> menu

This feature requires no configuration. To activate, press the PRINT-MENU soft-key and then the
follow instructions.
Instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<View / print logs>
2. Select a menu that is name-associated with the archive
3. Select the Print snapshot menu option
4. Select the Print soft-command option (value)
795x Op Man/CB
Page 9.15
2.
Method: Automatic Printed Report

Archiving can be configured to automatically printout a report whenever data is archived.
Interval archive instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<Configure logs>/<Interval log>/<Enable>
2. Select the Log and print data option
Daily archive instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<Configure logs>/<Daily log>/<Enable>
Manual archive instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<Configure logs>/<Manual log>/<Enable>
Alarm archive instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<Configure logs>/<Alarm log>/<Enable>
Batch archive instructions:
1. Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<Configure logs>/<Transaction log>/<Enable>
All methods require an RS-232 Communications Port to be set-up for printing. Printouts are transmitted
through the port that is configured exclusively for connection to a printer.
Page 9.16
795x Op Man/CB
9.1.7 GUIDED EXAMPLES OF ARCHIVING

Guided Example 1
This guided example involves configuring the Daily log archive to record (snapshot) the average of all
pressure readings during a 24-hour period. It is assumed that the measurement task is already set-up.
Objective: Set-up 795x to record the average of line pressure measurements on a daily basis
Instructions:
1. Add the parameter to the Daily log archive list

(1a) Press the PRINT-MENU soft-key
(1b) Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<Configure logs>/<Daily log>/<Configure list>/<Entry 1>
(1c) Select the Pointer menu option this displays a menu data page with Daily list loc 1
(1d) Press the b soft-key and then type in the database location ID for the pressure parameter
(1e) Confirm the edited location ID by pressing the ENTER soft-key
(1f) Select the <Action> menu and then change the menu data page option selection to Averaging
2. Set an initial date and time

(2a) Navigate to this menu: <Archives>/<Configure logs>/<Daily log>/<start time>
(2b) Press the b soft-key and then edit a date and time for the commencement of the first period
Notes:
The 795X date and time is displayed within menu system. Look inside this menu: <Time>
A date of zero is the same as specifying the present calendar date.
A time of zero is the same as specifying the present time.
3. Activate the data logging activity

(3a) Select menu: <Archives>/<Configure logs>/<Daily log>/<Enable / Disable>
(3b) Choose an option as guided in the table
Option
(as displayed)
Purpose of option
Log data only

Log and print data
Data copied into the Daily log archive. No printed report following archive
Data copied into the Daily log archive. Print a report following archive. *
* An RS-232 port should be configured for connection to a Printer
4. Check on the data logging after 24 hours

Results are best viewed on a connected printer or a PC running a terminal emulation program.
Alternatively, results can be viewed within the menu system.
(4a) Select the menu: <Archives>/<View / print logs>/<Daily log>
(4b) Select various menu data pages
Menu Data Page
(as displayed)
795x Op Man/CB
Purpose
Num daily snapshots
The number of snapshots per parameter inside the Daily log archive.
Daily snap, 0=latest
View selection: 0 = recent snap, 1 = oldest snap, 2 = 2nd oldest snap, etc.
Daily snap value 1
Selected view of a value from the parameter listed under Entry 1.
Daily snapshot time
Shows the date and time of the last daily snapshot.
Page 9.17
9.2 Feature: Printed Reports

This section is a guide to how printable reports can be defined and enhanced. Chapter 12 has a section on
how to print reports.
9.2.1 Current report definition

The content of the Current report is defined by setting up a list of up to 20 locations. An simple example is
shown in Figure 9.2.1.
How to define a list of parameters
1.
Find a menu data page within the 795x menu system
2.
Press the a-key to display the location number (ID) on line four of the display
3.
Write down that location ID number
4.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each parameter to be listed
5.
Press the PRINT MENU soft-key
6.
Select the menu: <Define reports>/<Current report>
7.
Select an entry (sub-menu)
8.
Edit the value to be one of the location numbers. Press the ENTER key to confirm it.
A correct location number is automatically replaced with the location name. Attempts to use
location numbers that do not exist are greeted with the message Bad location ID (or
equivalent) before re-using the original setting.
9.
Repeat steps 7 to 9 for each location to be reported.
Figure 9.2.1: Current Report with two parameters
CURRENT REPORT
================
Report printing time: 21/03/1998 15:26:29
Tag number
HB5X1510
Software Version
1510 Iss 4.20
Indicated vol rate
200.000 m3/hour SET
Ind volume total
4039565.849
m3
******************** END OF REPORT ********************
Page 9.18
795x Op Man/CB
9.2.2 Report Enhancements

Reports can be enhanced to include more information. Use this sub-section to review options for each
report and then take advantage of enhancements as guided.
1. Define a tag number

This is automatically included in all reports. By default the tag number is shown as un-defined. Edit
a tag number to avoid this and uniquely identify the 795x.
Note:
If you have more than one 795X, it is advisable to define a tag number for each one.
(See menu: <Tag number>)
2. Headers and Footers

By default, these are not defined. They automatically appear in all reports once defined.
Header lines 1 to 5
A maximum of five lines can be edited, with free-form text, to appear between the tag number line
and the report printing time line. Blank lines are not shown.
Footer lines 1 to 5
A maximum of five lines can be edited, with free-form text, to appear prior to the end of report
message. Blank lines are not shown.
3. Include settings and values of listed parameters in a report

How to define a list of parameters for a report
(Steps 1 to 4 are for all reports)
1. Find a location within the 795x menu system

2. Press the a soft-key to display the location number (ID) on line four of the display
3. Note down the location number
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each location to be listed
(Steps 5 to 9 are for the Historical Alarm Log Report only)
5. Press the PRINT MENU soft-key

6. Select the menu: <Define reports>/<AlarmLogger report>
7. Select an un-used entry (sub-menu).
8. Edit the value to be one of the location numbers. Press the ENTER key to confirm it.
9. Repeat steps 7 to 8 for each location to be reported.

(Steps 10 to 14 are for the Historical Event Log Report only)
10. Press the PRINT MENU key

11. Select the menu: <Define reports>/<Event report>
12. Select an un-used entry (sub-menu).
13. Edit the value to be one of the location numbers. Press the ENTER key to confirm it.
14. Repeat steps 12 to 13 for each location to be reported.

Note: Parameter lists are provided for each type of Archive
795x Op Man/CB
Page 9.19
9.3 Selecting units and data formats

You can select the units which the 795x uses for its calculations and in which it displays the data, as well as the
formats in which the data is displayed.
You can choose the units and data display formats for:
Flow rates (Mass, Base volume, Corrected volume, Energy)

Flow totals (Mass, Base volume, Corrected volume, Energy)
Line density
Base density
Temperature
Static pressure
Differential pressure
Dynamic viscosity
Turbine k factor
Gas data
Energy
Length
Time
Periodic time (Frequency)
Orifice Coefficents
A full list of the units (metric and imperial) is given at the end of this chapter. Note that, if you change the
units, the values are converted automatically to reflect the change.
9.4
Limits
You can set limits for some parameters so that an alarm is generated if the limits are exceeded.
There are several types of limit:
High limit
The highest value which the parameter can have before an alarm is generated.
Low limit
The lowest value which the parameter can have before an alarm is generated.
Step limit
The greatest allowable step between successive values before an alarm is generated.
Comparison limit
The greatest allowable difference between values from separate measurement channels before an alarm
is generated.
The parameters, and the types of limit which you can set for them, are:
Page 9.20
Mass flow rate:

Line density:
Base density:
Line temperature:
Line pressure:
Alarm X and Y:
Alarm A and B:
Specific gravity:
Base volume flow rate:
Turbine frequency:
Differential pressure:
high and low

high, low, step and comparison
high, low and step
high, low and step
high and low.
Comparison
high and low
high
high
795x Op Man/CB
9.5
Fallback values and modes

A fallback value is used as a temporary substitute for a parameter if a live input (i.e., the transducer,
transmitter or wiring), which is normally used to calculate the parameter, should fail.
A fallback must have one of the following modes:
None
The system uses whatever value is available for the parameter regardless
of whether or not the live input has failed.
Last good value
The system uses, for the parameter, the last value prior to failure.
Fixed value
The system uses whatever fixed value you have specified for the fallback.
You can set fallback values for:
Line density
Base density
Line temperature
Line pressure
Specific gravity
Density temperature A and B (separate channels)
Master meter temperature
Atmospheric pressure
CO2 and N2
Cv/m
9.6 Units which the 795x can display

The 795x can display data values with many different units of measurement, as listed on the next two pages.
However, when communicating with other devices, the data is always sent using the base units.
The following definitions are used:
Base units:
The 795X transmits parameter values in base units over MODBUS

Paramter values in the 795x database are stored in base units.
Default units:
Units which the 795x displays unless you choose an alternative.
Other units:
Units which you can choose instead of the default.
Note that many of the abbreviations used in the tables are defined in the glossary.
795x Op Man/CB
Page 9.21
Units of measurement: Part 1 of 3

Other units available for on-screen
(as displayed)
Parameter Category
Base units
Default units
(on-screen)
Temperature
Deg. C
Deg. C
Deg. F
Deg. R
Kelvin
Ohms
Temperature offset
Deg.C
Deg.C
Deg. F
Kelvin
Deg. R
KPa abs
Kg/cm2 abs
kPa gauge
Kg/cm2 gauge
MPa abs
bar gauge
MPa gauge
Pressure
bar abs
bar abs
Pa abs
psia
Pa gauge
psig
bar Abs
bar Abs
Pa Abs
psiA
KPa Abs
MPa Abs
bar
N/m2
mmHg
psi
tonnes/m3
oz/barrel
lb/in3
lb/gallon (UK)
tons/barrel
g/cc
kg/cc
ns
hour
ms
Pa
kN/m2
inWG
kPa
mmWG
inHg
oz/in3
oz/gallon (UK)
lb/ft3
lb/gallon (US)
tons/gallon(UK)
g/litre
kg/litre
Hz
min
oz/ft3
oz/gallon (US)
lb/barrel
tons/ft3
tons/gallon (US)
g/m3
mbar
mbar
Density
kg/m3
kg/m3
Frequency
us
us
Fraction
PPM
Mole fraction
s (seconds)
ms
hour
us
min
day
pulse/litre
pulse/cc
barrel/pulse
m3/pulse
pulse/gallon (US)
pulse/ft3
gallon (US)/pulse
100m3
in3
1000ft3
gallon (UK)
litres
m3 x E3
ft3
MM ft3
gallon (US)
m3 x E6
100ft3
barrel
cc
std 100m3
std in3
std 1000ft3
std gallon (UK)
norm litres
norm m3 X E3
norm ft3
norm MM ft3
norm gallon (US)
std m3 x E3
std ft3
std MM ft3
std gallon (US)
norm m3
norm m3 x E6
norm 100ft3
norm barrel
std cc
std m3 x E6
std 100ft3
std barrel
norm cc
norm 100m3
norm in3
norm 1000ft3
norm gallon (UK)
std litres
Time
s (seconds)
gallon (UK)/pulse
Flow factor
Volume total
pulse/m
m3
pulse/m
m3
in /pulse
cc/pulse
pulse/barrel
day
s
ft3/pulse
litre/pulse
pulse/gallon (UK)
pulse/in3
Base volume total
std m3
std m3
Mass Total
kg
kg
tonne
oz
g
ktonne
lb
Mtonne
ton
MJ
GJ
Therm
kCal
J
TJ
kWh
MCal
kJ
BTU
Cal
GCal
Energy Total
Page 9.22
MJ
795x Op Man/CB

Parameter Category
Mass rate
Volume rate
Energy rate
Energy value (mass)
Energy value (volume)
795x Op Man/CB
Base units
g/min
m3/hour
MJ/hour
MJ/kg
MJ/m3
Default units
(on-screen)

(as displayed)
kg/hour
kg/day
tonnes/day
ktonnes/day
oz/s
lb/s
lb/day
tons/day
g/hour
kg/hour
tonnes/min
ktonnes/min
mtonnes/hour
oz/min
lb/min
tons/min
g/s
kg/s
tonnes/hour
ktonnes/hour
mtonnes/day
oz/hour
lb/hour
tons/hour
g/min
kg/min
m3/hour
m3/min
litres/hour
cc/hour
gallon(US)/day
gallon (US)/s
gallon(UK)/min
barrel/hour
MM ft3/day
MM ft3/s
100ft3/min
ft3/hour
in3/hour
m3xE6/day
m3xE6/s
m3xE3/min
m3/s
litres/min
cc/min
gallon(US)/hour
gallon (UK)/day
gallon (UK)/s
barrel/min
MM ft3/hour
100ft3/day
100ft3/s
ft3/min
in3/min
m3xE6/hour
m3xE3/day
m3xE3/s
litres/day
litres/s
cc/s
gallon (US)/min
gallon (UK)/hour
barrel/day
barrel/s
MM ft3/min
100ft3/hour
ft3/day
ft3/s
in3/s
m3xE6/min
m3xE3/hour
m3/day
MJ/hour
MJ/min
kJ/hour
J/hour
GCal/day
GCal/s
MCal/min
kCal/hour
Cal/day
Cal/s
kWh/min
therms/hour
Btu/hour
TJ/day
GJ/day
GJ/s
MJ/s
kJ/min
J/min
GCal/hour
MCal/day
MCal/s
kCal/min
Cal/hour
kWh/day
kWh/s
therms/min
Btu/min
TJ/hour
GJ/hour
MJ/day
kJ/day
kJ/s
J/s
GCal/min
MCal/hour
kCal/day
kCal/s
Cal/min
kWh/hour
therms/day
Btu/day
Btu/s
TJ/min
GJ/min
MJ/kg
MJ/g
kJ/kg
J/g
therms/oz
Btu/oz
TJ/tonne
GJ/ktonne
GJ/g
MJ/tonne
kJ/ktonne
kJ/g
therms/ton
Btu/ton
TJ/Mtonne
TJ/kg
GJ/tonne
MJ/Mtonne
kJ/tonne
J/kg
therms/lb
Btu/lb
TJ/ktonne
GJ/Mtonne
GJ/kg
MJ/ktonne
MJ/m3
MJ/litre
kJ/cc
GCal/m3
MCal/litre
Cal/m3
kWh/litre
therms/barrel
Btu/gallon (US)
Btu/ft3
GJ/m3
kJ/m3
J/litre
GCal/litre
kCal/m3
Cal/litre
Therms/gallon (US)
Therms/ft3
Btu/gallon (UK)
Btu/in3
GJ/litre
kJ/litre
J/cc
MCal/m3
kCal/litre
kWh/m3
therms/gallon (UK)
therms/in3
Btu/barrel
TJ/m3
Page 9.23

Parameter Category
Base units
Default units
(on-screen)

(as displayed)
Std m3/min
Std litres/hour
Std cc/hour
norm gallon (US)/d
norm gallon (US)/s
norm gallon (UK)/m
norm barrel/hour
norm MM ft3/day
norm MM ft3/s
norm 100ft3/min
norm ft3/hour
norm in3/hour
norm m3xE6/day
norm m3xE6/s
norm m3xE3/min
norm m3/hour
norm litres/day
norm litres/s
norm cc/s
Std gallon (US)/mi
Std gallon (UK)/hr
Std barrel/day
Std barrel/s
Std MM ft3/min
Std 100ft3/hour
Std ft3/day
Std ft3/s
Std in3/min
Std m3xE6/hour
Std m3xE3/day
Std m3xE3/s
Std m3/s
Std litres/min
Std cc/min
norm gallon (US)/h
norm gallon (UK)/d
norm gallon (UK)/s
norm barrel/min
norm MM ft3/hour
norm100ft3/day
norm 100ft3/s
norm ft3/min
norm in3/min
norm m3xE6/hour
norm m3xE3/day
norm m3xE3/s
norm m3/min
norm litres/hour
norm cc/hour
Std gallon (US)/da
Std gallon (US)/s
Std gallon (UK)/min
Std barrel/hour
Std MM ft3/day
Std MM ft3/s
Std 100ft3/min
Std ft3/hour
Std in3/day
Std in3/s
Std m3xE6/min
Std m3xE3/hour
Std m3/day
Std litres/day
Std litres/s
Std cc/s
norm gallon (US)/m
norm gallon (UK)/h
norm barrel/day
norm barrel/s
norm MM ft3/min
norm 100ft3/hour
norm ft3/day
norm ft3/s
norm in3/s
norm m3xE6/min
norm m3xE3/hour
norm m3/day
norm m3/s
norm litres/min
norm cc/min
Std gallon (US)/hr
Std gallon (UK)/da
Std gallon(UK)/s
Std barrel/min
Std MM ft3/hour
Std 100ft3/day
Std 100ft3/s
Std ft3/min
Std in3/hour
Std m3xE6/day
Std m3xE6/s
Std m3xE3/min
Base volume rate
Std m3/hour
Std m3/hour
Length
cm
in
mm
ft
Dynamic viscosity
cP
cP
Pa.s
Reyn
Kgf.s/m2
slug/fts
P
lbf.s/ft2
Absolute zero
Deg.C
Deg.C
Velocity
m/s
m/s
Per Deg.C
Per Deg.F
Per Deg.R
Per Deg.K
PPM/Deg.F
PPM/Deg.R
PPM/Deg.K
Orifice Coeffient
Page 9.24
PPM/Deg.C
PPM/Deg.C
Deg. F
%/Deg.C
%/Deg.F
%/Deg.R
%/Deg.K
795x Op Man/CB
Chapter 10 Configuring using Wizards
10. Configuring using Wizards

10.1 Introduction to Wizards
Solartron recommends that you use software Wizards to configure the 795X for your installation. Wizards
are easy to use facilities that will take a user through all the data locations and decisions that are required
to satisfy the requirements of a measurement task.
There are individual wizards available for each measurement task. For example there is a Pressure
wizard for configuring line pressure and atmospheric pressure.
To fully configure a 795X, it is very likely that several measurement tasks are required and, therefore,
several wizards will need to be used. It is often more efficient to use a full set-up wizard. This wizard
can guide users through setting up more than measurement task.
Section 10.3 has a Quick-view guide (table) for finding out what wizards are available and what can be
achieved with them.
Section 10.4 features a special wizard for selecting a standard for units of measurement.
10.2 Using Wizards

Although wizards are easy to use, some preparation is still required. Use the following check-list
to prepare.
Ensure that:
All physical connections to the rear panel have been completed.
If this is not the case, refer to Chapter 2 (Getting Started) and Chapter 3 (About the 795X) for
details of supported connections.
Front panel keyboard buttons and the menu system are familiar.
Chapters 5 and 6 are provided to assist with this. It might be a good idea to bookmark the
summary of keys in Chapter 5 for quick reference.
Identification numbers of important result data are written down.
These numbers will be required for configuring facilities such as analogue outputs. There
are two ways to find out data location numbers:
1
(1) Examine the .man file that is supplied on the FC-Config media or
(2) Locate the data within the menu system and then press the a-key to display the
unique identification number on line 4. (Pressing the a-key toggles the number
display on or off.)
Calibration certificates (and supporting data sheets) for all field instrumentation are
available.
there is a comprehensive list of all the 795X input and output connections that are being
used and a list of the measurement tasks that are required.
A free PC utility developed by Solartron. Available on request.
795X Op Man/CB
Page 10.1
Chapter 10 Configuring your instrument by using wizards
Starting a Wizard from the front panel is easy.

Follow these instructions:
Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key.
Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the Configure option
appears.
Step 3: Press the blue key that is alongside the Configure option.
Step 4: Press the a-key twice so that Setup Wizard appears on line one of the display.
Do not worry about what line two is presently displaying.
Step 4: Press the b-key once to start the wizard selection process.
Step 5: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through all available wizards (on line two).
Step 6: Press the ENTER key twice to select and then start a wizard that was named is onscreen.
Once a Wizard is started, follow the prompts to supply the information it asks for and then, if
necessary, use Chapter 11 and the menu system to edit the resulting configuration to match your
exact needs.
Wizard interactions involve several keys:
a, b, c ,d keys Answer a question (e.g. Yes or No) or used for normal data location editing
ENTER key
Confirm a selection or edited setting (e.g. new value), move on to next prompt
< key
Go back to a previous important decision prompt.
After completing a Wizard, the screen with Setup Wizard re-appears. Further wizards can
then be selected in the same way as before. Note that it is not necessary for the None option to
be selected before proceeding to other 795X work.
Page 10.2
795X Op Man/CB
Chapter 10 Configuring using Wizards
10.3 Quick-view Guide (Set-up Wizards)

Wizards
Full Setup
Flow meter
Flow rate
Line density
Base Density
Specific gravity
Temperature
Pressure
Energy Value
Measurement Tasks
Multiple measurement tasks
Frequency (Turbine or Ultrasonic Flow)

Differential pressure (Orifice Flow)
Volume (Linear Flow)
Base volume
Mass
Line Density A (Transducers)
Line Density B(PTZ 1, PTZ2, mA, HART)
Prime Line Density
Base density A (SG)
Base density B (PTZ1, PTZ2 or mA)
Prime base density
SG A (Time Period Inputs 3 & 4)
SG B (Base Density, mA or Chromat)
Prime specific gravity
Line temperature (mA or HART)
Density temperature A (mA or HART)
Density temperature B (mA or HART )
Line pressure (mA or HART)
Atmospheric pressure (mA or HART)
Cv/m from ISO6976, AGA5, mA or Chromat
Relative density
Wobbe Index
Transmitters
Live CO2, N2 and Cv/m (mA sources)
Special calc.
Special equation type 1

Special equation type 2
Analogue outputs
Pulse outputs
Alarms
Multi view
Comms ports
HART inputs
Initialise
Reset
795X Op Man/CB
mA signal outputs
Pulse outputs
User alarms
Multi-page multi-view (key display)
Printer
Modbus Slave
Modbus Master
Live inputs from SMART type transmitters
(for other measurements)
Comments
You can skip tasks
See pages 11.9, 11.13 and
11.31 of Chapter 11 to find
detailed information.
See page 11.10 of Chapter 11
to find detailed information
for detailed information.
to find detailed information.
to find detailed information
See pages 11.68 - 11.69 of
Chapter 11 for information.
Chapter 8 is about alarms.
Chapter 7 is a full guide to
7960/7951 Communications
Chapter 16 is a full guide to
HART support
Clear all user programming to defaults
Use this with caution!!
Use this with caution!!
Clear all user selected options to defaults

and zero parameter values
Page 10.3
Chapter 10 Configuring your instrument by using wizards
10.4 Units Wizard Selection

Follow these instructions to select a standard for the units of measurement:
Step 1: Press the MAIN-MENU key.
Step 2: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the Configure option appears.
Step 3: Press the blue key that is alongside the Configure option.
Step 4: Press the blue key that is alongside this description: Units wizard
Step 5: Press the b-key once to start the selection process.
Step 6: Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through all available options (see map below).
Step 7: Press the ENTER key twice to select the standard that is named is on-screen.
Units wizard
(Selection)
Choose option
Metric
Imperial
SI
Choosing this will not do anything. Use scroll up/down keys

to move through the wizard options.
"Metric"
"Imperial"
Exit Wizard
"SI"
Units Wizard Selection
Page 10.4
795X Op Man/CB
Chapter 11 Configuring without using Wizards
11. Configuring without using Wizards

11.1 What does this Chapter tell me?
This Chapter is a configuration reference for those who are reasonably experienced with configuring the
795X series computer. It is also useful for those who provide technical support.
It is primarily organised for a structured approach to configuring - the live inputs, the calculations and the
live outputs - after the first power-on.
However, for those in a support role, a quick-find index is provided for locating just the reference pages
required for configuring or trouble-shooting a measurement task.
If you are not experienced, return to Chapter 10 (Configuring with Wizards) unless directed here by this
Operating Manual or by someone providing support.
Not all features are covered in this Chapter. For example, configuring the 795X to work with HART
networked transmitters can be a complex task and is therefore kept in Chapter 16. Other optional features
can be found in Chapters 7, 8, 9 and 12.
Quick-find Index.......................................... 11.2

A structured approach to configuring..........11.3
Reference Page Conventions..................... 11.6
Reference information................................ 11.7
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.1
11.2 Quick-find Index

Use this table to quickly find the pages that are of interest.
CATEGORY
Live Inputs
Orifice Flow
ISO 5167
Orifice Flow
AGA 3
Turbine Flow
Ultrasonic Flow
Linear Flow
Totalling
Temperature
Pressure
Density
Base Density
Specific Gravity
Energy
Live Outputs
Special Equations
795X Security
Multi-view
Page 11.2
MEASUREMENT TASK
1ST.
PAGE
11.7
11.8
11.9
11.13
11.13
11.15
11.14
11.14
11.15
11.26
11.26
11.27
11.35
11.30
11.30
11.30
11.31
11.35
11.33
11.33
11.33
11.35
11.38
11.40
11.42
11.42
11.44
11.44
11.45
11.45
11.49
11.51
11.45
11.53
11.53
11.56
11.58
11.53
11.60
11.60
Analogue Inputs (mA and RTD/PT100)

Digital (Status) Inputs
Pulse Inputs (Turbine or Ultrasonic)
Mass rate
Corrected Volume rate
Mass rate
Indicated Volume rate
Mass rate
Base Volume rate
Flow Velocity
Mass rate
Base Volume rate
Mass rate
Base Volume rate
Ultrasonic Totalling
Turbine/Orifice/Linear Flow Totalling
Meter temperature (mA, HART or PRT)
Density Temperature (mA, HART or PRT)
Meter pressure (mA or HART)
Atmospheric Pressure (mA or HART)
Gas Density A (from Transducer)
Gas Density B (Transducer, mA or HART)
Gas Density B (from PTZ1)
Gas Density B (from PTZ2)
Prime Gas Density
Base Density A (from Specific Gravity)
Base Density B (from mA signal)
Base Density B (from PTZ1)
Base Density B (from PTZ2)
Prime Base Density
Specific Gravity A (from Transducer)
Specific Gravity B (from Transducer, mA,
Base Density or Chromatograph)
Prime Specific Gravity
Energy value
Energy rate
Analogue Outputs
Digital (Status) Outputs
Pulse Outputs
Special Equation Type 1
Special Equation Type 2
Passwords and security levels
Security level fallback
Multi-View Multi-Page display
11.75
11.60
11.63
11.63
11.67
11.68
11.69
11.70
11.71
11.72
11.72
795X Op Man/DB
11.3 A structured approach to configuring

At this stage, it is expected that all the physical connections have already been made to the 795X. If
possible, check on this by asking the relevant authority. Familiarity with the front panel keyboard and menu
system is expected.
Careful preparation will help ensure that configuration work progresses smoothly. Work through the
preparation and configuration stages that are listed below.
11.3.1 Preparation Stage
1. Ensure that all of the information needed is at hand:
A plan of the pipeline layout.
A summary of instrumentation with the connections made to the 795X.

(e.g. Analogue Input 1: mA transmitter providing temperature at the metering point )
Calibration certificates of connected instrumentation
Operational data (e.g. minimum and maximum flow rates)
A summary of core measurements to be set-up (e.g. flow rates, flow totals, density, etc .)
(It may be useful to look in Chapter 3 and browse through this Chapter ).
An identification number for each important parameter.

This is essential for configuring the Multi-page Multi-view feature and when configuring an
Analogue Output to transmit values from an unlisted parameter.
In the event of no list being available, use the following procedure:

(a) Navigate to the menu data
(b) Press the BLUE a-key to display the unique identification number.
A plan of what is required from additional features (e.g. Archiving)

(It may be useful to browse through Chapters 3, 7, 8 and 9 ).
2. Read the information on conventions used in this Chapter. (See page 11. 6)
3. Browse through the rest of this Chapter and see how the reference pages are organised.
(End of preparation stage)
11.3.2 Configuration Stage

1. Get the 795X into the Programmer security level.
To do this, perform one of the following actions:
(a) Turn the security key to the furthest position to the right. (7951/7955)
(b) Set the DIP switch on the Connector/Power Supply board to the Non securable position. (7950)
(c) Navigate to the <Enter password> menu data and then type in the programmer password to
change security level. (7950/7951/7955)
2. Set up the basic elements.

Display Contrast
795X Op Man/DB
The display contrast may be quite dim when first powering on the 795X with new software. Look
within the <Configure>/<Other parameters> menu for the appropriate menu and then change the
setting to suit the environment.
Page 11.3
Display Formats
Display formats are important when decimal places of results are critical. They are categorised
under general headings (e.g. temperature, pressure, etc.).
Look in the <Configure>/< Other parameters> menu for the appropriate menu and then change
the settings if the defaults are not appropriate. Units of measurement can be changed also.
Cycle Time (Menu: <Time>)
The necessary amount of machine cycle time required is dependent on how much work the 795X is
performing. Examine the idle cycle time indicator to see if the Set cycle time needs to be
increased or decreased.
Tag Number (Menu: <Tag Number>)
Edit a unique text reference to identify the 795X.
Date/Time (Menu: <Time>)
Ensure that the clock and calendar are Set correctly.
DO NOT CHANGE ANY SETTINGS UNDER THE CALIBRATION MENUS. SETTINGS ARE
MADE BY SPECIALIST CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT AT THE FACTORY.
3. Switch the 795X into the maintenance mode of operation.
Press the INFORMATION MENU (I) key.
Use the DOWN-ARROW (V) key to page down until Operating mode (or similar) is seen.
Press the BLUE (letter) key that is alongside that description.
Change the option description (value) to Maintenance.

(Note: Value quickly reverts to Normal if the 795X is not in a flow stopped state)
Press the MAIN MENU key.
4. Configure the live inputs to get raw readings from instrumentation.
HART Inputs
Analogue Inputs
Digital Inputs
All reference information is in Chapter 16.

Turn to page 11.7
Turn to page 11.8
5. Choose the Flow Metering system.
Navigate to this menu: <Configure>/<Flowmeter details>

Locate the menu data page for Flow meter
Change the option (value) selection to the applicable system.
6. Set-up the core calculation processes.

Pulse inputs (page 11.9), Flow metering (page 11.10), Density measurements (pages 11. 45 to 11.59),
Specific gravity measurements (11. 60), Energy measurements (page 11.63),
Temperature measurements (page 11. 42) and Pressure measurements (page 11. 44)
7. Configure the live outputs.
Analogue Outputs
Digital Outputs
Pulse Outputs
Turn to page 11.67

Turn to page 11.68
Turn to page 11.69
8. Configure Multi-view Multi-page display (User key 1)

9. Configure Alarms and Events (All reference information is in Chapter 8)
10. Configure Serial communications ports (All reference information is in Chapter 7)
Page 11.4
795X Op Man/DB
11. Set-up final 795X security

Set passwords for security levels and set-up the optional security fallback feature.
(If not using the security key, change to the Engineer security level for the remainder of the
configuration work).
12. Switch the 795X into the normal mode of operation.
Press the INFORMATION MENU (i) key.

Use the DOWN-ARROW (V) key to page down until Operating mode (or similar) is seen.
Press the BLUE (letter) key that is alongside that description.
Change the option description (value) to Normal.

(Note: Value quickly reverts to Maintenance if the 795X is not in a flow stopped state)
Press the MAIN MENU key.
(End of configuration stage)
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.5
11.4 Reference Page Conventions

Most reference pages consist of:
A short bullet-point list of measurements or features that can be configured.

A drawing of the process (See section 11.4.1 below)
A list of menu navigation references (See section 11.4.2 below)
A list of menu data associated with the process drawing
A list of equations
11.4.1 Process Drawings

These drawings are very important because they show the key blocks and how menu data interacts to get
a result.
Note: A circled number directly refers to an entry in a menu data list. They are NOT location numbers.
11.4.2 Menu Navigation Lists

The data necessary for configuring measurement/feature can be found in separate parts of the menu
structure. A list of applicable menu structure parts, in a simple notation format, is therefore provided to
assist with navigating to a sub-menu. Data can then be quickly located be some localised searching within
that sub-menu.
A notation has been used as a much shorter method of explaining how to move from the present menu to
another menu.
Step 1:
Step 2:
Step 3:
Step 4:
Step 5:
Press the MAIN-MENU key

Use the DOWN-ARROW (V) key to scroll through pages until the word Configure is seen.
Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word Configure.
Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through pages until the word Flow rate is seen.
Press the blue (letter) key that is alongside the word Flow rate.
Sometimes, it is convenient to use the MAIN-MENU key (especially if lost). However, use of the
BACK-ARROW key is a much more common method of returning back a menu level.
Page 11.6
795X Op Man/DB
ANALOGUE INPUTS
Features:
Analogue Inputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type or Klippon) without add-on boards:

RTD/PT100 input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 4)
mA input channels (Analogue inputs 1 to 4)
Analogue Inputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type) with add-on board:

Analogue Inputs supported by a 7951 (Klippon) with add-on board:

What to do:
Use this page to configure the live input menu data for the analogue channels that are being used by analogue
field transmitters. After the menu data is configured, check that a live reading is displayed by the value menu
data.
Later reference pages, for configuring measurement tasks such as temperature, pressure, etc., will expect
transmitters to be already connected and the corresponding live input menu data to be already configured.
Configuring a measurement task will involve providing range (scaling) information and choosing the analogue
channel by selecting an option (value) for a specific source. This value is a short description that has to be
selected from a fixed list. For example, the description mA input 1 corresponds to analogue input 1.
Menu Navigation List:
(1) <Configure>/<Analog Inputs> and (2) <Health check>/<Analog inputs>
*
Menu Data List:

Analogue Channel
(and signal types )

Analogue Input 1
(RTD/PT100 or mA)
Analogue Input 2
(RTD/PT100 or mA)
Analogue Input 3
(RTD/PT100 or mA)
Analogue Input 4
(RTD/PT100 or mA)
Analogue Input 5
(mA only)
Data names
(as displayed)
Analog 1 input value
Analog input 1 type
mA in 1 ave type
Analog input 2 type
mA in 2 ave type
Analog input 3 type
mA in 3 ave type
Analog input 4 type
mA in 4 ave type
Analog input 5 type
mA in 5 ave type
shows data that can be Live or Set
Analogue Channel
(and signal types)
Data names
(as displayed)
Analogue Input 6
(mA only)
Analogue Input 7
(mA only)
Analogue Input 8
(mA only)
Analogue Input 9
(mA only)
Analogue Input 10
(mA only)
Analog 6 input value *

Analog input 6 type
mA in 6 ave type
Analog input 7 type
mA in 7 ave type
Analog input 8 type
mA in 8 ave type
Analog input 9 type
mA in 9 ave type
Analog input 10 type
mA in 10 ave type
General Note:
A
Analogue Inputs are not pre-allocated to a measurement or feature.
There is an internal DIP switch block for deciding between a mA input or a PRT input. Refer to Chapter 2 of 4 for further details.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.7
DIGITAL INPUTS
Features:
Digital Inputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon)

Status input channels 1 to 8
Digital Inputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type)

Digital Inputs supported by a 7951 (Klippon)

What To Do:
This reference page will assist when configuring basic data (see list below) for all the Status Input channels that
are being used.
Status Inputs do not have a default function. However, they can be allocated a function when requiring any of
the following:
Flow Direction
Indicate flow direction for ultrasonic flow metering. Turn to the Ultrasonic Flow
Metering reference pages (11.30 - 11.32) for the menu data to be used for
selecting an input.
Flow Stop
Force the 795X into a flow stopped state. Selection of the input is made using
menu data: <Flowstop status i/p>
Remote Print
Transmit a current report through a serial port that is configured for connection to a
printer. Selection of the input is made using menu data: < Print req sts i/p>
Maintenance-mode
Attempt change to maintenance-mode from the normal mode. Selection of the

input is made using menu data: < Maintenance sts i/p>
(To succeed, this function requires the 795X to be in a Flow Stop state)
In the <Health Check) menu there is a Status

Input sub-menu. It contains a menu data page
with a series of digits on the second display line.
a
Status in [1-16]
0010010000100000
Each digit indicates the present state of an

individual input.
b
c
Status Input #16

This Status Input
is presently active
(positive logic)

(1) <Configure>/<Status inputs> and (2) <Health check>/<Status Inputs>
Menu Data List:
* shows data that can be Live or Set
Status I/P
Channel
Data names
(as displayed)
Status I/P
Channel
Data names
(as displayed)
Status I/P
Channel
Input 1
DIN 1 logic level

DIN 1 mode level
Input 7
DIN 7 logic level

DIN 7 mode level
Input 13
DIN13 logic level

DIN13 mode level
Input 2
DIN 2 logic level

DIN 2 mode level
Input 8
DIN 8 logic level

DIN 8 mode level
Input 14
DIN14 logic level

DIN14 mode level
Input 3
DIN 3 logic level

DIN 3 mode level
Input 9
DIN 9 logic level

DIN 9 mode level
Input 15
DIN15 logic level

DIN15 mode level
Input 4
DIN 4 logic level

DIN 4 mode level
Input 10
DIN10 logic level

DIN10 mode level
Input 16
DIN16 logic level

DIN16 mode level
Input 5
DIN 5 logic level

DIN 5 mode level
Input 11
DIN11 logic level

DIN11 mode level
Input 6
DIN 6 logic level

DIN 6 mode level
Input 12
DIN12 logic level

DIN12 mode level
Page 11.8
Data names
(as displayed)
795X Op Man/DB
PULSE INPUTS (TURBINE/ULTRASONIC)

Features:
Pulse Input supported by a 7950 (Klippon)

Pulse input channel 1 (for a pulse flowmeter)
Pulse Inputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type)

Pulse input channel 2 (Not used at present)
Pulse Input supported by a 7951 (Klippon)

What To Do:
Use this page to configure the basic live input information (listed menu data) for the pulse input channel that is
being used by a supported volumetric flowmeter. Later reference pages, for configuring further flow details, will
expect the instrumentation to be already wired to the 795X and expect a pulse frequency value.
After a channel is configured, check on the pulse frequency that is being indicated by the frequency menu data.
Also, use the Health Check menu to view other diagnostic information such as the missing pulse counter.
(1) <Configure>/<Flowmeter details> and (2) <Health check>/<Flowmeter inputs>
Turbine Menu Data List:

Pulse Channel
(and fixed allocation)
Data names
(as displayed)
Pulse Channel
Data names
(as displayed)
Pulse Input 1
(Run #1 Meter)
Flowmeter frequency *
Flowmeter type
Meter error limit
Turbine pulses
Pulse Input 2
(Not used)
Not Applicable
Ultrasonic Menu Data List:
Pulse Channel
Data names
(as displayed)
Pulse Channel
Data names
(as displayed)
Pulse Input 1
(Run #1 Meter)
Flowmeter type
Meter error limit
Turbine pulses
Pulse Input 2
(Not used)
Not Applicable
General Notes:
A
The Set error limit (for missed pulses) is not applicable unless there are dual pulse trains being received by
the 795X.
The pulse frequency is calculated using the following equation:

Using:
F=
P
t
Where:
is the pulse frequency{Menu Data: <Flow meter frequency>}
is the number of accumulated pulses since time t
is the elapsed time (in seconds) since the last pulse count for this calculation.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.9
FLOW METERING
This page summarises all the flow metering measurements that are supported by the Gas Flow Computer.
Orifice Flow Metering
Differential Pressure (Single or Multiple D.P. Cell System).. Page

Plate Orifice System Calculations ( ISO 5167-1, AGA 3, or HART). Pages
V-Cone Orifice System Calculations (ISO 5167-1 or HART) Pages
Venturi Orifice System Calculations ( ISO 5167-1 or HART) Pages
Mass flow rate
Pages
Corrected Volume flow rate. Page
Base Volume flow rate. Page
Energy rate.Page
Totalling.. Page
11.13 or 11.14
11.13 to 11.22
11.13 to 11.22
11.13 to 11.22
11.13 to 11.15
11.15
11.35
11.63
11.40
Turbine Flow Metering

(Single or Dual Pulse Train. Uni-directional Flow)
Indicated Volume flow rate.. Page 11.26

Corrected Volume flow rate. Page 11.26
Mass flow ratePage 11.27
Base Volume flow rate. Page 11.35
Energy rate.Page 11.63
Totalling.. Page 11.40
Ultrasonic Flow Metering

(Single Pulse Train. Uni-directional and Bi-directional Flow)

Flow Velocity..Page 11.30
Base Volume flow rate. Page 11.35
Linear Flow Metering

(4-20mA Input, Uni-directional Flow)

Page 11.10
795X Op Man/DB
FLOW METERING
ORIFICE SYSTEM (SIMPLIFIED OVERVIEW)
mA Inputs
HART Inputs
Differential
Pressure
(mA or HART)
Mass Rate
Calculation
(AGA 3)
Mass Rate
Calculation
(ISO 5167)
B
Select
Qm
Corrected
Volume
Rate
Mass Rate
(HART)
Z
Qv
Zb
Base Volume
Rate
(Conversion)
Base Volume
Rate
(Base Density)
Qm
Qm
RD
Select
Base Volume
Rate
(Relative Dens.)
Qv
Qm
Energy
Rate
QE
Energy Cm
(ISO 6876)
Energy Cv/m
(AGA 5)
Energy
(Live)
Select
Cv
TURBINE SYSTEM (SIMPLIFIED OVERVIEW)

Z
Qv
Pulse
Inputs
Turbine
Frequency
Indicated
Volume
Rate
QIV Corrected Q
CV
Volume
Rate
B
Mass Rate
(HART or
Calculated)
Zb
B
Qm
Qm
RD
Base Volume
Rate
(Conversion)
Base Volume
Rate
(Base Density)
Select
Base Volume
Rate
(Relative Dens.)
QBv
Qm
Energy
Rate
QE
Energy Cm
(ISO 6876)
Energy Cv/m
(AGA 5)
Energy
(Live)
795X Op Man/DB
Select
Cv
Page 11.11
FLOW METERING
ULTRASONIC SYSTEM (SIMPLIFIED OVERVIEW)
Z
Base Volume
Rate
(Conversion)
Qv
Pulse
Train
Ultrasonic
Frequency
Indicated
Volume
Rate
QIV Corrected Q
CV
Volume
Rate
B
Mass Rate
(HART or
Calculated)
Zb
Base Volume
Rate
(Base Density)
Qm
Select
Base Volume
Rate
(Relative Dens.)
Qm
RD
Energy Cv/m
(AGA 5)
Energy
(Live)
Base Volume
Rate
(Water Correct.)
Qm
Energy Cm
(ISO 6876)
QBv
Qm
Select
Energy
Rate
QE
Cv
LINEAR FLOW SYSTEM (SIMPLIFIED OVERVIEW)

Z
Qv
mA
Input
Indicated
Volume
Rate
QIV Corrected Q
CV
Volume
Rate
B
Mass Rate
(HART or
Calculated)
Zb
B
Qm
Qm
RD
Base Volume
Rate
(Conversion)
Base Volume
Rate
(Base Density)
Select
Base Volume
Rate
(Relative Dens.)
QBv
Qm
Energy
Rate
QE
Energy Cm
(ISO 6876)
Energy Cv/m
(AGA 5)
Energy
(Live)
Page 11.12
Select
Cv
795X Op Man/DB
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (ISO 5167-1)

Measurements:
Differential Pressure across the flowmeter (direct from one prime selected transmitter )
Mass Rate at the metering-run (direct from a HART networked transmitter or calculated by 795X )
Corrected Volume flow rate (Turn to page 11.15)
To
22
XX
Index for use with listed data
41
t
P
Range Details
1
mA Inputs
HART Inputs
Initial
Sources
Selection
%P
D.P.
P
Calculations
(Scaling)
(HART) P
31
16
D.P. Cell
Config. &
Selection
15
P
11 12 13 14
18 19
20
40 42
To
Intermediate Results
HI
9 10
28 30
Orifice
Calculations
(Venturi)
21
Orifice
Select
22
t
P
31
FLOW
STOP
To
HART
Method
29
Orifice
Calculations
(Plate)
41
17
To
43
OR
Method
Selection
37 40 42
MASS
42 FLOW
RATE
AGA 3
Method
F/B
22
t
P
41
To
28
Orifice
Calculations
(V-Cone)
31
To
40

(1) <Configure>/<Flowmeter details>/<Orifice>, (2) <Health check>/<Flowmeter inputs>/<Orifice>
(3) <Configure>/<Flow rates>, (4) <Line density>, (5) <Meter pressure>, (6) <Meter temperature>
(7) <Health check>/<Analogue inputs> and (8) <Health check>/<HART inputs>
Menu Data List:
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Data name (as displayed)

Flowmeter
DP cell 1 input chl
Diff press HI 100%
Diff press HI 0%
Diff press med 100%
Diff press med 0%
Diff press LO 100%
Diff press LO 0%
Diff press config
Diff press hi switch
Diff press lo switch
Diff press cal error
Diff press cal time
DP deviation limit
DP input alarms
Diff press range
Diff press HI lmt
DP flow stop limit
Diff press FB type
Diff press FB value
Diff pressure value *
Orifice type
pipe diameter
Orifice diameter
Dynamic visc

Notes?
A
B
C
C
D
D
E
F
G
Index
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
t
P
-

Isentropic
Pipe exp coeff
Orif exp coeff
Orifice cal temp
Orif tapping code
Venturi type
Orif discharge coeff
Orif expandability
Vel of approach
Reynolds number
Corr pipe diameter
Corr orifice diam
Mass rate Beta
Pressure loss
Pressure ratio
Mass rate K factor
Prime density value *
Mass rate *
Orif mass flow calc
Meter temperature *
Meter pressure *
Rate flowstop action
Flow mode
Notes?
J
J
J
I
I
Notes are on page 11.16
Standards used: ISO 5167-1:1991 and ISO 5167-1:1991/Amd.1:1998(E). Refer to the Standard for details on any restrictions.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.13
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (AGA 3)

Measurements:
Differential Pressure across each flowmeter (direct from one prime selected transmitter )
Mass Rate at the metering-run (direct from a HART networked transmitter or calculated by 795X )
Corrected Volume flow rate at the metering-run (Turn to page 11.15)

XX
Index for use with listed data
Range Details
1
mA Inputs
HART Inputs
Initial
Sources
Selection
D.P.
P
Calculations
(Scaling)
%P
(HART) P
HART
Method
HI
9 10
16
D.P. Cell
Config. &
Selection
15
P
38 21
t
20
P
11 12 13 14
18 19
17
To
28
Orifice
Calculations
(Plate)
29
To
39
37
36
Kf
Mass Rate
Calculation
(AGA 3)
35
FLOW
STOP Intermediate Results
MASS
38 FLOW
RATE
ISO 5167
Method
F/B

(1) <Configure>/<Flowmeter details>/<Orifice>, (2) <Health check>/<Flowmeter inputs>/<Orifice>
(3) <Configure>/<Flow rates>, (4) <Line density>, (5) <Meter pressure>,
(6) <Health check>/<Analogue inputs> and (7) <Health check>/<HART inputs>
Menu Data List:
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
-

Flow meter
DP cell 1 input chl
Diff press HI 100%
Diff press HI 0%
Diff press med 100%
Diff press med 0%
Diff press LO 100%
Diff press LO 0%
Diff press config
Diff press hi switch
Diff press lo switch
Diff press cal error
Diff press cal time
DP deviation limit
DP input alarms
Diff press range
Diff press HI lmt
DP flow stop limit
Diff press FB type
Diff press FB value
Diff pressure value *
Flow mode

Notes?
A
B
C
C
D
D
E
F
G
Index
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
t
P
-

pipe diameter
Orifice diameter
Dynamic visc
Isentropic
Pipe exp coeff
Orif exp coeff
Orifice cal temp
Orif tapping code
Orif discharge coeff
Orif expandability
Vel of approach
Reynolds number
Corr pipe diameter
Corr orifice diam
Mass rate Beta
Mass rate K factor
Mass rate *
Orif mass flow calc
Meter temperature *
Meter pressure *
Rate flowstop actions
Notes?
J
J
J
Standard used: AGA report 3 (November 1992, Third edition). Refer to the Standard for details on any restrictions.
Page 11.14
795X Op Man/DB
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (HART)

Measurements:
Mass Rate at the metering-run (direct from a HART networked transmitter)

Corrected Volume flow rate (calculated by 795X)
AGA 3
Method
HART Inputs
Source
Selection
Method
Selection
ISO 5167
Method
HI
3
7
4
LO
MASS
RATE Qm
5
Corrected
Volume
(Calculation)
QIV
CORRECTED
VOLUME
RATE
F/B

(1) <Configure>/<Flow rate>
Menu Data List:
Index
1
2
3
Flow meter
Mass rate HART chl
Orif mass flow calc
Mass rate HI limit
4
5
6
Mass rate LO limit

Mass rate FB type
Mass rate FB value

Notes?
A
Index
7
8
9
B
-

Mass rate *
Corrected vol rate *
Prime Base Density *
Flow mode
Notes?
I
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.15
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (ISO 5167-1/AGA3/HART)

Notes: (for all previous Orifice Flow Metering pages)
A
(1) Mixing of HART networked transmitters and mA-type field transmitters (for DP measurements) is not
supported.
(2) All mA-type transmitters providing DP must be wired to Analogue Inputs in series.
For example, if DP Cell #1 is wired up to the first Analogue Input then DP Cell #2 must then be wired to
the second Analogue Input.
(3) All HART networked transmitters providing DP must use HART Input menu data in series.
The following table shows all the cell configurations that are supported.
Configuration Code
Application
H=DP:1
H=DP:12
H=DP:1 L=DP:2
H=DP:12 L=DP:3
Cell #1 covers a high pressure range.

2 cells cover the same high pressure range.
Cell #1 covers the high pressure range. Cell #2 covers the low pressure range.
Cell #1 (Master) and Cell #2 (Check) cover the high pressure range.
Cell #3 covers the low pressure range.
Cell #1 (on high pressure range). Cell #2 (on medium pressure range).
Cell #3 (on low pressure range).
Cell #1 (Master) and Cell #2 (Check) cover the high pressure range.
Cell #3 (Master) and Cell #4 (Check) cover the low pressure range.
Cell #1 (Master), Cell #2 (Check) and Cell #3 (Check) on high pressure range.
Cell #4 (Master) and Cell #5 (Check) cover the low pressure range.
H=DP1 M=DP2 L=DP3

H=DP:12 L=DP:34
H=DP:1p23 L=DP:4p5
**
LO Switch: A low marker in terms of a percentage of the presently selected pressure range. This value is
used as the boundary at which the prime DP Cell switches down to another DP Cell with a range
that is more accurate.
HI Switch: A high marker in terms of a percentage of the presently selected pressure range. This value is
used as the boundary at which the prime DP Cell will switch up to a another DP Cell with a range
that is more accurate.
Optional feature: Calibration error (i.e. limit) Checks.
<Diff press cal error> is the alarm limit for the maximum difference in differential pressure measurements
between a selected (prime) DP Cell and the next suitable (prime) DP Cell. An alarm is raised if the limit is
exceeded for longer than a period as Set by < Diff press cal time>. (Not enabled when limit is Set to 0).
Deviation refers to difference in differential pressure measurements between Master (or Pay) DP Cell and
any Check DP Cells.
Automatic selection of a higher range DP Cell can cause a mA input failure alarm to be raised even though
the transmitter has not actually failed. The cause of this alarm is the mA signal from a lower range cell
exceeding 111% of the 20mA analogue input range as the cell continues to measure beyond its effective
range. This alarm condition remains until the lower range cell is re-selected.
<DP inputs alarm> gives the option of suppressing the alarm under this particular situation. By default, there
is no suppression.
Identifies the range of the selected (prime) DP Cell. ( Read-only data value).
The Reynolds Number calculation is iterative and requires a previous value for the Mass Rate . This is why
the Mass Rate is shown by an Orifice calculation block. ( See listed equations on pages 11. 18 to 11.22)
The <Flow mode> page, within the INFORMATION key menu, shows if the Flow Computer considers there
to be either normal flow or zero flow in the meter-run pipe.
Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as < DP flow stop limit>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
therefore halt flow totals even when there is negligible flow. < Flow mode> will show Flow stopped.
However, negligible flow rate values may still be displayed if enabled by the < Rate flowstop actions>
menu data.
**
In the case of an Orifice System, the D.P. value must be greater than the setting of < DP flow stop limit>
for there to be normal flow. <Flow mode> will then show Flowing.
Alternative units, such as particles per million, may be shown on-screen.
Page 11.16
795X Op Man/DB
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (ISO 5167-1/AGA3/HART)

Notes continued
J
Support for the use of other Primary DP devices, such as a Dall Tube, is made possible with the ability to Set
values for the Expansibility factor, the Velocity of approach and the Discharge coefficient.
In the case of a Dall Tube, a Reynolds Number Correction value must be combined with one of those Set
values if it is not 1.00.
For this software feature, these particular values can only be Set by configuring with the Flow Meter Wizard.
By default, they are all calculated that can not be changed from within the 795X menu system.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.17
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (PLATE/VENTURI EQUATIONS)

The equations that follow are common to both ISO 5167-1:1991, ISO 5167-1:1991/Amd:1998 and AGA 3 standards
unless otherwise stated. Refer to the appropriate Standard for information on any restrictions not listed here.
Note: Support for the use of other Primary DP devices, such as a Dall Tube, is made possible with the ability to
Set values for the Expansibility factor, the Velocity of approach and the Discharge coefficient.
In the case of a Dall Tube, a Reynolds Number Correction value must be combined with one of those Set
values if it is not 1.00.
For this software feature, these particular values can only be Set by configuring with the Flow Meter
Wizard. By default, they are all calculated (See Equations OR#6, OR#7 and OR#8) and that can not be
changed from within the 795X menu system.
Equation OR#1: Mass flow rate

The Mass flow rate is related to differential pressure by the following equation:
Using:
qm = K *
* * 3600
1000
Where: q m = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)................................ {Menu Data: <Mass rate>}
= Mass flow rate K factor..................................... {See Equation OR#2}
= Differential pressure measurement (in mbar).....{Menu Data: <Diff pressure value>}
= Density of measured gas................................... {Menu Data: <Prime density value>}
Equation OR#2: Mass flow rate K factor

Using:
Where: K
= Cd * E * * d 2 * N1
= Mass flow rate K factor..................................... {Menu Data: <Mass rate k factor>}
Cd
= Discharge coefficient.......................................... {See equations OR#9a to #9d}
= Velocity of approach factor................................. {See Equation OR#7}
= Expansibility factor............................................. {See Equation OR#6a (Plate), #6b (Venturi) }
= Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion.......... {See Equation OR#3a}
2
* 10 5 * 1000 = 0.0003512407367 ... {Actual constant used}
4
N1 = *
= 3.141592654...................................................... {Actual constant used}
Equation OR#3: Correction for area expansion of the orifice and pipe
Using:
Where: d
Page 11.18
= d * 1 + t t c ) * Eo * 10 6 ... #3a
= Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion.......... {Menu Data: <Corr orifice diam>}
= Orifice diameter at calibration temperature tc.. {Menu Data: <Orifice diameter}
= Temperature at the metering-run....................... {Menu Data: <Meter temperature>}
tc
= Orifice calibration temperature........................... {Menu Data: <Orifice cal temp>}
Eo
= Orifice expansion coefficient.............................. {Menu Data: <Orif exp coeff>
795X Op Man/DB
Using:
D = D * 1 + (t t c ) * E P * 10 6 .. #3b
Where:
= Pipe diameter, corrected for expansion............. {Menu Data: <Corr pipe diameter>}
= Pipe diameter at calibration temperature toc..... {Menu Data: <Pipe diameter>}
= Temperature at the metering-run....................... {Menu Data: <Meter temperature>}
tc
= Orifice plate calibration temperature.................. {Menu Data: <Orifice cal temp>}
EP
= Pipe expansion coefficient................................. {Menu Data: <Pipe exp coeff>}
Equation OR#4: Diameter ratio

d
D
Uses:
Where:
= Beta ratio (no units). {Menu Data: <Mass rate Beta>}
= Orifice diameter, corrected for expansion....... {Menu Data: <Corr orifice diam>}
= Pipe diameter, corrected for expansion...........{Menu Data: <Corr pipe diameter>}
Equation OR#5a: Expansibility factor (Plate)
))
P * 10 3
K *P
Using:
= 1 0.41 + 0.35 * 4 *
Where:
= Gas expansibility factor (no units)............ {Menu Data: <Orif expandability>}
= Beta ratio (no units)................ {See Equation OR#4}
= Differential pressure (in mbar)......... ..... {Menu Data: <Diff pressure value>}
= Operating pressure............................... {Menu Data: <Meter pressure>}
= Isentropic exponent.......................... .... {Menu Data: <Isentropic>}
Equation OR#5b: Expansibility factor (Venturi)

2
k
K * PR
=
K 1

1 4
*
2

1 4 * PR K

K 1 2

K
* 1 PR
1 PR

Using:
Where:
= Expansibility factor........................................ {Menu Data: <Orif expandability>}
= Diameter ratio............................................... {See Equation OR#4}
= Isentropic exponent...................................... {Menu Data: <Isentropic>}
PR
= Pressure ratio............................................... {Menu Data: <Pressure ratio>

=
P1
P2
.............................................................. {Note: Value must be 0.75)
P1
= Pressure at up-stream tapping (in Bar)........ {No Menu Data}

= P + PLoss
P2
= Pressure at down-stream tapping (in Bar).... {No Menu Data}

= P1 P
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.19

And:
= Pressure measured at the metering-run....... {Menu Data: <Meter pressure>}
PLoss = Pressure loss (in Bar)................................... {Menu Data: <Pressure loss>}
. (125
. * )
= P * 13
= Differential Pressure..................................... {Menu Data: <Diff pressure value>}
Equation OR#6: Velocity of approach factor
= 1 4
1
2
Using:
Where:
= Velocity of approach factor............................. {Menu Data: <Vel of approach>}
= Diameter ratio................................................. {See Equation OR#4}
Equation OR#7a: (ISO 5167) Reynolds number for discharge coefficient

Using:
R ed
q 4 * 10 6
= m *
3600 * D *
Where:
R ed
= Reynolds number......................................... {Menu Data: <Reynolds number>}
qm
= Mass flow rate.............................................. {See Equation OR#1}
= 3.141592654................................................ {Actual constant used}
= Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)...... {See Equation OR#4}
= Dynamic viscosity......................................... {Menu Data: <Dynamic visc>}
Equation OR#7b: (AGA3) Reynolds number for discharge coefficient

Using:
R ed
q 4 * 10 6
= N 2 * m *
3600 D *
Where:
R ed
= Reynolds number......................................... {Menu Data: <Reynolds number>}
N2
= 1273239.5.................................................... {Actual constant used}
qm
= Mass flow rate.............................................. {See Equation OR#1}
= Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)...... {See Equation OR#4}
= Dynamic viscosity......................................... {Menu Data: <Dynamic visc}
Equation OR#8a: STOLZ (ISO 5167-1:1991) Discharge coefficient for Orifice Plate
Basic Equation Component
Use:
10 6
R ed
0.75
C1 = 0.5959 + 0.312 * 2.1 0.184 * 8 + 0.0029 * 2.5 *
Where: C1
= Basic equation component

R ed = Reynolds number............................................ {See Equation OR#8a}
Page 11.20
795X Op Man/DB

For Corner Tappings only
Use:
= C1
Where: C
= Discharge coefficient....................................... {Menu Data: <Orif discharge coeff>}
C1 = The basic equation component....................... {See above}
For D and D/2 tappings only

Use:
)(
= C 1 + 0.039 * 4 * 1 4
Where: C
) (0.015839 * )
1
= Discharge coefficient.................................... {Menu Data: <Orif discharge coeff>}
C1 = Basic equation component........................... {See above}
For Flange Tappings where the pipe diameter (corrected for expansion) is larger than 58.62mm
Use:
Where: C
)(
= C1 + 0.039 * 4 * 1 4
0.85598
* 3
= Discharge coefficient.................................... {Menu Data: <Orif discharge coeff>}
C1
= Basic equation component........................... {See above}
= Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion).......{See Equation OR#4}
For Flange Tappings where the pipe diameter (corrected for expansion) is less than or equal to
58.62mm
Use:
2.286
C = C1 +
* 4 * 1 4
D
0.85598
* 3
Where: C = Discharge coefficient....................................... {Menu Data: <Orif discharge coeff}
C1 = Basic equation component.............................. {See above}

= Diameter ratio.................................................. {See Equation OR#5}
D = Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)......... {See Equation OR#4}
Equation OR#9b: (ISO 5167-1:1991) Discharge coefficient for a Venturi tube
C = 0.984 when there is an as cast convergent section where :100mm D 800mm
0.3 0.75
2 * 10 Red 2 * 10
5
C= 0.995 when there is a machined convergent section where :50mm D 250mm

0.4 0.75
2 * 10 Red 1 * 10
5
C=0.985 when there is a rough welded sheet iron convergent section where :200mm D 1200mm
0.4 0.7
2 * 10 Red 1 * 10
5
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.21

Equation OR#8c: (AGA3) Discharge coefficient for an Orifice Plate
Refer to part 4 of AGA report 3 (November 1992, Third edition) for details of the Reader-Harris/Gallagher
equation.
Equation OR#8d: (ISO 5167-1:1998) Discharge coefficient for an Orifice Plate
Terms and Menu Data:
Cd
= Discharge coefficient{Menu Data: <Orif discharge coeff>}
= Pipe diameter (corrected for expansion)......... {See Equation OR#4}
R ed
= Reynolds number............................................ {See Equation OR#8a}
Refer to section 8.3.2.1 of the ISO 5167-1:1991(E)/Amd.1:1998(E) Standard for details of the
Reader-Harris/Gallagher equation.
Page 11.22
795X Op Man/DB
ORIFICE FLOW METERING (V-CONE EQUATIONS)

Listed equations OVC#1 to OVC#5 are formulated from the standard flow equations as published by McCrometer,
the V-Cone manufacturer. The remaining equations (OVC#6 to OVC#9) are provided for completeness and comply
with the ISO 5167-1:1991 and ISO 5167-1:1991/Amd:1998 Standards.
Equation OVC#1: Mass Flow Rate
The mass flow rate is related to differential pressure by the following equation:
Using:
Qm =
*
4
2
2
D *
* P * Cf * * 3600 * Fa
2 * gc * *
1 4
Where: Qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour)............................. {Menu Data: <Mass rate>}
gc
= Dimensional conversion constant = 1...... {Actual constant used}
= Density of measured gas (in Kg/m )................... {Menu Data: <Prime density value>}
= Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrected.... {Menu Data: <Pipe diameter>}
= Meter beta (diameter) ratio (no units)..... {See Equation OVC#4b}
= Differential pressure measurement (in Pa)..... {Menu Data: <Diff pressure value>}
Cf
= Flow coefficient of the meter (no units) .... {Menu Data: <Orif discharge coeff>}
= Gas expansibility factor (no units)...................... {See Equation OVC#6}
Fa
= Meter thermal expansion factor.....{See Equation OVC#2}
Note: The flow coefficient is not calculated when using a V-Cone meter. It is necessary to locate Cf on the
calibration certificate and then Set a value.
Equation OVC#2: Thermal expansion factor (Fa)
If the material expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are the same
Use:
Fa
Where: Fa
= 1 + 2 * PE * (t 528) ... #2a

= Meter thermal expansion factor.....{No Menu Data}
PE = Coefficient for thermal expansion per degree Rankine . {No Menu Data}
t
= Operating temperature (in degrees Rankine). {Menu Data: <Meter temperature>}
If the material expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are not the same
2
Use:
Fa
Where: Fa
1
4 2
(D * ) * (1 ) .... #2b
=
(1 ) (D * )
2
1
4 2
= Meter thermal expansion factor.....{No Menu Data}
= Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion ... {See Equation OVC#4a}
= Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrecte d.... {Menu Data: <Pipe diameter>}
= Beta ratio, corrected dimensions (no units). {Menu Data: <Mass rate Beta>}
= Beta ratio, uncorrected dimensions (no units).... {No Menu Data}
Equation OVC#3: Beta Ratio

1
Use:
Where:
795X Op Man/DB
d 2 2
= 1 2 ... #3a
D
= Meter beta ratio (no units)..... {Menu Data: <Mass rate Beta>}
= Cone outside diameter, corrected for expansion... {See Equation OVC#4b}
= Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion ... {See Equation OVC#4a}
Page 11.23

(Equation OVC#3: Beta Ratio)
1
Use:
d 2 2
= 1 2 .....#3b
D
Where:
= Meter beta ratio (no units)..... {Menu Data: <Mass rate Beta>}
= Cone outside diameter, uncorrected for expansion ... {Menu Data: <Orifice diameter>}
= Cone inner diameter, uncorrected for expansion ... {Menu Data: <Pipe diameter>}
Equation OVC#4: Corrections for thermal expansion of V-Cone

If the expansion coefficients of the pipe and the cone are not the same
Use:
Where: D
D
= D + D * * t t c ) ..... #4a
= Cone inner diameter, corrected for expansion ....{Menu Data: <Corr pipe diameter>}
= Cone inner diameter (in metres), uncorrected .... {Menu Data: <Pipe diameter>}
Use:
t
tc
= Calibration temperature (in degrees Rankine)... {Menu Data: <Orifice cal temp>}
= d + d * * (t t c ) .......#4b
= Operating temperature (in degrees Rankine)..{Menu Data: <Meter temperature>}
Where: d
d
= Cone outer diameter, corrected for expansion ... {Menu Data: <Corr orifice diam>}
= Cone outer diameter (in metres), uncorrected ....{Menu Data: <Orifice diameter>}
t
tc
= Operating temperature(in degrees Rankine)...{Menu Data: <Meter temperature>}

= Calibration temperature (in degrees Rankine)... {Menu Data: <Orifice cal temp>}
Equation OVC#5: Expansibility factor

2
K K
*
* R
K 1
K
1 * R * (1 R )

(1 ) * 1 R
4
K 1
K
Using:
Where:
= Expansibility factor....................................... {Menu Data: <Orif expandability>}
= Meter Beta ratio............................. {See Equation OVC#3b}
= Isentropic exponent...................................... {Menu Data: <Isentropic>}
And:
P
= 1
P
Where:
= Differential pressure (in Bar)..............{Menu Data: <Diff pressure value>}
= Meter pressure (in Bar Absolute)... {Menu Data: <Meter pressure>}
Page 11.24
795X Op Man/DB

Equation OVC#6: Velocity of approach
Use:
4 * QV
=
* D2
= Velocity of approach factor..{Menu Data:<Vel of approach>}
And:
QV
Q /
= m
3600
Where:
QV
= Volume rate (in m /second).{No Menu Data}
Where:
Qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour). {See Equation OVC#1}
= Density of measured gas (in Kg/m ).................... {Menu Data: <Prime density value>}
Equation OVC#7: Reynolds number
(D * E * )
Use:
Red =
Where:
Red = Reynolds number.. {Menu Data: <Reynolds number>}
= Velocity of approach factor..{See Equation OVC#6}
= Dynamic viscosity. {Menu Data: <Dynamic viscosity>}
Equation OVC#8: Pressure ratio

P2
P1
Use:
PR =
Where:
PR = Pressure ratio............................... ............... {Menu Data: <Pressure ratio>

P1
= Pressure at up-stream tapping (in Bar)... ........ {No Menu Data}
= P + PLoss * 10 3
P2
= Pressure at down-stream tapping (in Bar). ...... {No Menu Data}

= P1 P
And:
= Pressure measured at the metering-run .......... {Menu Data: <Meter pressure>}
PLoss = Pressure loss (in Bar).................................. {Menu Data: <Pressure loss>}
. (125
. * )
= P * 13
Equation OVC#9: Mass rate K factor
Qm
Using:
K =
(P * )
Where:
= Mass flow rate K factor.................................. {Menu Data: <Mass rate k factor>}
Qm = Mass flow rate (in Kg/hour).............................. {Menu Data: <Mass rate>}
795X Op Man/DB
= Differential pressure (in Bar)....... ...... {Menu Data: <Diff pressure value>}
= Density of measured gas (in Kg/m )............... {Menu Data: <Prime density value>}
Page 11.25
TURBINE FLOW METERING

Measurements Supported:
Indicated Volume flow rate (calculated by 795X) and Corrected Volume flow rate (calculated by 795X)
Mass rate (Turn to page 11.27)
Base Volume flow rate (Turn to page 11.35)
Totalling (Turn to page 11.40)
Calibration Certificate
High Limit
2
PULSE
1
FREQUENCY
Calibration
Certificate
25
Kf
54
K Factor
Calculation
(Conversion)
26
Indicated
Volume Rate
Calculation
3
Flow Stop
Threshold
Correction route
26
54
4
48
Indicated
Volume Rate
Calculation
5 27
tr Kt KP
46
Error %
Calculation
(Corrected)
49 50 51 52
47
t
P
QIV
Corrections for
Temperature
and Pressure
Effects
54
Corrected
Volume Rate
Calculation
CORRECTED
VOLUME
RATE
53
tr Kt KP
49 50 51 52
Conversion route
XX Index for use with listed menu data
QIV
t
P
Corrections for
Temperature
and Pressure
Effects
47
54
Corrected
Volume Rate
Calculation

(1) <Configure>/<Flowmeter details>, (2) <Health check>/<Flowmeter inputs>,
(3) <Configure>/<Flow rates>, (4) <Meter temperature> and (5) <Meter pressure>
Menu Data List:
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28

Flowmeter
Meter freq HI lmt
Meter flow stop
Correction method
Main err curve pts
Mtr curve freq 1
Meter K factor 1
Mtr curve freq 2
Meter K factor 2
Mtr curve freq 3
Meter K factor 3
Mtr curve freq 4
Meter K factor 4
Mtr curve freq 5
Meter K factor 5
Mtr curve freq 6
Meter K factor 6
Mtr curve freq 7
Meter K factor 7
Mtr curve freq 8
Meter K factor 8
Mtr curve freq 9
Meter K factor 9
Mtr curve freq 10
Meter K factor 10
K factor *
Mtr curve flowrate 1
Mtr error dev 1

Notes?
D
B
Index
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
t
52
P
53
54
-

Meter error 2
Meter error 3
Meter error 4
Meter error 5
Meter error 6
Meter error 7
Meter error 8
Meter error 9
Mtr error dev 10
Meter % error *
Indicated vol rate *
Meter correct select
Meter temp ref
Meter temp corr
Meter temperature *
Meter press corr
Meter pressure *
Flow mode
Notes?
C
C
See next page for notes.
Page 11.26
795X Op Man/DB

Measurement:
Mass Rate (from a HART networked transmitter or calculated by 795X )
CORRECTED
53 Qv
VOLUME RATE
PRIME DENSITY 55

Mass Rate
Calculation
Source
Selection
HART Inputs
Qm
56
58 59
Limits &
Fallback
Checks
Qm
MASS
62
RATE
(1) <Configure>/<Flowmeter details>,

(2) <Configure>/<Flow rates> and
(3) <Line density>
60 61
57
Menu Data List:

Index
53
55
56
57
58
59
Notes?
Flowmeter
Turb mass flow calc
Mass rate HART chl
Mass rate HI limit
Mass rate LO limit
Index
60
61
62
-
Notes?
Mass rate FB type

Mass rate FB value *
Mass rate *
Flow mode
C
C
A
A
Notes:
A
Keep both HI and LO values Set to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
Freq vs K factor option: (See Frequency Versus K-factor Referral description on this page)
This requires a fixed K-factor value and an error percentage value that is linearised from a programmed
flow versus error curve.
Flow vs % error option: (See Flow Versus Error Percentage Referral on page 11.29)
This requires a fixed error percentage value and a K-factor that is linearised from a programmed
frequency versus k-factor curve.
The <Flow mode> page, within the INFORMATION key menu, shows if the Flow Computer considers there
to be normal flow or zero flow in the meter-run pipe.
Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as < Meter flow stop>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
menu data.
In the case of an Turbine Flow Meter, the frequency value must be greater than the setting of
<Meter flow stop> for there to be normal flow. <Flow mode> will show Flowing.
Optional. Keep Set to 0 if this alarm limit check is not required.
Frequency Versus K-factor Referral

K Factor
(Pulse/m3)
Graphic shows a curve profile with 4 points out of a

possible 10 selected and set-up.
Lowest frequency on curve is point (F 1, Kf1). This

point corresponds to the Mtr curve freq 1 menu data
and the Meter K factor 1 menu data respectively.
Highest frequency on curve is point (F 4, Kf4). This

corresponds to the Mtr curve freq 4 menu data and
the Meter K factor 4 menu data respectively.
Point (FM, Kfm) corresponds to a live pulse frequency

and resulting K-factor.
Kf2
Kf3
Kf1
Kfm
Kf4
Pulse
Frequency
F1
F2
795X Op Man/DB
F3
Fm
F4
Page 11.27

Flow Versus Error Percentage Referral
Meters are supplied with a calibration certificate that describes the actual flow rates against percentage error in
readings by a test meter.
Example of Certificate Data:
3
Flow rate (m /h)

Error %
400
0.11
280
0.17
160
0.06
100
-0.24
The raw data on the certificate has to be turned into corrected values by the 795X. To do this, a single curve
profile must be set-up in the following way:
Correction method
Main err curve pts
Mtr error dev 1
Meter error 2
Meter error 3
Meter error 4
Raw value
Flow vs % error
4 curve points
100
-0.24
160
0.06
280
0.17
400
0.11
Please note that this is an example and that only

data from the calibration certificate of the flowmeter
should be entered into the 795X.
Corrected values are not displayed by the 795X but the calculations used are as follows:
V * Ea
Vt = a
+ Va
100
Et =
(Vt *Va ) * 100

Va
Where:
Vt
Corrected volume from test flowmeter
Va
Actual volume (e.g. 100 from the above data)
Et
Corrected percentage error in test turbine reading
Ea
Actual error in Vt reading (e.g. -0.24 from the above data)
The 795X calculations (Vt and Ve) use the Set curve profile data to get a modified curve:
3
Flow rate (m /h)

Error %
400.44
0.1098
280.476
0.1697
160.096
0.05996
99.76
-0.241
Example: Modified curve with corrected values

With a Live (or Set) indicated flow rate, an error percentage can be interpolated from the modified curve. The
error percentage is then used to adjust the Corrected Volume flow rate value.
Page 11.28
795X Op Man/DB
TURBINE FLOW METERING (EQUATIONS)

The 795X can perform the following calculations for Turbine Flow Metering:
Equation TU#1: Indicated Volume Flow Rate (un-corrected)
Using:
VU
f
=
* 3600
Kf
Where:
VU
= Indicated Volume rate per hour (un-corrected)..... {Menu Data: <Indicated vol rate>}
= Flow meter frequency (pulses per second)........... {Menu Data: <Flow meter frequency>}
Kf
= K- factor (pulses per m )..................................... {Menu Data: <K factor>}
Equation TU#2: Corrections for turbine error deviation

(i.e. Indicated volume flow rate corrected for a turbine error deviation)
K ed
100
Using:
VC1 = VU +
Where:
VC1 = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m /hour).................... {Menu Data: <Corrected vol rate>}
VU
= Indicated volume flow rate per hour (un-corrected).... {See Equation TU#1}
K ed = Turbine error deviation result...................................... {Menu Data: <Meter % error>}
Equation TU#3: Corrections for temperature effects

(i.e. Indicated volume flow rate corrected for a turbine error deviation and temperature effects)
Using:
VC 2 = VC 1 * (1 + K t * (t t r ))
Where:
VC 2 = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m /hour).................... {Menu Data: <Corrected vol rate>}
VC1 = Corrected volume flow rate (in m /hour)..................... {See Equation TU#2}
Kt
= Turbine temperature correction factor........................ {Menu Data: <Meter temp Corr>}
t
= Meter temperature........................................................
temperature>}
tr
{Menu Data: <Meter
= Turbine reference temperature................................... {Menu Data: <Meter temp ref>}
Equation TU#4: Corrections for pressure effects

(i.e. Indicated volume flow rate corrected for all effects)
Using:
VC 3 = VC 2 * 1 + K p * (P 101325
.
)
Where:
VC 3 = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m 3/hour).................... {Menu Data: <Corrected vol rate>}
VC 2 = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m 3/hour).................... {See Equation TU#3}
K p = Turbine pressure correction factor.............................. {Menu Data: <Meter press corr>}

P
795X Op Man/DB
= Meter pressure.............................................................. {Menu Data: <Meter pressure>}
Page 11.29
ULTRASONIC FLOW METERING

Uni-Directional/Bi-directional Flow Measurements:
Indicated Volume flow rate (calculated by 795X) and Corrected Volume flow rate (calculated by 795X)
Flow Velocity (calculated by 795X)
Conversion Factor (calculated by 795X)
Mass rate (See facing page)

6
Flow
Direction
(Input)
Digital Inputs
High
Limit
PULSE TRAIN A
Pulse
Count
fA
2
PULSE
COUNT
3
5
Forward Signal (by Digital Output)

Reverse Signal (by Digital Output)
E
Kf
10
Flow
Direction
(Outputs)
23
Ultrasonic
Totalising
hspool
MF
20
Indicated +Q
IV
Volume Rate
11
Calculation -QIV
Flow Stop
Threshold
12 13 14 15
Ultrasonic
Meter Factor
Calculation
QIV
23
Corrected QCV
Volume Rate
21
Calculation
18 19
Ultrasonic
Totalising
16 17
t Pr
Intermediate r
Results
QIV 11
QCV 21
D
14
Flow
Velocity
Calculation
22
Conversion
Factor
|QCV - QIV|
24

(1) <Configure>/<Flowmeter details>/<Ultrasonic>,
(2) <Health check>/<Flowmeter inputs>/<Ultrasonic> and
(3) <Flow rates>
Menu Data List:
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Flow meter
Flow meter type
Turbine pulses
Flow meter frequency *
Meter freq HI lmt
Meter flow stop
Flow direction Din
Flow direction
Forward flow Dout
Reverse flow Dout
K factor *
Main spl expans coef
Main spl elast coef

Notes?
E
B
C
C
A
D
Index
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
t
P
24
-

Main spool Inner dia
Main spl wall thkn
Main spl cal temp.
Main spl cal press
Thermal expansion *
Pressure expansion *
Meter factor *
Flow velocity *
Meter temperature *
Meter pressure *
Conversion factor
Flow mode
Notes?
D
D
E
F
E
Notes: (E to F are on page 11.31)

A
This is not linearised from a curve profile. A value must be Set.
Identifies a Status Input to be monitored for a reverse flow signal. An active signal (assuming a positive
logic configuration) will automatically enable a negative flow value and an immediate switch-over from
normal totals to a different set of totals.
Optional. Identifies a Status Output to signal an external system.
Value will be negative when there is reversed flow.
Page 11.30
795X Op Man/DB
ULTRASONIC FLOW METERING

Notes continued ...
E
The <Flow mode> page, within the INFORMATION (i key) menu, shows if the Flow Computer considers
there to be normal flow or zero flow in the meter-run pipe.
Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as < Meter flow stop>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
menu data.
In the case of an Ultrasonic Flow Meter, the frequency value must be greater than the setting of
<Meter flow stop> for there to be normal flow. <Flow mode> will show Flowing.
The value line will show *** ERROR *** when the Indicate Volume flow rate and the Corrected Volume flow
rate are both 0.
Mass Rate (from a HART networked transmitter or calculated by 795X )
CORRECTED
21 Qv
VOLUME RATE
PRIME DENSITY 25
HART Inputs
Mass Rate
Calculation
Qm
27
23
Method
Selection
Source
Selection
Qm
28 29
Limits &
Fallback
Checks
32
MASS
RATE
30 31
26

(1) <Configure>/<Flowmeter details>/<Ultrasonic details>, (2) <Configure>/<Flow rates> and
(3) <Line density>
Menu Data List:
Index
21
23
25
26
27

Flow meter
Mass rate HART chl
Turb mass flow calc

Notes?
B
B
Index
28
29
30
31
32

Mass rate HI limit
Mass rate LO limit
Mass rate FB type
Mass rate FB value *
Mass rate *
Notes?
A
A
Notes:
A
Keep both HI and LO values Set to 0 if this (alarm) limit checking is not required.
(1) Value will be negative when there is reversed flow.

(2) Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as < Meter flow stop>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
therefore halt flow totals even when there is negligible flow. However, negligible flow rate values may still
be displayed if enabled by the <Rate flowstop actions> menu data.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.31
ULTRASONIC FLOW METERING (EQUATIONS)

The 795X can perform the following calculations for Ultrasonic Flow Metering:
Equation US#1: Indicated volume flow rate
Note: This flow rate is also known as the Gross (un-corrected) volume flow rate.
Using:
f
QIV = * 3600
K
Where:
QIV = Indicated Volume flow rate (m per hour)............. {Menu Data: <Indicated vol rate>}
= Ultrasonic frequency (pulses per second)............. {Menu Data: <Flow meter frequency>}
Kf
= K factor (pulses per m )....................................... {Menu Data: <K factor>}
Equation US#2: Meter factor
) (
Using:
MF = 1 + 3 * CTVspool + 1 + 3 * CPVspool
Where:
MF = The Meter Factor................................................. {Menu Data: <Meter factor>}

CTVspool = Thermal expansion of spool piece................ {Menu Data: <Thermal expansion>}
CPVspool = Pressure expansion of spool piece......... ......{Menu Data: <Pressure expansion>}
And:
CTVspool = * (t t r )
Where:
= Expansion coefficient............................................ {Menu Data: <Main spl expan coef>}
t
= Meter temperature (in C)........................................
temperature>}
tr
{Menu Data: <Meter
= Calibration temperature of spool piece (in C)...... {Menu Data: <Main spl cal temp>}
And:
D
CPVspool = (P Pr ) *
2 * E * hspool
Where:
= Internal diameter of spool piece (in mm)............ {Menu Data: <Internal diameter>}
= Elasticity coefficient............................................ {Menu Data: <Elasticity coeff.>}
hspool = Wall thickness of spool piece (in mm)............... {Menu Data: <Main spl wall thkn>}
= Meter pressure (in Bar Absolute).........................
Pr
= Calibration pressure of spool piece (in BarA)..... {Menu Data: <Main spl cal press>}
{Menu Data: <Meter pressure>}
Equation US#3: Corrected Volume flow rate

Note: This flow rate is also known simply as the Volume flow rate.
Using:
QCV = (QIV * MF * 24)
Where:
QCV = Corrected Volume flow rate (in m /day)................ {Menu Data: <Corrected vol rate>}
QIV = Indicated volume flow rate per hour................ ...... {See Equation US#1}
MF = The Meter Factor................................................. {See equation US#2}
Equation US#4: Flow velocity

Using:
Where:
QCV
* D * 0.25 * 10 6
= Flow velocity (in m/s)............................................ {Menu Data: <Flow velocity>}
2
QCV = Corrected Volume flow rate.................................. {See Equation US#3}
Page 11.32
= Internal diameter of spool piece (in mm).............. {Menu Data: <Main spool inner dia>}
= 3.141592654......................................................... {Actual constant used}
795X Op Man/DB
LINEAR FLOW METERING

Measurements:
Indicated Volume flow rate (direct from a Linear Flowmeter)
Corrected Volume flow rate (calculated by 795X)
Mass rate (direct from a HART networked transmitter or calculated by 795X )
XX
Index for use with list

of associated data
Optional
Alarm Limits
0% 100%
1
(Live % values)
Volume
Calculation
(Scaling)
Live Input
Selection
mA Inputs
Fallback &
Limits Check
7
Calibration
Curve Profile
LINEAR
FLOW
9
INDICATED
VOLUME
RATE
11
10
Flow Stop
Threshold
12 13
32
Error
Deviation
Calculation
% Error
33
CORRECTED
VOLUME
RATE
Corrected
Volume
To Totalising
34
Calculation
To Totalising
Optional
Alarm Limits
36
HART Input 1
:
: :
HART Input N
38
Live Input
Selection
Fallback &
Limits Check
40
CORRECTED
VOLUME RATE 34
METER RUN
DENSITY
35
39
Mass Rate
Calculation
41
37
Mass Rate
Source
Selection
MASS
RATE
42
To Totalling
Limits
Check
38 39
Optional
Alarm Limits

(1) <Configure>/<Flowmeter details>, (2) <Configure>/<Flow rates>, (3) <Line density>,
(4) <Flow rates>, (5) <Health check>/<Analogue inputs> and (6) <Health check>/<HART inputs>
Menu Data List:
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
:
31
32
33

Flow meter
Linear flow i/p chl*
Linear flow @ 0%
Linear flow @ 100%
Linear flow HI limit
Linear flow LO limit
Linear flow step lmt
Linear FB type
Linear FB value
Linear value*
Linear flow stop
Lin err curve pts
Lnr curve flowrate 1
Linear err dev 1
8 more pairs (flow rate, error)
Lnr curve flowrate10
Linear err dev 10
Linear % error*

Notes?
A
C
C
D
E
E
B
H
B
Index
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
-

Line density *
Mass rate HART chl
Linr mass flow calc
Mass rate HI limit
Mass rate lo limit
Mass rate FB type
Mass rate FB value
Mass rate *
Flow mode
Notes?
F
C
C
E
E
H
H
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.33
LINEAR FLOW METERING

Notes:
A
The number of mA-type Analogue Inputs varies between the different models of the 795X series. For further
information on supported connections, refer to Appendix C of this Operating Manual.
See Analogue Inputs on page 11. 7 for set-up details.
Scaled <Linear value> value is copied over to a live <Indicated vol rate> once every machine cycle.
Optional. Keep both high and low limits Set to 0 if these alarm limit checks are not required.
Optional. Keep Set to 0 if this alarm limit check is not required.
See Density reference pages (11.45 - 52) for configuration information.
This can be either be a Set value or a Live value that is linearised (each cycle) from a programmed
flow versus error curve. Curve profile values are normally obtained from the calibration certificate of the
flowmeter.
The <Flow mode> page, within the INFORMATION (i key) menu, shows if the Flow Computer considers
there to be normal flow or zero flow in the meter-run pipe.
Flow stop (zero flow) thresholds, such as < Linear flow stop>, are used to force live flow rates to 0 and
menu data.
In the case of a Linear Flow Meter, the flow value must be greater than the setting of < Linear flow stop>
for there to be normal flow. <Flow mode> will then show Flowing.
Page 11.34
795X Op Man/DB
BASE VOLUME RATE

The content of reference pages 11. 35 to 11.37 is common to all presently supported flow metering methods unless
otherwise stated.
1
QC
Diagram Note:
Calculating the Base
Volume rate with the
Water Correction method
is not applicable to Turbine,
Orifice or Linear Flow
Metering.
7 19
4
5
Zb
Qm
Base Volume
Flow Rate
Calculation
(Conversion Factor)
Qbv
10 19
RD
Base Volume
Flow Rate
Calculation
(Relative Density)
Qbv
High Limit
14
13
Calculation
Selection
16
BASE VOLUME
19
Qm
8
11
Qm
11
Base Volume
Flow Rate
Calculation
(Base Density)
15
Qbv
QCV
Correction
Factor
17
Low Limit
19
12
Base Volume
Flow Rate
Calculation
(Water Corrected)
Qbv

(1) <Configure>/<Flow rate>, (2) <Base density / SG>, (3) <Temperature>, (4) <Pressure> and
(5) <Flow rates>
Menu Data List:
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Flow meter
Meter temperature *
Meter pressure *
Cf Line compress *
Cf base compress *
Cf Z calc select
Base temp value
Base pressure value
Mass rate *
RD value *

Notes?
A
B
B
Index
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19

Base density of Air
Prime Base density *
Water content corr *
Base vol calc sel
Base vol rate HI lmt
Base vol rate LO lmt
Base volume rate *
Correction factor *
Notes?
D
E
E
F
G
A
C
Notes:
A
Refer to relevant Flow Metering reference pages for information on configuring to get Flow Rate values.
Orifice Flow (Page 11.13), Turbine Flow (Page 11.26), Ultrasonic Flow (Page 11.30), Linear Flow (Page 11.33)
Refer to the Density reference pages (11.45 - 52) for information on configuring to get compressibility values.
(A compressibility calculation is selected locally as the source for Z and Zb values)
Refer to the Energy value (ISO 6976) calculation to see how Relative Density is generated.
Refer to the Base Volume Rate Equation List (next page) for information on this.
Optional. Keep both HI and LO values Set to 0 if this (alarm) limit checking is not required.
Value will be negative when there is reversed flow. (Ultrasonic Flow Metering only)
By default, a 795X in a Flow Stop state will not show live flow rates with a forced zero value. This feature can
be changed with the <Rate flowstop actions> menu data.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.35
BASE VOLUME RATE (EQUATIONS)

Calculations that can be performed by the 795X are as follows:
Equation BVR#1: Base Volume flow rate (from a Conversion Factor)
Note: The conversion factor is the difference between values of QBV and QCV.
Using:
Q BV
P TB Z B
= Q CV *
*
*
PB t Z
Where:
Q BV
= Base Volume flow rate....................................... {Menu Data: <Base volume rate>}
Q CV
= Corrected volume flow rate................................ {Menu Data: <Corrected vol rate>}
= Metering-run pressure........................................ {Menu Data: <Meter pressure>}
PB
= Base pressure.................................................... {Menu Data: <Base pressure value>}
= Metering-run temperature.................................. {Menu Data: <Meter temperature>
tB
= Base temperature............................................... {Menu Data: <Base temp value>}
= Copy of line compressibility............................... {Menu Data: <Cf Line compress>}
ZB
= Copy of base compressibility............................. {Menu Data: <Cf base compress>}
Equation BVR#2: Base Volume flow rate (from Relative density)

Qm
RD
Using:
Q BV
Where:
Q BV
= Base Volume flow rate...................................... {Menu Data: <Base volume rate>}
Qm
= Mass flow rate................................................... {Menu Data: <Mass rate>}
RD
= Relative density................................................. {Menu Data: <RD value>}
Equation BVR#3: Base volume flow rate (from Base density)

qm
B
Using:
Q BV
Where:
Q BV
Qm
= Mass flow rate.................................................... {Menu Data: <Mass rate>}
= Base density...................................................... {Menu Data: <Prime Base Density>}
Equation BVR#4: Base volume flow rate (from water correction)

Note: This is for an Ultrasonic Flow Metering application.
Using:
q
VB = m * ucf * Fw
B
Where:
VB
qm
= Mass flow rate.................................................... {Menu Data: <Mass rate>}
= Base density...................................................... {Menu Data: <Prime Base Density>}
ucf
= 0.01 (to convert mass from Tonnes to Kg.......... {Actual value used}
Fw
= Water content correction factor.......................... {Menu Data: <Water content corr>}
Page 11.36
795X Op Man/DB
BASE VOLUME RATE (EQUATIONS)

Equation BVR#5: Water Correction Factor
Note: This is for an Ultrasonic Flow Metering application.
Using:
Fw
=
1 Xw
Where:
795X Op Man/DB
Wc
* 1
Wc s
Fw
= Water Content Correction Factor.......................... {Menu Data: <Water content corr>}
Xw
= Mole fraction of water at base conditions.............. {Menu Data: <Base mole frac water>}
Wc s
= Total water content at base conditions (in kg/m ). {Menu Data: <Base water content>}
Wc
= Actual water content (in kg/m )............................. {Menu Data: <Line water content>}
Page 11.37
ULTRASONIC TOTALISING
795X totalling features 3 basic types of incremental, roll-over totals:
Flow Total....................... 5 x Flow rate based totals.
Each total is enabled by configuring the associated flow rate.
Alarm Total.....
1 x Total of either a flow rate or missing pulses from a flowmeter.

This total increments only when there is an active alarm.
Error Pulse Total............. 1 x Total of missing pulses from a flowmeter.

This total is permanently enabled by 795X.
Ultrasonic flow metering also features 3 complete sets of flow rate based totals:
5 x Forward Flow Totals, 5 x Reverse Flow Totals and 5 x Net (difference) Flow Totals
A Status Input controlled parameter, < Flow Direction>, determines whether increments are calculated for either
the forward flow or the reverse flow
3 8 9
XX Index for use with
set of totals.
listed menu data
17
Net Flow is the difference between

forward flow and reverse flow.
Increments are always calculated for a
net flow total regardless of the
present flow direction.
Further separation of a total is made
by <Flow computer mode>:
FLOW
1
RATE
Flow
Direction
+/-
17
-
Totaliser
(Non-Maintenance)
7
8 11
8 10
Totaliser
(Non-Maintenance)
14
Totaliser
(Maintenance)

Ind vol total
Ind vol increment
Rev ind vol total
Rev ind vol inc
Net ind vol total
Net ind vol inc
Ind vol rollover
Ind vol tot inhibit
Rev ind vol inhibit
Net ind vol inhibit
Maint indicated vol
Maint ind vol inc
Maint rev ind. tot
Maint rev ind. inc

Corr volume total
Corr vol increment
Rev corr vol total
Rev corr vol inc
Net corr vol total
Net corr vol inc
Corr vol rollover
CorrVolTotal inhibit
Rev corr vol inhibit
Net corr vol inhibit
Maint CorrVol total
Maint corr vol inc
Maint rev corr tot
Maint rev corr inc
Pulse
Outputs
REVERSE
FLOW
TOTAL
Mode
18
19 21
Selection
Totaliser
(Non-Maintenance)
ALARM
TOTAL
20
24 27
17
Totaliser
(Non-Maintenance)
23
Totaliser
(Maintenance)
25
Mode
Menu data list:

Data name
(as displayed)
15
ERROR
PULSE 22
COUNT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
NET FLOW
TOTAL
16
<Configure>/<Totalisation>,
<Flow totals>,
<Health check>/<Totals>
INFORMATION (i-key) Menu
Data name
(as displayed)
FORWARD
FLOW
TOTAL
13
Menu Data List:
Index
12
Mode
Totaliser
(Maintenance)
Normal-mode (Main) total

Total is frozen whilst 795X is in
Maintenance-mode.
Maintenance-mode total
Normal-mode.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Totaliser
(Non-Maintenance)
ERROR
PULSE
TOTAL
26 17
Data name
(as displayed)
Mass rate *
Mass total
Mass increment
Rev mass total
Rev mass increment
Net mass total
Net mass increment
Mass rollover
Mass total inhibit
Rev mass inhibit
Net mass inhibit
Maint mass total
Maint mass inc
Maint rev mass tot
Maint rev mass inc
Data name
(as displayed)
Data name
(as displayed)
Base volume rate *

Base vol total
Base vol increment
Rev base vol total
Rev base vol inc
Net base vol total
Net base vol inc
Base vol rollover
BaseVolTotal inhibit
Rev base vol inhibit
Net base vol inhibit
Maint base vol total
Maint base vol inc
Maint rev base total
Maint rev base inc
Energy rate *
Energy total
Energy increment
Rev energy total
Rev energy increment
Net energy total
Net energy increment
Energy rollover
Energy total inhibit
Rev energy inhibit
Net energy inhibit
Maint energy total
Maint energy inc
Maint rev energy tot
Maint rev energy inc
Notes?
A
A
D
D
D
E
C
C
C
D
D
See next page for continuation of menu data list and notes.
Page 11.38
795X Op Man/DB
ULTRASONIC TOTALISING
Menu Data List:
Index
16
17
18
19
20
21

Flow Direction
Flow computer mode
Flow mode
Alarm total src ptr
Alarm increment
Alarm total
Alarm rollover

Notes?
F
F
C
D
C
E
Index
22
23
24
25
26
27
Notes?
B
B
D
B
D
E
Meter error pulses

Main meter err total
Main meter err inc
Maint main err total
Mnt main err inc
Main err rollover
Notes:
A
Indicated Volume measurement is not available in an Orifice system.
Missing (error) pulses are detectable when using a dual pulse train configuration.
Alarm condition totalling operates independently of all other totalling. A flow total can be frozen under alarm
conditions when enabled by the corresponding inhibit menu data.
An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is
added to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle.
(a) Orifice or Linear Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the actual cycle time. This value is the elapsed time
between a flow measurement. It is available for viewing from within the < Time> menu.
(b) Ultrasonic or Turbine Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the pulse sample time. It is the period of time that pulses
were accumulated for use in calculating the present value of the Indicated Volume flow rate. This time
value is not available for viewing within the menu system.
Editing an increment value has no effect.
By default, roll-over (to zero) limits are Set to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit
is sufficient for the metering application.
There are two Flow computer modes to be aware of:

1. Normal-mode
In this mode, a main total (e.g. Ind. Vol total) can increment while the corresponding maintenance total
(e.g. Maint indicated vol) is frozen.
2. Maintenance-mode
In this mode, a maintenance total can increment while the corresponding main total is frozen.
A mode change can only be performed when the 795X is in a flow stopped state. To find out how the 795X
can be placed into a flow stopped state, refer to the < Flow mode> notice on the earlier Ultrasonic Flow
Metering reference pages (11.30).
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.39
TOTALISING (Orifice/Turbine/Linear Flow)

795X totalling features 3 basic types of incremental, roll-over total:
Flow Total....................... 5 x Flow rate based totals.
Each total is enabled by configuring the associated flow rate.
Alarm Total.....
1 x Total of either a flow rate or missing pulses from a flowmeter.

This total increments only when there is an active alarm.
Error Pulse Total............. 1 x Total of missing pulses from a flowmeter.

This total is permanently enabled by 795X.
Further separation of each total is made by
<Flow computer mode>:

listed menu data
Normal-mode (Main) total

Maintenance-mode.
Maintenance-mode total
Normal-mode.
18
FLOW
1
RATE
Flow Totaliser
(Non-Maintenance)
Flow Totaliser
(Maintenance)
Mode
FLOW
TOTAL

(1) <Configure>/<Totalisation>,
(2) <Flow totals>,
(3) <Health check>/<Totals>
(4) INFORMATION (i-key) Menu
9 11
Selection
Totaliser
(Maintenance)
ALARM
TOTAL
10
Pulse
Outputs
14 15
ERROR
PULSE 12
COUNT
18
Totaliser
(Non-Maintenance)
13
Totaliser
(Maintenance)
16
Mode
ERROR
PULSE
TOTAL
17
Menu Data List:

Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Ind vol total
Ind vol increment
Ind vol rollover
Ind vol tot inhibit
Maint indicated vol
Maint ind vol inc
Index
8
9
10
11
12
13
Data name
(as displayed)
Data name
(as displayed)
Alarm total src ptr
Alarm increment
Alarm total
Alarm rollover
Meter error pulses
Main Meter Err total
Data name
(as displayed)
Corr volume total
Corr vol increment
Corr vol rollover
CorrVolTotal inhibit
Maint CorrVol total
Maint Corr Vol inc
Notes?
C
D
C
C, E
B
B
Index
14
15
16
17
18
-
Data name
(as displayed)
Mass rate *
Mass total
Mass increment
Mass rollover
Mass total inhibit
Maint mass total
Maint mass inc
Data name
(as displayed)
Base volume rate *
Base vol total
Base vol increment
Base vol rollover
BaseVolTotal inhibit
Maint base vol total
Maint base vol inc
Data name
(as displayed)
Main Meterturb Err inc
Main err rollover
Maint.Main Err total
Mnt.MainTurb Err Inc
Flow computer mode
Flow mode
Data name
(as displayed)
Notes?
Energy rate *
Energy total
Energy increment
Energy rollover
Energy total inhibit
Maint energy total
Maint energy inc
A
A
D
E
C
D
Notes?
D
E
D
F
F
Notes: (E to G are on the next page)

A
Indicated Volume measurement is not available in an Orifice system.
Missing (error) pulses are detectable when using a dual pulse train configuration.
Alarm condition totalling operates independently of all other totalling. A flow total can be frozen under alarm
conditions when enabled by the corresponding inhibit menu data.
Page 11.40
795X Op Man/DB
TOTALISING (Orifice/Turbine/Linear Flow)

Notes continued ....
D
An increment value is calculated by integrating a parameter value, e.g. flow rate, over time. The result is
added to a corresponding total once during every machine cycle.
(a) Orifice or Linear Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the actual cycle time. This value is the elapsed time
between a flow measurement. It is available for viewing from within the < Time> menu.
(b) Ultrasonic or Turbine Flow
The time element of the increment calculation is the pulse sample time. It is the period of time that pulses
were accumulated for use in calculating the present value of the Indicated Volume flow rate. This time
value is not available for viewing within the menu system.
Editing an increment value has no effect.
By default, roll-over (to zero) limits are Set to a large number. However, it is advisable to check that the limit is
sufficient for the metering application.
There are two Flow computer modes to be aware of:

1. Normal-mode
In this mode, a main total (e.g. Ind. Vol total) can increment while the corresponding maintenance total
(e.g. Maint indicated vol) is frozen.
2. Maintenance-mode
In this mode, a maintenance total can increment while the corresponding main total is frozen.
A mode change can only be performed when the 795X is in a flow stopped state. To find out how the 795X
can be placed into a flow stopped state, refer to the < Flow mode> notice on the earlier Flow Metering
reference pages.
Orifice Flow (Page 11.13), Turbine Flow (Page 11.26), Linear Flow (Page 11.33)
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.41
TEMPERATURE
Measurements: (Turn to page 11.43 for the Equation List)
Meter temperature...(Options: direct from selected mA Input, RTD/PT100 Input or HART Input )
Density Temperature A.... (Options: direct from selected mA Input, RTD/PT100 Input or HART Input )
Density Temperature B. (Options: direct from selected mA Input, RTD/PT100 Input or HART Input )
XX
Index for use with

list of associated data
HART or RTD/PT100
1
Analogue Inputs
HART Inputs
Source
Selection
mA
Temperature
Calculation
(Scaling)
4
Apply
Offset
Referral
Calc.
(Orifice)
Limits &
Fallback
Checks
10 11 12
13 TEMPERATURE

(1) <Configure>/<Transmitter detail>/<Temperature>, (2) <Temperature> and (3) <Pressure>
Menu Data List:
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
P
8
9
10
11
12
13

Meter temperature:
Density loop Temperature A:
Density loop Temperature B:
Meter temp input chl

Meter temp 100%
Meter temperature 0%
Meter temp offset
Meter temp position
KTe
Pressure loss
Meter pressure *
Meter temp FB type
Meter temp FB value
Meter temp HI limit
Meter temp LO limit
Meter temp step limit
Meter temperature *
Dens Temp A in chl

Dens temp A 100%
Dens temp A 0%
Dens temp A offset
Dens temp A position
KTe
Pressure loss
Meter pressure *
Dens tempA FB type
Dens tempA FB value
Dens temp A HI lmt
Dens temp A LO lmt
Dens tempA step lmt
DensityA temperature *
Dens Temp B in chl

Dens temp B 100%
Dens temp B 0%
Dens temp B offset
Dens temp B position
KTe
Pressure loss
Meter pressure *
Dens tempB FB type
Dens tempB FB value
Dens temp B HI lmt
Dens temp B LO lmt
Dens tempB step lmt
DensityB temperature *
Notes?
A
B
B
B
C
Notes:
A
Ensure that the basic configuration of the Live Inpu t Source has been completed.
mA:
Refer to the Analogue Input reference page (11. 7) for basic configuration details.
HART: Refer to Chapter 16 for basic configuration details.
Optional feature. Limits are for the prime selected value.

HI/LO: Keep both high and low limits Set to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
STEP: Keep the step limit Set to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
Orifice calculations expect temperature readings from the flow po int (orifice plate). Temperature transmitter
measurements have to be adjusted by a referral calculation when the flow point and the Temperature Field
Transmitter are not positioned together.
Page 11.42
795X Op Man/DB
TEMPERATURE
Equation List:
(Note: Meter temperature menu data is used here but could also use Density Temperature menu data)
Equation TE#1: Up-stream Temperature Referral (ORIFICE ONLY)
This calculation is applied when the temperature field transmitter is positioned a distance down-stream from
the orifice plate.
Using:
P
= Td *
P PL
Tu
KTe
= Temperature up-stream... {Menu Data: <Meter temperature>}
Where: Tu
Td
= Temperature from down-stream field transmitter {Menu Data: <Line temp at sensor>}
= Pressure at the flow point {Menu Data: <Meter pressure>}
PL
= Pressure loss {See Equation TE#3}
KTe
= Temperature referral exponent.. {Menu Data: <KTe>}
Equation TE#2: Down-stream Temperature Referral (ORIFICE ONLY)

This calculation is applied when the temperature field transmitter is positioned a distance up-stream from the
orifice plate.
Kte
Using:
Td
P
= Tu *
P PL
Where
Td
= Temperature down-stream. {Menu Data: <Meter temperature>}
Tu
= Temperature from up-stream field transmitter.{Menu Data: <Line temp at sensor>}
= Pressure at the flow point.. {Menu Data: <Meter pressure>}
PL
= Pressure loss across orifice.. {See Equation TE#3}
KTe = Temperature referral exponent.. {Menu Data: <KTe>}
Equation TE#3: Pressure Loss (ORIFICE ONLY)

Using
1 2
p
*
PL =
1 + 2 1000
Where: PL
= Pressure loss {Menu Data: <Pressure loss>}
p = Differential pressure {Menu Data: <Diff pressure value>}
795X Op Man/DB
= (C * E)
= Discharge coefficient.. {Menu Data: <Orif discharge coeff>}
= Velocity of approach {Menu Data: <Vel of approach>}
Od
= Orifice diameter {Menu Data: <Orifice diameter>}
Pd
= Pipe diameter {Menu Data: <pipe diameter>}
Od
{Menu Data: <Mass rate Beta>}
Pd
Page 11.43
PRESSURE
Measurements:
Meter pressure.... (Options: direct from selected mA Input or HART Input)

Atmospheric Pressure... (Options: direct from selected mA Input or HART Input)
XX
Index for use with

HART
1
Analogue Inputs
HART Inputs
Source
Selection
mA
Pressure
Calculation
(Scaling)
Limits &
Fallback
Checks
6
9 PRESSURE

(1) <Configure>/<Transmitter detail>/<Pressure> and (2) <Pressure>
Menu Data List:
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Meter pressure:
Atmospheric Pressure:
Meter press input chl

Meter pressure 100%
Meter pressure 0%
Meter press FB type
Meter press FB value
Meter press HI limit
Meter press LO limit
Meter press step limit
Meter pressure *
Atmos p input chl

Atmos p 100% value
Atmos p 0% value
Atmos p FB type
Atmos p FB value
Atmos p HI limit
Atmos p LO limit
Atmos p step limit
Atmos pressure *
Notes?
A
B
B
B
C
Notes:
A
Ensure that the basic configuration of the Live Input Source has been completed.
mA:
HART: Refer to Chapter 16 for basic configuration details.

HI/LO: Keep both high and low limits Set to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not requir ed.
The Pressure Field Transmitter must be near the flowmeter point.
Page 11.44
795X Op Man/DB
DENSITY
Measurements:
Gas Density A..... (direct from a Gas Density Transducer A)

Gas Density B..... (5 options: direct from Gas Density Transducer B, a mA input, a HART input, PTZ1 or PTZ2 )
Prime Density....... (Value from Gas density A, Gas density B, or Fallback function )
( S) 1
9 10 11
3
Density A
Calculation
12 13 14 15
16
17 18
VOS
Correction
Apply Density
Offset
Density
Referral
Temperature
Correction
DensityTemperature A
Line Pressure
Prime SG
21
( S) 20
( A)
19 GAS DENSITY A
DENSITY
COMPARISON
LIMIT
38
28 29 30
22 23 24 25
26 27
31 32 33 34
35
17 36
Density B
Calculation
Temperature
Correction
VOS
Correction
Apply Density
Offset
Density
Referral
B from PTZ1
B from PTZ2
DensityTemperature B
Line Pressure
Prime SG
43
44 45
Prime
Density
Selection
Limits &
Fallback
Check
49
48
PRIME
LINE
DENSITY
46 47
42
Density B
Selection
37 GAS DENSITY B
(B)
HART
mA inputs
HART inputs
Source
Selection

40 41
39
mA
Density B
Calculation
(Scaling)

(1) <Configure>/<Transducer details>, (2) <Configure>/<Transmitter detail>/<Line density B>,
(3) <Health check>/<Time period inputs>, (4) <Configure>/<Line density> and (5) <Density>
Menu Data List:
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Time period input 1*
Mtr densA glitch lmt
Transducer 1 K0
Transducer 1 K1
Transducer 1 K2
Transducer 1 correction
Transducer 1 K18
Transducer 1 K19
Mtr dens A VOS type
Density transducer 1
Transducer 1 K3
Transducer 1 K4
Transducer 1 K5
Transducer 1 K6
Line density 1 gamma
Density A offset
Density referral KDe
Transducer 1 position
Line Density A*

Notes?
Index
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38

Time period input 2*
Mtr densB glitch lmt
Transducer 2 K0
Transducer 2 K1
Transducer 2 K2
Transducer 2 correction
Transducer 2 K18
Transducer 2 K19
Mtr dens B VOS type
Density transducer 2
Transducer 2 K3
Transducer 2 K4
Transducer 2 K5
Transducer 2 K6
Line density 2 gamma
Density B offset
Transducer 2 position
Line Density B value*
Meter dens comp lmt
Notes?
B
Turn to next page for menu data list continuation and notes.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.45
DENSITY
Menu Data List:
Index
39
40
41
42
43
44
Notes?
Mtr dens B Ain/H src

Line density B 100%
Line density B 0%
Line dens calc sel
Line dens prime sel
Line density HI lmt
Index
45
46
47
48
49
A
C
D
Notes?
Line density LO lmt

Prime dens FB type
Prime dens FB val
Prime density value*
Line dens selected
Notes:
A
Refer to Density B/Compressibility reference pages (11. 49 - 11.52) for information about configuring
Density B to be calculated by PTZ1 or PTZ2 methods.
Time Period Input 1 is always associated with the Density Input 1 rear panel connection.
Similarly, Time Period Input 2 corresponds to the Density Input 2 rear panel connection.
(Refer to Chapter 2 for Density Input Connection information )
Selects the logic table for the prime density (channel) selection. (See Re-selection Procedure below)
High and low limits are for the selected prime density. Keep them Set to 0 if no limit checking is required.
Prime Density Re-Selection Procedure

In the event of a density input channel (e.g. Density A) failing or returning to a live state, the 795X will perform a
re-selection procedure for obtaining a live Prime Density value. This procedure involves evaluating a user-selected
logic decision table to determine where now to get the prime value.
The logic table below is shown in full for the Automatic A configuration option. (Density A is preferred)
Density A
out of limit
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
-
Page 11.46
Density B
out of limit
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
-
A#B (Comp)
out of limit
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
-
Density A
input failed
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Density B
input failed
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Prime Density
Selected
FB
A
B
B
A
A
B
A
FB
FB
B
B
B
FB
B
B
FB
A
FB
A
FB
A
FB
A
FB
FB
FB
FB
FB
FB
FB
FB
Key:
A = Density A,
B = Density B,
FB = Fallback
Notes:
1. The Automatic
B configuration
option uses the
same logic table
except Density
B is the
preferred
channel.
This preference
reverses the A
and B selection
in the last
column of this
table.
2. Out of limit
columns 1 and
2 are concerned
with the HI or
LO alarm limits.
3. Input failed
columns are
concerned with
Live inputs.
795X Op Man/DB
DENSITY
The logic table (on the right) is shown in full for the Density
A configuration option (Density B is not involved)
Density A
out of
limit
YES
YES
Density A
input
failed
YES
YES
Prime
Density
Selected
A
FB
FB
FB
Key: A = Density A, B = Density B, FB = Fallback
The logic table (on the right) is shown in full for the
Density B configuration option. (Density A is not
involved)
Density B
out of
limit
YES
YES
Density B
input
failed
YES
YES
Prime
Density
Selected
B
FB
FB
FB
Key: A = Density A, B = Density B, FB = Fallback
Density Equation List

The following calculations can be performed by the 795X :
Equation DE#1: Un-corrected density from a transducer

Using:
Where: D
= K 0 + (K1 * t ) + K 2 * t 2
= Density (un-corrected)......................... {Menu Data: Line Density A, Line Density B }
K0
= Calibration factor K 0 ............................ {Menu Data: Transducer A K0, Transducer B K0 }
K1
= Calibration factor K 1 ............................ {Menu Data: Transducer A K1, Transducer B K1 }
K2
= Calibration factor K 2............................. {Menu Data: Transducer A K2, Transducer A K0 }
= Periodic time from transducer ( s)...... {Menu Data: Time period input 1, Time period input 2}
Equation DE#2: Density from a transducer with the correction for temperature effects
Using:
Dt
Where: Dt
= D * [1 + K18 * (t t b )] + K19 * (t t b )
= Density (corrected)............................ {Menu Data: Line Density A, Line Density B }
= Density (un-corrected)....................... {See Equation DE#1}
K18 = Calibration factor K 18......................... {Menu Data: Transducer A K18, Transducer B K18}
K19 = Calibration factor K 19......................... {Menu Data: Transducer A K19, Transducer A K19}
= Density loop temperature ............... {Menu Data: DensityA temperature, DensityB temperature}
tb
= Temperature at base conditions........ {Menu Data: Base temp value}
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.47
DENSITY
Equation DE#3: Density from a transducer with the correction for the effect of V.O.S.
Using:
1+
= 2 *
1 +
Where:
2
K

* Cc
2
K
* C g
= Line Density..................................................... {Menu Data: Line Density A, Line Density B}
2 = Density (un-corrected or temp. corrected)....... {See Equation DE#1 or DE#2}

C c = V.O.S. of calibration gas (m/s)........................ {See Appendix F}
C g = V.O.S. of measured gas (m/s)......................... {See Appendix F}

K
= Density transducer VOS constant

4
= 2.10 * 10 for a 7812 Gas density transducer

4
= (1.35 * 10 for a 7810 Gas density transducer)
4
= Periodic time of density transducer output signal (in s)..............................................................

...................................................{Menu Data: Time period input 1, Time period input 2 }
Equation DE#4: Line Density (from PTZ1)

Using:
Z 0 * t b P * b
Pb Z * t
Where:
= Line Density.....{Menu Data: Line Density B value}
Z0
= Base compressibility.. {Menu Data: Line Density Zbase}
tb
= Temperature at base conditions (in Kelvin) {Menu Data: Base temp value}
Pb
= Pressure at base conditions. {Menu Data: Base pressure value}
= Meter pressure.. {Menu Data: Meter pressure}
= Meter temperature (in Kelvin). {Menu Data: Meter temperature}
= Density at base conditions {Menu Data: Prime Base Density}
= Line compressibility {Menu Data: Line Density Zline}
Equation DE#5: Line Density (from PTZ2)

M *P
R
Z *t *
100
Using:
Where:
= Line Density.....{Menu Data: Line Density B value}
= Molecular mass of measured gas {Menu Data: Meter mass of gas}
= Meter temperature (in Kelvin). {Menu Data: Meter temperature}
= Line compressibility {Menu Data: Line Density Zline}
= Universal gas constant.. {Menu Data: Gas const R J/mol.K}
Page 11.48
795X Op Man/DB
DENSITY B FROM PTZ1/COMPRESSIBILITY
Density B from PTZ1

This method allows Density B to be derived from a prime Base Density input. Corrections are applied for the
pressure, temperature, line compressibility (factor Z) and base compressibility of the gas.
1
tb Pb
3
t
P
Cv/m
CO2
2
4
5
M
Compressibility
Calculation
(S-GERG)
NO2
The following compressibility sources for PTZ1 are

supported by the 795X:
Z0
Z
SG
tb Pb
10 11
t
P
Cv/m*
CO2
Z Factor
Calculation
(NX19,
NX19mod,
NX19mod3h*)
NO2
Z0
1
Z
SG
Z
Source
Selection
Gas Composition
(Normalised)
14
to
B
Z0
Density B
Calculation
(PTZ1)
38
Z0
36
37
Gas Composition (Normalised)

% Nitrogen
% Carbon Dioxide
% Hydrogen Sulphide
% Water
% Helium
% Methane
% Ethane
% Argon
% Propane
% Neo-Butane
% Iso-Butane
tb Pb
1
t
P
GAS
Density B
12 13
tb Pb
43
35
Z Factor
Calculation
(AGA8)
t
P
S-GERG 1988
AGA-NX19 (Standard or surface fit)
AGA-NX19Mod
AGA-NX19Mod3h
AGA-8
Linear Interpolation
Z Factor
Calculation
(Linear)
Z0
Z
39 40 41 42
% Neo-Pentane
% Iso-Pentane
% Neo-Hexane
% Neo-Decane
% Neo-Heptane
% Neo-Octane
% Oxygen
% Carbon Monoxide
% Hydrogen
% C6+
% Neo-nonane

(1) <Configure>/<Compressibility>, (2) <Configure>/<Density>/<Line density B> and
(3) <Configure>/<Energy>
Menu Data List:
Index
t
tB
P
PB
SG
Cv/m
1
2
3
4

Meter temperature *
Base temp value
Meter pressure *
Base pressure value
SG prime value *
Energy value *
Meter PTZ1 calc sel
H2
SGERG selector
SGERG report errors

Notes?
A
E
Index
5
M, 6
ZB, 7
Z, 8
9
10
11
12
13
14

SGERG ref conditions
Meter mass of gas
Line density Zbase
Line density Zline
Mass of air
Tor temp offset
AGA-NX19 method
AGA8 Z uncertainty
AGA Gas comp. Tol.
Norm Methane
Notes?
D
C
B
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.49

Menu Data List:
Index
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Norm Ethane
Norm Propane
Norm n-Butane
Norm i-Butane
Norm n-Pentane
Norm i-Pentane
Norm n-Hexane
Norm n-Heptane
Norm n-Octane
Norm n-Nonane
Norm n-Decane
Norm C6+
Norm H2S
Norm water
Norm Helium

Notes?
Index
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
30
31
32
33
NO2, 34
CO2, 35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
rB

Norm Oxygen
Norm CO
Norm Hydrogen
Norm Argon
Norm Nitrogen
Norm CO2
AGA8 Z base value *
AGA8 Z value *
AGA8 M value *
Linear Z K10
Linear Z K11
Linear Z K12
Linear Z K13
Line density B value *
Notes?
F
F
F
F
F, G
F, G
Notes:
A
See Energy Measurement reference pages for configuration information.
This menu data is not applicable to AGA-NX19mod and AGA-NX19mod3h calculations.
This menu data is applicable to the AGA-NX19mod3h calculation.
Molecular weight of measured gas. This is used when deriving Density B from PTZ2.
Mole percentage of Hydrogen in measured gas.

F The normalisation of all raw gas components can be performed on-demand (by manipulating menu data)
or automatically (if using a Chromatograph). Refer to Chapter 7 for information on Chromatograph support.
Raw NO2 ,CO2 values can be obtained from mA-type field transmitters instead of a Chromatograph.
Page 11.50
795X Op Man/DB
Density B from PTZ2

This method is similar to PTZ1 except Density B is derived using the molecular weight. Corrections are
applied for pressure, temperature and line compressibility (factor Z) of the measured gas.
1
tb Pb
3
t
P
Cv/m
CO2
2
4
The following compressibility sources for PTZ2 are supported

by the 795X:
M
Compressibility
Calculation
(S-GERG)
NO2
Z0
SG
tb Pb
S-GERG 1988
AGA-NX19Mod
AGA-NX19Mod3h
AGA-8
10 11
t
P
Cv/m*
CO2
Z Factor
Calculation
(NX19,
NX19mod,
NX19mod3h*)
NO2
1
Z0
39
M
Z
t
P
Source
Selection
SG
Gas Composition
(Normalised)
14
t
P
to
% Methane
% Nitrogen
% Carbon Dioxide
% Ethane
% Propane
% Neo-Butane
% Iso-Butane
% Neo-Pentane
% Iso-Pentane
% Neo-Hexane
% Neo-Heptane
38
Z0
36
37
12 13
tb Pb
40
GAS
Density B
35
Z Factor
Calculation
(AGA8)
Density B
Calculation
(PTZ2)
% Neo-Octane
% Neo-nonane
% Neo-Decane
% Hydrogen Sulphide
% Water
% Helium
% Oxygen
% Carbon Monoxide
% Hydrogen
% C6+
% Argon
(1) <Configure>/<Compressibility>, (2) <Configure>/<Density>/<Line density B>,

Menu Data List:
Index
t
tB
P
PB
SG
Cv/m
1
2
3
4
5
M, 6
ZB, 7
Z, 8

Meter temperature *
Base temp value
Meter pressure *
Base pressure value
SG prime value *
Energy value *
Meter PTZ2 calc sel
H2
SGERG selector
SGERG report errors
Meter mass of gas *
Line density Zbase *
Line density Zline *

Notes?
A
E
Index
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Mass of air
Tor temp offset
AGA-NX19 method
AGA8 Z uncertainty
AGA Gas comp. Tol.
Norm Methane
Norm Ethane
Norm Propane
Norm n-Butane
Norm i-Butane
Norm n-Pentane
Norm i-Pentane
Norm n-Hexane
Norm n-Heptane
Notes?
C
B
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.51

Menu Data List:
Index
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Norm n-Octane
Norm n-Nonane
Norm n-Decane
Norm C6+
Norm H2S
Norm water
Norm Helium
Norm Oxygen
Norm CO

Notes?
Index
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
32
33
NO2, 34
CO2, 35
36
37
38
39
40

Norm Hydrogen
Norm Argon
Norm Nitrogen
Norm CO2
AGA8 Z base value *
AGA8 Z value *
AGA8 M value *
Gas const R J/mol.K
Line density B value *
Notes?
F
F
F, G
F, G
Notes:
A
See Energy Measurement reference pages for configuration informa tion.

F The normalisation of all raw gas components can be performed on-demand (by manipulating menu data)
or automatically (if using a Chromatograph). Refer to Chapter 7 for information on Chromatograph support.
Page 11.52
795X Op Man/DB
BASE DENSITY
Measurements:
Base Density A.. (Calculated from Gas Specific Gravity )

Base Density B.. (Options: direct from a mA input, calculated by PTZ1 or PTZ2 methods )
Prime Base Density....... (Value from Base density A, Base density B, or Fallback function )
Prime
Specific 1
Gravity
GAS BASE
DENSITY A
Base Density A
Calculation
B from
5
4
mA inputs
Source
Selection
mA
Base Density B
Calculation
(Scaling)
Comparison
Limit Check 9
PTZ1
10
12 13 14
Prime
Density
Selection
Limits &
Fallback
Check
11
17
PRIME
BASE
DENSITY
15 16
OR
B from
Base
Density B
Selection
GAS BASE
DENSITY B
PTZ2

(1) <Configure>/<Base density> and (2) <Base density / SG>
Menu Data List:

Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

SG prime value *
Base density of Air
Base density A value *
Base dens B input chl
Base density B 100%
Base density B 0%
Base dens calc sel
Base density B value *
Base density cmp lmt

Notes?
Index
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Base dens prime sel
Base den selected
Base density HI lmt
Base density LO lmt
Base density stp lmt
Base density FB type
Base density FB val.
Notes?
C
A,
A,
A,
B
B
Notes:
A
Optional feature. By default, alarm limit checking is not enabled. Set values to enable checking.
HI/LO LIMIT:
Keep both limits Set to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
STEP LIMIT:
Keep limit Set to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
COMPARISION LIMIT: Keep limit Set to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
High and low limits are for the selected prime density. Step limit is for both Base Density A and B values.
Fallback is not optional with Base Density measurements. By default, a Set fallback value of 0 is copied to
the prime data in the event of a fallback situation. See Prime re-selection procedure for further information.
Selects the logic table for the prime base density (channel) selection. (See Re-selection Procedure below)
Refer to Base Density B/Compressibility reference pages (11. 56 to 11.59) for information about configuring
Base Density B to be calculated by PTZ1 or PTZ2 methods.
E
mA:
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.53
BASE DENSITY
Prime Base Density Re-Selection Procedure
In the event of a base density input channel (e.g. Base Density A) failing or returning to a live state, the 795X will
perform a re-selection procedure for obtaining a live Prime Base Density value. This procedure involves evaluating
a user-selected logic decision table to determine where to get the prime value.
The logic table below is shown in full for the Automatic A configuration option. (Base Density A is preferred)
Base
Density A
out of limit
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
-
Base
Density B
out of limit
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
-
A#B (Comp)
out of limit
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
-
Base
Density A
input failed
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Base Density A configuration option
(Note: Base Density B is not involved)
Base
Density B
input failed
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Base Density A
out of limit
YES
YES
Prime Base
Density
Selected
FB
A
B
B
A
A
B
A
FB
FB
B
B
B
FB
B
B
FB
A
FB
A
FB
A
FB
A
FB
FB
FB
FB
FB
FB
FB
FB
Key:
A = Base Density A,
B = Base Density B,
FB = Fallback
Notes:
1. The Automatic B
configuration
option uses the
same logic table
except Base
Density B is the
preferred channel.
This preference
reverses the A and
B selection in the
last column of this
table.
2. Out of limit
columns 1 and 2
are concerned with
the HI or LO alarm
limits.
3. Input failed
columns are
concerned with
Live inputs.
Base Density A
input failed
Prime Base
Density Selected
YES
YES
A
FB
FB
FB
Key: A = Base Density A, B = Base Density B, FB = Fallback
Base Density B configuration option
(Note: Base Density A is not involved)
Base Density B
out of limit
YES
YES
Base Density B
input failed
YES
YES
Prime Base
Density
Selected
B
FB
FB
FB
Key: A = Base Density A, B = Base Density B, FB = Fallback
Page 11.54
795X Op Man/DB
BASE DENSITY
Base Density Equation List:
The following calculations can be performed by the 795X:
Equation DE#6: Base Density (from PTZ1)

Using:
Pb * Z * t
=
*
P
Z0 * tb
Where:
= Base Density...... {Menu Data: Base Density B value}
Z0
= Base compressibility.. {Menu Data: Base Density Zbase}
tb
Pb
= Meter temperature (in Kelvin)..
= Line density at base conditions {Menu Data: Prime line density}
= Line compressibility {Menu Data: Base Density Zline}
{Menu Data: Meter temperature}
Equation DE#7: Base Density (from PTZ2)
M b * Pb
R
Z0 * t b *
100
Using:
Where:
= Base Density...... {Menu Data: Line Density B value}
M b = Molecular weight of measured gas..... {Menu Data: Base mass of gas}

Z0
= Base compressibility.. {Menu Data: Base Density Zbase}
tb
Pb
= Universal gas constant.. {Menu Data: Gas const R J/mol.K}
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.55
BASE DENSITY B FROM PTZ1/COMPRESSIBILITY
Base Density B from PTZ1

This method allows Base Density B to be derived from a prime Base Density input. Corrections are applied for
the pressure, temperature and line compressibility (factor Z) of the measured gas.
tb Pb
3
t
P
Cv/m
CO2
The following compressibility sources for PTZ1 are supported by

the 795X:
2
4
M
Compressibility
Z0
Calculation
(S-GERG)
NO2
5
6
SG
tb Pb
What to do
1. Configure a compressibility source and then select it for PTZ1.
(Configuration may have already been done for Line Density)
2. Configure Base Density B to use PTZ1 method.
10 11
t
P
Cv/m*
CO2
Z Factor
Calculation
(NX19,
NX19mod,
NX19mod3h*)
NO2
Z0
OR
Gas Composition
(Normalised)
t
P
38
Z0
36
37
tb Pb
1
P
B
Source
Selection
t
P
Z0
Base Density B
Calculation
(PTZ1)
Gas Base
43 Density B
Z Factor
Calculation
(Linear)
12 13
35
Z Factor
Calculation
(AGA8)
tb Pb
Pb
Z
OR
to
tb
SG
14
S-GERG 1988
AGA-NX19Mod
AGA-NX19Mod3h
AGA-8
Linear Interpolation
Z0
Z
39 40 41 42
% Methane
% Nitrogen
% Carbon Dioxide
% Ethane
% Propane
% Neo-Butane
% Iso-Butane
% Neo-Pentane
% Iso-Pentane
% Neo-Hexane
% Neo-Heptane
% Neo-Octane
% Neo-nonane
% Neo-Decane
% Hydrogen Sulphide
% Water
% Helium
% Oxygen
% Carbon Monoxide
% Hydrogen
% C6+
% Argon

(1) (1) <Configure>/<Compressibility>, (2) <Configure>/<Density>/<Line density B> and
Menu Data List:
Index
t
tB
P
PB
SG
Cv/m
1
2
3
4

Meter temperature *
Base temp value
Meter pressure *
Base pressure value
SG prime value *
Energy value *
Meter PTZ1 calc sel
H2
SGERG selector
SGERG report errors

Notes?
A
E
Index
5
M, 6
ZB, 7
Z, 8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Meter mass of gas *
Base density Zbase *
Base density Zline *
Mass of air
Tor temp offset
AGA-NX19 method
AGA8 Z uncertainty
AGA Gas comp. Tol.
Norm Methane
Notes?
D
C
B
Page 11.56
795X Op Man/DB

Menu Data List:
Index
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29

Norm Ethane
Norm Propane
Norm n-Butane
Norm i-Butane
Norm n-Pentane
Norm i-Pentane
Norm n-Hexane
Norm n-Heptane
Norm n-Octane
Norm n-Nonane
Norm n-Decane
Norm C6+
Norm H2S
Norm water
Norm Helium

Notes?
Index
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
30
31
32
33
NO2, 34
CO2, 35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
r
Notes?
Norm Oxygen
Norm CO
Norm Hydrogen
Norm Argon
Norm Nitrogen
Norm CO2
AGA8 Z base value *
AGA8 Z value *
AGA8 M value *
Linear Z K10
Linear Z K11
Linear Z K12
Linear Z K13
Prime Line Density *
F
F
F
F
F, G
F, G
Notes:
A
See Energy Measurement reference pages (11. 63 to 11.66) for configuration information.
The normalisation of all raw gas components can be performed on-demand (by manipulating menu data) or
automatically (if using a Chromatograph). Refer to Chapter 7 for information on Chromatograph support.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.57
Base Density B from PTZ2

This method is similar to PTZ1 except Density B is derived using the molecular weight. Corrections are
applied for pressure, temperature and base compressibility (factor Z) of the measured gas.
1
tb Pb
3
t
P
Cv/m
CO2
The following compressibility sources for PTZ2 are supported by

the 795X:
2
4
Mb
Compressibility
Calculation
(S-GERG)
NO2
Z0
Z
SG
tb Pb
What to do
1. Configure a compressibility source.
(Configuration may have already been done for Line Density)
2. Configure Base Density B to use PTZ1 method.
10 11
t
P
Cv/m*
CO2
tB
Mb
Z Factor
Calculation
(NX19,
NX19mod,
NX19mod3h*)
NO2
S-GERG 1988
AGA-NX19Mod
AGA-NX19Mod3h
AGA-8
1
Z0
PB
39
Source
Selection
Mb
Z0
Base Density B
Calculation
(PTZ2)
40
Gas Base
Density B
SG
Gas Composition
(Normalised)
14
to
35
Z Factor
Calculation
(AGA8)
t
P
Mb
38
Z0
36
37
12 13
tb Pb
% Methane
% Nitrogen
% Carbon Dioxide
% Ethane
% Propane
% Neo-Butane
% Iso-Butane
% Neo-Pentane
% Iso-Pentane
% Neo-Hexane
% Neo-Heptane
% Neo-Octane
% Neo-nonane
% Neo-Decane
% Hydrogen Sulphide
% Water
% Helium
% Oxygen
% Carbon Monoxide
% Hydrogen
% C6+
% Argon
(1) <Configure>/<Compressibility>, (2) <Configure>/<Density>/<Line density B> and

Menu Data List:
Index
t
tB
P
PB
SG
Cv/m
1
2
3
4
5
M, 6
ZB, 7
Z, 8

Meter temperature *
Base temp value
Meter pressure *
Base pressure value
SG prime value *
Energy value *
Meter PTZ2 calc sel
H2
SGERG selector
SGERG report errors
Meter mass of gas *
Base density Zbase *
Base density Zline *

Notes?
A
E
Index
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Mass of air
Tor temp offset
AGA-NX19 method
AGA8 Z uncertainty
AGA Gas comp. Tol.
Norm Methane
Norm Ethane
Norm Propane
Norm n-Butane
Norm i-Butane
Norm n-Pentane
Norm i-Pentane
Norm n-Hexane
Norm n-Heptane
Notes?
C
B
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
Page 11.58
795X Op Man/DB

Menu Data List:
Index
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Norm n-Octane
Norm n-Nonane
Norm n-Decane
Norm C6+
Norm H2S
Norm water
Norm Helium
Norm Oxygen
Norm CO

Notes?
Index
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
32
33
NO2, 34
CO2, 35
36
37
38
39
40
Notes?
Norm Hydrogen
Norm Argon
Norm Nitrogen
Norm CO2
AGA8 Z base value *
AGA8 Z value *
AGA8 M value *
Gas const R J/mol.K
F
F
F, G
F, G
Notes:
A
See Energy Measurement reference pages for configuration information.
The normalisation of all raw gas components can be performed o n-demand (by manipulating menu data) or
automatically (if using a Chromatograph). Refer to Chapter 7 for information on Chromatograph support.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.59
SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Measurements:
Specific Gravity A.. (from Time Period Input 3)

Specific Gravity B.. (from Time Period Input 4, Prime Base Density, mA Input or Chromatograph )
Prime Specific Gravity (from either Specific Gravity A, Specific Gravity B or Fallback facility )
K0 K2
Index for use with

XX list of associated
data
( S) 1
K0 K2
7
( S) 6
S.G. A
Calculation
(Transducer)
SGA
5
S.G. B
Calculation
(Transducer)
S.G.
COMPARISON 17
LIMIT
18
20 21 22
Prime
S.G.
Selection
Limits &
Fallback
Check
19
11
B 10
mA inputs
Source
Selection
23 24
15
S.G. B
Calculation
(Base Density)
12
PRIME
25 SPECIFIC
GRAVITY
OR
SG B
Method
Selection
16
SGB
13 14
SG B
Calculation
(Scaling)
SG B from Chromatograph

(1) <Configure>/<Transducer details>, (2) <Health check>/<Time period inputs>
(3) <Configure>/<Specific gravity> and (4) <Base density / SG>
Menu Data List:
Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Time period Input 3 *

SG A glitch limit
SG A K0
SG A K2
SG A value *
Time period Input 4 *
SG B glitch limit
SG B K0
SG B K2
Prime base density *
Base density of air
SG B analog source
SG 100%
SG 0%

Notes?
Index
A
G
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
A
G

SG B calc select
SG B value *
SG comparison limit
Prime SG sel
SG selected
SG HI limit
SG LO limit
SG step limit
Prime SG FB Type
Prime SG FB value
SG prime value *
Notes?
E
D
F
F
C
C
C
Notes: (B to G are on the next page)

A
(1)
Look within the <Health Check> menu for this menu data.
(2)
Time Period Input 3 is always associated with the Density Input 3 rear panel connection.
Similarly, Time Period Input 4 corresponds to the Density Input 4 rear panel connection.
(Refer to Chapter 2 for Density Input Connection information )
Page 11.60
795X Op Man/DB
SPECIFIC GRAVITY
Notes continued
B
mA:

HI/LO: Keep both high and low limits Set to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
Optional feature. Keep the step limit Set to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
Refer to Chapter 7 of this manual for information on the 795X support for Chromatographs.
Selects a logic table for the prime specific gravity (channel) selection. (See Re-selection Procedure below)
A frequency measurement glitch is an anomalous reading that is unusually different to previous readings.
Anomalous readings can be filtered out by the 795X before use in calculations. A user-defined tolerance for a
frequency change is used to distinguish between good and anomalous readings. A frequency change that is
above the tolerance limit means that the frequency is anomalous. Following an anomalous reading, there
must be three consecutive good readings within the tolerance limit before the frequency is acceptable. An
alarm is raised whenever there are five consecutive anomalous readings.
Prime SG Re-Selection Procedure

In the event of a SG input channel (e.g. SG A) failing or returning to a live state, the 795X will perform a reselection procedure for obtaining a live Prime SG value. This procedure involves evaluating a user-selected logic
decision table to determine where now to get the prime value.
The logic table below is shown in full for the Automatic A configuration option. (SG A is preferred)
SG A
out of limit
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
-
795X Op Man/DB
SG B
out of limit
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
-
A#B (Comp)
out of limit
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
-
SG A input
failed
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
SG B input
failed
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Prime SG
Selected
FB
A
B
B
A
A
B
A
FB
FB
B
B
B
FB
B
B
FB
A
FB
A
FB
A
FB
A
FB
FB
FB
FB
FB
FB
FB
FB
Key:
A = SG A,
B = SG B,
FB = Fallback
Notes:
1. The Automatic B
configuration option
uses the same logic
table except SG B
is the preferred
channel.
This preference
reverses the A and
B selection in the
last column of this
table.
2. Out of limit
columns 1 and 2 are
concerned with the
HI or LO alarm
limits.
3. Input failed
columns are
concerned with
Live inputs.
Page 11.61
SPECIFIC GRAVITY
The logic table (on the right) is shown in full for the SG A
configuration option (SG B is not involved)
SG A
out of
limit
SG A
input
failed
YES
YES
YES
YES
Prime SG
Selected
A
FB
FB
FB
Key: A = SG A, B = SG B, FB = Fallback
The logic table (on the right) is shown in full for the SG B
configuration option. (SG A is not involved)
SG B
out of
limit
SG B
input
failed
YES
YES
YES
YES
Prime SG
Selected
B
FB
FB
FB
Key: A = SG A, B = SG B, FB = Fallback
Page 11.62
795X Op Man/DB
ENERGY
Measurements:
(Note: Turn to page 11.65 for the Equation List)
Energy Value.(Options: from ISO 6976 (1995), AGA5 conditions (1981), a mA input or a Chromatograph)
Energy Rate
Gas Composition
(Normalised)
Index for use with

XX
1
32
mA Inputs
mA
Selection
33 34
35 36
CO2 Value
Calculation
(Scaling)
Fallback
& Limits
Check
37 38
Energy Value
Calculation
(ISO 6976)
31
OR
CO2 direct from

Chromatograph
41
mA Inputs
mA
Selection
42 43
44 45
NO2 Value
Calculation
(Scaling)
Fallback
& Limits
Check
46 47
22
To
29 Wobbe
23 24 25
Key:
Cv = Calorific value in Volume units
Cv/m = Calorific value either in Volume or Mass units
26 27
39
CO2
SG 30
28 Relative Density
Energy Value
Calculation
(AGA 5)
59
Cv/m
Cv
OR
N2
48
Cv
Method
Selection
51 52 53
54 55
Cv/m
Energy Value
Calculation
(Scaling)
Fallback
& Limits
Check
58
Direct from
49
Chromatograph
Energy
Value
QBV
54
61
Energy
Flow Rate
Calculation
60
50
mA Inputs
63
Energy
Rate
Qm
40
NO2 direct from

Chromatograph
62
Source
Selection
56 57

(1) <Configure>/<Energy>, (2) <Configure>/<Transmitter detail> and (3) <Energy>
(4) <Temperature>, (5) <Configure>/<Line Density>/<Uni gas constant>, (6) <Base density / SG>
Menu Data List:
Index

Notes?
Index
Notes?
Norm Methane
21
Norm Nitrogen
Norm Ethane
22
Norm CO2
Norm Propane
23
Absolute zero
Norm n-Butane
24
Combustion temp
Norm I-Butane
25
Base temp value
Norm n-Pentane
26
Gas const R J/mol.K
Norm I-Pentane
27
Mass of air
Norm n-Hexane
28
Relative Dens value *
MENU(4)
G
H
MENU(5)
D
MENU(6)
Norm n-Heptane
29
Wobbe index
10
Norm n-Octane
30
SG prime value *
11
Norm n-Nonane
31
CO2 live input src
12
Norm n-Decane
32
Live CO2 input chl
13
Norm C6+
33
Live CO2 100%
14
Norm H2S
34
Live CO2 0%
15
Norm water
35
Live CO2 HI limit
16
Norm Helium
36
Live CO2 LO limit
17
Norm Oxygen
37
Live CO2 FB type
18
Norm CO
38
Live CO2 FB value
19
Norm Hydrogen
39
Live CO2 value *
20
Norm Argon
40
N2 live input source
See next page for continuation of the menu data list and applicable notes.
795X Op Man/DC
Page 11.63
ENERGY
Menu Data List:
Index
Notes?
Index
Notes?
41
Live N2 input chl
53
Energy type selector
42
Live N2 100%
54
Live energy HI limit
43
Live N2 0%
55
Live energy LO limit
44
Live N2 HI limit
56
Live energy FB type
45
Live N2 LO limit
57
Live energy FB value
46
Live N2 FB type
58
Live energy value *
47
Live N2 FB value
59
Energy calc selector
48
Live N2 value *
60
Energy value *
49
Chromat energy *
61
Base volume rate *
50
Live energy input
62
Mass rate *
51
Live energy 100%
63
Energy rate *
52
Live energy 0%
Abbreviations: chl = channel, calc = calculation, SG = Specific Gravity, Dens = Density, src = source
const = constant, norm = normalised, FB = Fallback
Notes:
A
mA: Refer to the Analogue Input reference page (11.7) for basic configuration details.
Optional feature. Keep both high and low limits Set to 0 if this alarm limit checking is not required.
Ensure that the menu data is Live and a value is being received from a Chromatograph.
(MENU: <Health Check>/<Normalise gas data>/<Live inputs>)
Refer to Chromatograph support reference pages in Chapter 7 for further configuration information.
This parameter is applicable to the ISO 6967 MJ/m3 and the ISO 6967 MJ/kg calculation methods
Raw gas constituent that has been normalised on-demand (by manipulating menu data) or normalised
automatically if received from a Chromatograph. (MENU: <Health Check>/<Normalise gas data>)
Refer to the Flow Metering reference pages for information on this flow rate.
Orifice Flow (Page 11.13), Turbine Flow (Page 11.26), Ultrasonic Flow (Page 11.30), Linear Flow (Page 11.33)
The combustion reference condition for Table 3 of ISO 6976:1995:E. It can be Set to 0C, 15C, 20C or
3
25C. When Set to other temperatures, an alarm is raised and the ISO 5967 (MJ/m ) calculation uses 15C
The base temperature reference condition (for Table 2 of ISO 6976:1995:E). It can be Set to 0C, 15C or
3
20C. When Set to other temperatures, an alarm is raised and the ISO 5967 (MJ/m ) calculation uses 15C
See Table 11.4.1 for guidance on the various calculation options

Table 11.4.1: Energy (Cv/m) Calculation Options
Multiple-choice *
Options (as displayed)
Energy Calculation
(Method/Standard)
Calculation Outputs
ISO 6976 MJ/M3
ISO 6976:1995(E) T1-3,L.1
Real Calorific value (in MJ/m3), Relative Density, Wobbe Index
ISO 6976 MJ/kg
ISO 6976:1995(E) T1-3,L.1
Real Calorific value (in MJ/kg), Relative Density, Wobbe Index
AGA 5
AGA 5:1981
Real Calorific value (in MJ/kg converted from dekatherms/lb)
Chromat energy
(Onboard Chromatograph)
Live calorific val
(mA Input Scaling)
Real Calorific value (in MJ/m3)

Real Calorific value selectable units of MJ/m3 or MJ/kg
* Abbreviation: val = value

Page 11.64
795X Op Man/DC
ENERGY
Energy Equation List:
The following calculations can be performed by the 795x:
Equation EN#1: Calorific value (AGA 5)
( 0.001970 M X )
Using:
Cm = 0.02035 +
Where:
Cm = Calorific value in mass units..{Menu Data: <Energy Value>}
SG
SG = Specific gravity.{Menu Data: <SG prime value>

And:
Where:
M X = (MC * 0.000329) + ( M N * 0.000217 )

MC = Percentage of CO2 in measured gas composition{Menu Data: <Live CO2 value>
M N = Percentage of Nitrogen in measured gas composition.{Menu Data: <Live N2 value>
Equation EN#2: Calorific value (ISO 6976)

Note: Refer to the ISO 6976 report (1995 edition) for detailed information.
HV( Ideal )
Using:
H ( real ) =
Where:
HV( Ideal ) =
Z mix
= Cv.. {Menu Data: <Energy Value>}
j =n
And:
Where:
X j * H j = Ideal volumetric calorific value (Cv)

j =0
Xj
= Percentage of constituent j in the gas composition
Hj
= The ideal calorific value of constituent j in the gas composition
Z mix
bj
= 1
j =n
j =1
X j * b j + 0.005 * 2X H X H2
= Gas constituent (excluding Helium and Carbon Dioxide)
X H = The mole fraction of hydrogen

Z
= Line compressibility factor
Equation EN#3: Relative density value (ISO 6976 method)
(RDIdeal * Z Air )
Using:
RDreal
Where:
RDreal
= Relative density of gas composition.. {Menu Data: <Relative Dens value>}
Z Air
= Compression factor of air
Z mix
= See Equation EN#2
Z mix
j =n
X j *Mj
j =0
And:
RD Ideal =
Where:
Xj
= Percentage of constituent j in the gas composition
Mj
= Molar mass of constituent j in the gas composition
M Air
= Molar mass of air.. {Menu Data: Mass of air}
795X Op Man/DC
M Air
Page 11.65
ENERGY
(Energy Equation List Continued)
Equation EN#4a: Energy Flow Rate from Calorific value (mass units)
Using:
QE = Qm * C m
Where:
QE = Energy flow rate.{Menu Data: <Energy rate>}

Qm = Mass flow rate.. {Menu Data: <Mass rate>}
C m = Calorific Value (in mass units) {Menu Data: <Energy value>}
Equation EN#4b: Energy Flow Rate from Calorific value (volume units)
Using:
QE = QBV * C m
Where:
QE = Energy flow rate. {Menu Data: <Energy rate>}

QBV = Base volume flow rate... {Menu Data: <Base volume rate>}
C m = Calorific Value (in mass units). {Menu Data: <Energy value>}
Page 11.66
795X Op Man/DC
ANALOGUE OUTPUTS
Feature:
Analogue Outputs supported by the 7950 and 7951:

mA output channels 1 to 4 (without add-on card) or
mA output channels 1 to 8 (with add-on card)
What to do:
Use this reference page to find out how to configure each analogue output channel that is to transmit values to
external devices once every machine cycle.
After configuring the necessary menu data for a channel and for the parameter, check that a satisfactory live
reading is displayed by the corresponding <mA output value> menu data.
By default, no parameters are pre-allocated to Analogue Outputs.
(1) <Configure>/<Analog outputs> and (2) <Health check>/<Analog outputs>
*
Menu Data List:

Analogue Channel
(and signal types)
Analogue Output 1
(mA only)
Analogue Output 2
(mA only)
Analogue Output 3
(mA only)
Analogue Output 4
(mA only)
Data names
(as displayed)
mA output 1 value *
mA output 1 source
mA 1 value @ 100%
mA 1 value @ 0%
mA output 1 type
mA output 1 filter
mA out 1 user source
mA output 2 value *
mA output 2 source
mA 2 value @ 100%
mA 2 value @ 0%
mA output 2 type
mA output 2 filter
mA output 3 value *
mA output 3 source
mA 3 value @ 100%
mA 3 value @ 0%
mA output 3 type
mA output 3 filter
mA output 4 value *
mA output 4 source
mA 4 value @ 100%
mA 4 value @ 0%
mA output 4 type
mA output 4 filter
shows data that can be Live or Set
Analogue Channel
(and signal types)
Analogue Output 5
(mA only)
Analogue Output 6
(mA only)
Analogue Output 7
(mA only)
Analogue Output 8
(mA only)
Data names
(as displayed)
mA output 5 value *
mA output 5 source
mA 5 value @ 100%
mA 5 value @ 0%
mA output 5 type
mA output 5 filter
mA output 6 value *
mA output 6 source
mA 6 value @ 100%
mA 6 value @ 0%
mA output 6 type
mA output 6 filter
mA output 7 value *
mA output 7 source
mA 7 value @ 100%
mA 7 value @ 0%
mA output 7 type
mA output 7 filter
mA output 8 value *
mA output 8 source
mA 8 value @ 100%
mA 8 value @ 0%
mA output 8 type
mA output 8 filter
mA output 8 user source
Note:
A
The <mA out user source> menu data is for selecting a parameter that is not readily available with the normal
<mA output source> menu data. It is necessary to select the USER option for < mA output source> and
then program <mA output user source> with the parameters unique identification number.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.67
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Features:
Digital Outputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon)

Status output channels 1 to 8
Digital Outputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type)

Digital Outputs supported by a 7951 (Klippon)

What To Do:
This reference page will assist when configuring basic data (see list below) for all the Status Output channels
that are being used. Later tasks will expect this menu data to be already configured.
By default, the first 5 Status Outputs are reserved for the Alarm Logger Output feature. (See Chapter 8)
The remainder are available for use as listed in the connection list of Chapter 3.
In the <Health Check> menu there is a Status
Output sub-menu. It contains a menu data page
nd
with a series of digits on the 2 . display line.
a
Status outputs
XXX000010000000
Each digit indicates the present state of an

individual output.
b
c
Status Output #16

This Status Output
is presently active
(positive logic)

(1) <Configure>/<Status outputs> and (2) <Health check>/<Status outputs>
Menu Data List:
Status O/P
Channel
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Page 11.68

Data names
(as displayed)
Status out 1 logic

Status out 2 logic
Status out 3 logic
Status out 4 logic
Status out 5 logic
Status out 6 logic
Status O/P
Channel
Output 7
Output 8
Output 9
Output 10
Output 11
Output 12
Data names
(as displayed)
Status out 7 logic
Status out 8 logic
Status out 9 logic
Status out 10 logic
Status out 11 logic
Status out 12 logic
Status O/P
Channel
Output 13
Output 14
Output 15
Output 16
Data names
(as displayed)
Status out 13 logic
Status out 14 logic
Status out 15 logic
Status out 16 logic
795X Op Man/DB
PULSE OUTPUTS
Features:
Pulse Outputs supported by a 7950 (Klippon)

Pulse Output channels 1 to 3 (for transmitting totals)
Pulse Outputs supported by a 7951 (D-Type)

Pulse Outputs supported by a 7951 (Klippon)

What To Do:
Use this page to configure data for the pulse output channels that are to transmit a rate of flow in the form of a
pulse train. Each pulse has a significance that equates to a certain mass or volume in the units of
measurement already selected for the rate.
For an example, consider a selected flow total increasing at a rate of 1 gallon every second and a pulse
significance that is edited with a value of 6 (to represent 6 gallons). There would be a pulse transmitted every
6 seconds. The corresponding total is then represented as a pulse train.

(1) <Configure>/<Totalisers>/<Pulse outputs>
Menu Data List:

Pulse Output
Channel
Data names
(as displayed)
Pulse Output
Channel
Pulse Output 1
Pulse out 1 source

Pulse out 1 signif
Pulse out 2 source
Pulse out 2 signif
Pulse out 3 source
Pulse out 3 signif
Pulse Output 4
Pulse Output 2
Pulse Output 3
Pulse Output 5
Data names
(as displayed)
Pulse out 4 source
Pulse out 4 signif
Pulse out 5 source
Pulse out 4 signif
General Notes:
A
By default, parameters are not pre-allocated to pulse outputs.
The pulse frequency will vary as the flow rate varies. If the pulse rate exceeds 10 Hz then a pulse reservoir
is used to keep count of the excess. Always set a large enough pulse significance to avoid this occurring.
If an excess does occur, increase the significance and wait for things to calm down again. Alternatively,
reservoirs can be cleared immediately by selecting the appropriate clear command through the
<Clear pulse outputs> menu data.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.69
SPECIAL EQUATIONS
Feature:
Special Equation Type One

The following equation is made available to each supported metering-run (stream):
a * ( b + X * c ))
R = A + B
d * e +Y * f
Where:
A, B
Constants
a -f
Pointers
X, Y
Constants
Result

(1) <Configure>/<Custom application>
Menu Data List:
Term
R
A
B
X
Y
a
b
c
d
e
f
N/A

Special equation 1*
General equ. const A
General equ. const B
General equ. const X
General equ. const Y
General equ. ptr. a
General equ. ptr. a
General equ. ptr. a
General equ. ptr. a
General equ. ptr. a
General equ. ptr. a
General equation

Notes?
Term
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

General constant 1
General constant 2
General constant 3
General constant 4
Notes?
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
Notes:
A
A facility is provided whereby a text title can be edited to identify the calculation. Changing the
default text will alter the on-screen description of the result menu data.
Edit the value with the identification number of the menu data (parameter) to be used for this term.
Identification numbers can be seen on-screen by locating the data in the menu system and then
pressing the a-key. Re-press the a-key to remove the number from the display.
With this type of menu data, the word off is seen when not in use.
There is a collection of un-used data locations within the custom equation menu. These are provided
for defining constants that could be identified as equation terms a, b, etc.
Page 11.70
795X Op Man/DB
SPECIAL EQUATIONS
Feature:
Special Equation Type Two

The following equation is made available to each supported metering-run (stream):
(A+ (B*t ) + (C *t ))
2
R=e
Where:
Result
A , B ,C
Constants
Pointer

(1) <Configure>/<Custom application>
Menu Data List:
Term
R
A
B
C
t
N/A

Special equation 2*
General equ2 const A
General equ2 const B
General equ2 const C
General equ. ptr. t
User sp eq2 Text

Notes?
Term
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

General constant 1
General constant 2
General constant 3
General constant 4
Notes?
C
C
C
C
B
A
Notes:
A
A facility is provided whereby a text title can be edited to identify the calculation. Changing the
default text will alter the on-screen description of the result menu data.
Edit the value with the identification number of the menu data (parameter) to be used for this term.
Identification numbers can be seen on-screen by locating the data in the menu system and then
pressing the a-key. Re-press the a-key to remove the number from the display.
With this type of menu data, the word off is seen when not in use.
There is a collection of un-used data locations within the custom equation menu. These are provided
for defining constants that could be identified as equation terms a, b, etc.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.71
PASSWORDS AND SECURITY

This sub-section explains how the 795x can set-up to restrict access to facilities.
Securable and non-secure modes:
The 795x can work in a non-secure or securable mode. In non-secure mode, anyone can have access to any
of the facilities. In securable mode, access to facilities can be protected by passwords.
Changing security mode: 7950 instrument only
If you want the 7950 in securable mode, set the DIP switch on the Connector/Power Supply board to
SECURABLE (if you didnt do this when you installed the instrument).
Where to find the security DIP switch on the 7950
Changing security mode: 7951 and 7955 instruments only

In the 7951 and 7955 instruments, you change the security mode by using the key switch on the front of the
instrument. The instruments are normally securable but, when you insert the key and turn it clockwise, this
changes the mode to non-secure. You can only withdraw the key in the vertical (securable) position.
LED
LOCK
The security lock on the 7951 and 7955 instruments
Page 11.72
795X Op Man/DB

Passwords and Security Levels:
The password system restricts access to its facilities to those people with certain levels of authority. There are
four levels of security:
Calibration
Engineer
Operator
World (anyone other than those listed above).
The table below lists what facilities each of these groups can access.
Access levels, and what they can have access to
Facilities available
Engineer
Operator
World
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
All data or functions

which dont affect
results of calculations
NO
Programming facilities
YES
YES
NO
NO
Calibration facilities
YES
NO
NO
NO
RED flashing
RED
ORANGE
GREEN
Programmable
parameters except
security codes
Security codes
How the security LED

appears
Calibration
NO
Setting or changing a password (security code)
Firstly, use the location in the < Enter Password> menu for entering the password to change to the
required Calibration security level.
Select menu: <Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Security>/<User interface>

From this menu, select the password (Programmer, Engineer, Operator or World) you want to set or
change, then type in a password of up to 20 characters. If there is an existing password you can clear it
first by pressing the CLR button.
You can, if you wish, have the same password for more than one level. This gives you access to the
facilities of all the levels covered by that password.
Use the <Enter Password> menu location for entering a password to change security level.
Keyboard Security Fallback (Optional)

The present security level for information access through the keyboard can be automatically changed to the
World level after a user-defined period of time has elapsed without use of the keyboard. Use of the
keyboard during the period causes the timing to be re-set. Security level changes can still be made at any
time in the normal way (as explained earlier) but will re-set the timing.
By default, this security feature is not active. To activate, the length of time for the period must be set to a
value more than zero. Passwords to change security level are as already defined.
Configuration task: Enable keyboard security fallback

1. Select menu: <Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Security>/<User interface>
2. Locate the Security timeout location and then change the value to set a time. It is not advisable to
set a time less than 15 seconds.
To de-activate this feature, set the value of the Security timeout location to zero.
Communications Security Fallback (Optional)

Information access through the serial port can be disabled after a period of time has elapsed without use.
Using the link during the period causes the period timing to be re-set. Sending the correct Communications
password to the 795x in the only way to re-enable information access.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.73

By default, this feature is not active. To activate it, the length of time must be set to a value more than zero.
A new Communications password should be also Set rather than keep the default one.
Configuration task: Enable communications security fallback

1. Change security level to Calibration (i.e. flashing red security LED)
2. Select menu: <Configure>/<Other parameters>/<Security>/<Communications>
3. Locate the Security timeout location and then change the value to set a time.
4. (Optional) Locate the Comms password location and set a new password.
(End of configuration task)
To de-activate this feature, set the value of the Security timeout location to zero.
Operation
To re-enable information access through the serial port, the Communications password needs to be set
in (or written to) the Enter comms password location.
Page 11.74
795X Op Man/DB
MULTI-PAGE MULTI-VIEW
What is Multi-View?
Multi-View (often referred to as the User Display) is a single-key activated display which you can define to show
whatever information you want. It consists of one or more pages with the four lines on each page comprising of
either or both of:
Text (such as the name of a parameter), at the left of the line.

A value for a parameter, at the right of the line.
You can change the configuration of a Multi-View display whenever you wish. An example of a typical multi-view
display is shown below.
How to get into Multi-view
To see the first Multi-view display page, press the MULTI-VIEW key (i.e. the TOP blank key). A multi-view display
page looks like the example below.
A typical Multiview display

Use the DOWN-ARROW key to page down through other multi-view displays. The message Invalid MultiView
Page appears to indicate that no further pages are defined. Use the UP-ARROW to reverse through the display
pages.
Configuring Multi-view
Follow this procedure for configuring Multi-view:
Step 1: Decide what text you want to display
You almost certainly want each line of the Multiview display to show the name (possibly in an
abbreviated form) of a parameter whose value you want to display. Bear in mind that:
Text cannot exceed 11 characters.
The display leaves a space between the text and value.
The value is displayed as a number without any units. You may wish to include the units as
part of the text.
Step 2: Find the location IDs of the parameters

1. In the menu system, find the parameter you want.
2. Press the a-key to display the location identification number.
3. Note down that number.
4. Repeat this for the other parameters.
795X Op Man/DB
Page 11.75
MULTI-PAGE MULTI-VIEW
Step 3: Open the Multi-view configuration menu
Look for the Multi-view configuration data within the following menu: < Configure>/<Multi-view>
Step 4: Entering the text and location ID for each line
1. Select whichever page (1 - 5) you want to configure.
2. Select whichever line (1 - 4) you want to configure.
3. Enter the text you require.
4. Enter the parameter (location ID) you require.
Note that after the location ID is entered, the display changes to show the name of the parameter.
Step 5: Set the text width
The text width is the number of characters you want the text to occupy. If you want to set the text
width:
1. Go to the Text width menu.
2. Edit the value
Page 11.76
795X Op Man/DB
Chapter 12 Routine operation (Data maps)
12. Routine operation (Data maps)

12.1 Viewing the data
The tables on the following pages show that part of the menu structure which you use to carry
out routine tasks such as checking results or changing units of measurement.
12.1.1
Flow Rates and Totals
The following menu structure is for routine work:

Main Menu
Flow rates
Flow totals
Level #1
Level #2
Level #3
Corr vol flow rate
Corrected vol rate
Mass flow rate
Mass rate
Base vol flow rate
Base volume rate
Energy flow rate
Energy rate
Ind vol flow rate
Indicated vol rate
Conversion factor
Conversion factor
Corrected factor
Correction factor
Forward totals
Corr vol total
Corr volume total
Mass total
Mass total
Base vol total
Base vol total
Energy total
Energy total
Ind vol total
Ind. vol total
Rev corr vol total
Rev corr vol total
Rev mass total
Rev mass total
Rev base vol total
Rev base vol total
Rev energy total
Rev energy total
Rev ind vol total
Rev ind. Vol total
Nett corr vol total
Nett corr vol total
Net mass total
Net mass total
Net base vol total
Net base vol total
Net energy total
Net energy total
Net ind vol total
Net ind. vol total
USonic rev totals
USonic net totals
Alarm total
Alarm total
Meter err total
Main meter err total
Key:
Lightly shaded areas indicate that a data location is present at that level.
Heavily shaded areas indicate that no further levels exist for this route.
795X Op Man/AA
Page 12.1
12.1.2
Line density, Base density and Specific gravity

Main Menu
Line density
Level #1
Base density / SG
Level #2
Level #3
Prime line density
Prime line density
Selected density
Line dens selected
Line density A
Line density A
Line density B
Line density B value
Dens % comparison
Line dens comp value
DensA txdr reading
Line densityA sensor
DensA txdr reading
Line densityB sensor
Density limits
High limit
Line density HI lmt
Low limit
Line density LO lmt
Value comp limit
Line density cmp lmt
Percent comp limit
Line dens % cmp lmt
High limit
Low limit
Value comp limit
Percent comp limit
High limit
1
1
1
1
Low limit
Value comp limit
Percent comp limit
1
1
1
Line Z
Line density ZLine
Base Z
Line density ZBase
Molecular mass
Line mass of gas
Prime base density
Prime Base Density
Prime SG
SG prime value
Selected Base dens
Base dens selected
Selected SG
SG selected
Base density A
Base density A value
Base density B
Base density B value
Dens % comparison
Base dens comp value
SG A
SG A Value
SG B
SG B Value
SG % comparison
SG comparison value
Limits
Base dens limits
SG limits
Base dens of air
Base density of Air
Relative density
RD Value
Base Z
Base density ZBase
Line Z
Base density ZLine
Molecular mass
Base mass of gas
Key:
Notices:
1. The next level features a data location.
Page 12.2
795X Op Man/AA
12.1.3
Temperature, Pressure and Energy

Main Menu
Temperature
Level #1
Level #2
Line temperature
Line temperature
Density A temp
Density A temperature
Density B temp
Density B temperature
Base temperature
Absolute zero
Limits
Line temperature
Density A temp
Density B temp
Pressure
High limit
Low limit
Step limit
High limit
Low limit
Step limit
High limit
Low limit
Step limit
Line temp at sensor
DensA temp reading
Dens tempA value
DensB temp reading
Dens tempB value
High limit
Low limit
Step limit
Line pressure
Line pressure
Atmos. pressure
Base pressure
Base pressure value
Limits
Line pressure
Diff press hi lmt

Raw gas data
Line temp reading
Atmos pressure
Energy
Note
Base temp value
Absolute zero
Sensor readings
Level #3
High limit
Low limit
Step limit
Diff press high lmt
Energy Value
Methane
Methane
Ethane
: etc
Argon
C6+ mode
New gas compos.
Ethane
Argon
C6+ mode
Gas data update
Key:
Notices:
795X Op Man/AA
Page 12.3
12.1.4
Smaller Topics

Main Menu
Level #1
Custom application
Password
Time
Level #2
Notice
Special eq.1 value
Special equation 1
Special eq.2 value
Special equation 2
Enter password
Time and date
Time and date
Set cycle time
Target cycle time
Actual cycle time
Actual cycle time
System idle time
System idle time
Software version
Software version
Tag number
Tag number
Key:
Notices:
1. The name of this data location may be different.
Page 12.4
795X Op Man/AA
12.2 Checking the performance of the 795X

If you want to check that the external connections are working properly, the Health Check facility
can help you. It shows, for each external connection:
the name of the input or output

the value of the data
the units for the data
whether the data is live or set
If the data is live but the value appears to be unusually high or low, this may be because the
external connection is not working properly.
12.2.1
Health check
Health check has the following menu structure:

Main Menu
Health check
Part 1 of 2
Level #1
Flowmeter inputs
Level #2
Turbine
Orifice
Ultrasonic
Linear
Time period inputs
Analog inputs
Turbine Pulses
Turbine Errors
Turb indic. Vol K
Turbine error dev.
DP Value
Selected DP cell
Ultrasonic freq.
Ultrasonic pulses
Ultrasonic errors
U/S indic. Vol K
U/S error dev.
Linear value
Linear error dev.
Time period input 1
Time Period I/P 2
Time period input 2
Time Period I/P 3
Time period input 3
Time Period I/P 4
Time period input 4
Analog input 1
Analog in 1 value
Analog input 2
Analog in 2 value
Analog input 10
Analog in 10 value
Status inputs
Status inputs
Analog outputs
Analog output 1
Analog out 1 value
Analog output 2
Analog out 2 value
Analog output 8
Status outputs
Status outputs
User alarms
Alarm state:ABIJXY
Note
Turbine freq.
Time Period I/P 1
795X Op Man/AA
Level #3
: :
Analog out 8 value
Page 12.5
Health Check Menu: Part 2 of 2

Main Menu
Level #1
Normalise gas data
Level #2
Level #3
Methane
Norm Methane
Ethane
Norm Ethane
:
Argon
Norm Argon
Live inputs
Note
Carbon dioxide
Nitrogen
Cv/m
Chromat Cv
Flowmeter details
Orifice details
Ultrasonic details
Totals
Standard
Maintenance
Chromat
HART inputs
Beta
Orif dischar coeff
Orif expand factor
Vel of approach
Reynolds number
Corr pipe diameter
Corr orifice diam
Pressure loss
Mass rate K factor
Pressure ratio
Direction
Meter factor calc.
Line water content
Water corr. factor
Forward incs
USonic rev incs
USonic net incs
Alarm inc
Meter err inc
Totals
Increments
Chromat status
Chromat status
Enable/Disable
Chromat Enable
Chromat poll count
Chromat poll count
HART board status
HART software ver
HART No. of links
HART status
HART 1 value
HART input 1 value
HART 2 value
HART input 2 value
:
: :
HART 8 value
:
:
: :
HART input 8 value
Key:
Page 12.6
795X Op Man/AA
Notices:
2. The next level features a data location for showing the increment of a total.
3. Further levels exist before reaching data locations.
795X Op Man/AA
Page 12.7
12.3 Printed reports

This section explains how the 795X can print a variety of reports about the state of the system.
12.3.1
Types of report
There are many types of report:
Report name
(as displayed)
Content of report
Current report
This shows settings and values of up to 20 data locations that have been
set-up in a user-defined list.
Alarm report
Current contents of the Historical Alarm Log.
Event report
Current contents of the Historical Event Log
Alarm Archive
The Alarm trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving)
Manual Archive
The Manual trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving)
Daily Archive
The Daily trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving)
Interval Archive
The Interval trigger Archive. (See Chapter 9 for details of Archiving)
Reports can be enhanced to include more information. Refer to Chapter 9 for a guide on
available enhancements.
12.3.2
Printing a report
Reports have to be printed out individually. Each print request involves selecting a report name
(description) from a fixed list of all reports. The contents of that report is then transmitted
through a serial communications ports that has been set-up for printing.
The World security level prevents everyone from requesting a report to be printed. All other
levels can be used to request any of the reports that are listed above. To find out about how to
change security level, refer to the Security section in Chapter 11.
How to print a report using the front panel keyboard

1. Ensure that at a serial communications port is configured for printing and the port is suitably
connected to either an ASCII printer or a PC running a terminal emulation program.
2. Press the PRINT MENU key.
3. Select the menu: <Print report>
4. Change the option (value) to one of the report descriptions in the fixed list.
5. Watch the output on appear either on the Printer or PC.
Page 12.8
795X Op Man/AA
How to print a report by other methods

Method #1: MODBUS
1
A remote instrument can manipulate data locations in the 795X through a MODBUS network
link to a serial communications port.
1. Ensure that at least one serial communications port is configured for printing and the port is
suitably connected to either an ASCII printer or a PC (running some kind of terminal
emulation program).
2. Transmit a MODBUS write command to the 795X.
The command should result in changing the present value of the Print Report location to a
value from the following table:
Value
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Report Selected
None
Current report
Historical Alarm Log report
Historical Event Log report
Alarm Archive report
Manual Archive report
Daily Archive report
Interval Archive report
Chapter 7 features worked examples of

supported MODBUS commands that can be
very easily adapted for this purpose.
It will be necessary to know the location
number of Print Report for part of the
command sequence. This can be done by
pressing the PRINT MENU key, searching
the menu structure and then, once found,
pressing the a-key.
3. Watch the output on either the printer or a PC.
Method #2: Status Input (Direct)

A Status Input (#2 by default) can be used by an external system to request a print-out of the
Current report.
1. Ensure that at least one serial communications port is configured for printing and the port is
suitably connected to either an ASCII printer or a PC (running some kind of terminal
emulation program).
2. Ensure that the Status Input is suitably wired to the system that will activate it.
It is possible to modify some attributes of a Status Input:
(a) Logic sense: Choose between Positive Logic (default) or Negative Logic
(b) Mode: Choose between Non latched (default) or Latched
See menu: <Configure>/<Status Inputs> or equivalent for the software release.
3. Test by activating the Status Input.
It is possible to allocate this remote print function to another Status Input but care is needed to
avoid a clash with another function. See menu: <Configure>/<Status inputs>
Solartron has a supervisory system, known as M.C.S. that can, if set-up to do so, perform a variety of measurement and control
functions including manipulating locations in a 795x.
795X Op Man/AA
Page 12.9
12.3.3
Some Typical Reports

(a) Current report with two listed parameters
CURRENT REPORT
================
Tag number
HB5X1510
Software Version
1510 Iss 4.20
Indicated vol rate
200.000 m3/hour SET
Ind volume total
4039565.849
m3
******************** END OF REPORT ********************
(b) Historical Alarm Logger report with one alarm

ALARM LOGGER REPORT
======================
Tag number
HB5X1510
Software Version
1510 Iss 4.20
21/05/1998 13:30:31 OFF * Power fail SYSTEM

20/05/1998 17:17:39 ON * Power fail SYSTEM
******************** END OF REPORT ********************
(c) Historical Event Logger report with one event

EVENT LOG REPORT
================
Event List:
---------14/05/1998 16:46:25 USER, Input channel 1 *
New: 0.000 % SET
Old: 25.000 % SET
---------Tag number
HB5X1510
Software Version
1510 Iss 4.20
Power fail time
20/03/1999 17:17:39
******************** END OF REPORT ********************
Page 12.10
795X Op Man/AA
12.4 Giving your 795X a tag number

If you have more than one 795X you may want to give each instrument a tag number so that, in
printed reports for example, you know which one the report refers to.
To allocate an identifier:
1. Select the Tag number option on the Main Menu.
2. Press the b-key. The cursor shifts to the left of the screen.
3. Key in the identifier you want. This over-types any existing identifier.
4. Press the b-key again. The new details shift back to the right of the display.
795X Op Man/AA
Page 12.11
Page 12.12
795X Op Man/AA
Chapter 13 Routine maintenance and fault-finding
13. Routine maintenance and fault finding

13.1 Cleaning the instrument
You can use a cloth or sponge and water clean the outside of the instrument. Do not use caustic
cleaning agents or abrasive materials.
13.2 Fault finding

Although the instrument is designed to be extremely reliable it is possible that faults may arise at
some time or another. The fault-finding charts show the most likely faults and explain how to
trace their causes and put them right. If you cannot cure a fault yourself, contact your supplier or
the manufacturers for help.
NOTE:
This chapter does not deal with faults caused by incorrect configuration of
the instrument. If you want to find out more about configuration, refer to
Chapters 10 and 11.
Using the Health Check

The 795x Health Check facility provides a method of displaying a variety of measurement
parameters, including time period inputs, analogue inputs and status inputs and outputs. This can
be used as a diagnostic aid if the system seems to be faulty.
795x Op Man / BC
Page 13.1
PROBLEM:
A reading from
a transmitter is
not displayed
Has it
ever been
displayed
?
NO
Check the field wiring

against the wiring
schedule
Is the
transmitters
field wiring
correct
?
NO
YES
YES
The field wiring

is faulty
Is the
transmitter
receiving power
from the
795x
?
Wire the transmitter

up according to the
wiring schedule
NO
795xs Connector/
Power Supply Board
is probably faulty
Change the
Connector Board
NO
The transmitter or
its configuration
is probably faulty
Refer to the
transmitters manual
for more information.
NO
Correct the
configuration
Replace the field

wiring to the
transmitter
YES
Is the
transmitter
sending current
to the 795x
?
YES
Is
the 795x
configured
correctly
?
YES
The 795xs input
circuit is probably
faulty
Replace the 795xs

Connector/Power
Supply Board
Fault-finding chart 1: No reading from a transmitter
Page 13.2
795x Op Man / BC
Take great care during this procedure because the

power supply must be ON when you carry it out.
PROBLEM:
The display is blank
Is the
power to
the 795x
ON
?
NO
Turn the power ON
YES
Has
the fuse
in the 795x
blown
?
YES
NO
Adjust the voltage so

that it is within spec
YES
NO
Is the
security LED
on the 795x
lit
?
Is the
795xs supply
voltage within
spec
?
NO
Replace the fuse by

one of the correct
rating
795xs Connector/
Power Supply Board
is probably faulty
Replace the 795xs

Connector/Power
Supply Board
The 795xs Display

Module is probably
faulty
Replace the 795xs

Display Module
YES
Fault-finding chart 2: The display is blank
795x Op Man / BC
Page 13.3
Page 13.4
795x Op Man / BC
Chapter 14 Removal and replacement of parts
14. Removal and replacement of parts

14.1 Front Panel Assembly
Front Panel
Assembly
Switch panel
and bezel
Display
Display
cable
PL1
Display fixing screws

and washers (4 off)
Processor
Board
PL2
Bezel fixing
screws (4 off)
Case
Removing the Front Panel Assembly

1. Undo and remove the four screws which secure the Bezel to the case. Withdraw the Front
Panel Assembly to the limits of the connecting wiring then lay it on top of the case.
2. Partially withdraw the Processor Board then disconnect the two connectors from the
Processor Board. The Front Panel Assembly is now free.
3. Replace all items by reversing this procedure. Take great care to ensure that the cables are
not pinched on re-assembly.
14.2 Display
1. Remove the Front Panel Assembly as explained in Section 14.1.
2. Undo and remove the four screws and washers which attach the display to the Front Panel
Assembly.
3. If required, unplug the ribbon cable from the display.
4. Replace all items by reversing this procedure.
7951 Op Man/BC
Page 14.1
14.3 Switch Panel

Switch
Panel
Key
switch
Switch Panel
fixing nuts and
washers (4 off)
Switch
cable
Bezel
Display
and cable
Spring
clip
Display fixing screws

and washers (4 off)
Removing the Switch Panel Assembly
1. Remove the Front Panel Assembly as explained in Section 14.1

2. Undo the four screws and washers which attach the display to the bezel. Remove the display.
3. Un-solder the flexi cable from the key switch. Remove the spring clip from the switch then
withdraw the switch from the case.
4. Undo and remove the four nuts and washers which attach the Switch Panel to the bezel. Lift
the Switch Panel away.
5. Replace all items by reversing this procedure.
Page 14.2
7951 Op Man/BC
14.4 Processor Board
Switch panel
cable
PL1
Switch Panel
and Bezel
Mother
Board
Display
cable
Processor
Board
PL2
Power Supply
Board
Removing the Processor Board and Power Supply Board

2. Pull the Processor Board forwards so that it disengages from the connector at the back of the
case. Withdraw the board from the case.
14.5 Power supply board

2. Pull the Power Supply Board forwards so that it disengages from the connector at the back of
the case. Withdraw the board from the case.
14.6 Connector Board

1. Remove the Rear Panel Assembly as described in Section 14.9.
2. Remove the Mother Board as explained in Section 14.10.
3. Unscrew the threaded hexagonal spacers on top of the Connector Board, then lift the
Connector Board off the studs.
7951 Op Man/BC
Page 14.3
14.7 Fuse
2. Slide the Power Supply Board out of the case.
3. Referring to the diagram, find the fuse and gently prise it out of the fuse holder.
4. Press the replacement fuse into the fuse holder. Make sure that the fuse is of the correct type
and rating as specified in Chapter 14.
5. Replace all items in the reverse order of removal. Take great care to ensure that the cables
are not pinched on re-assembly.
Top of
instrument
case
Fuse
Socket
SK1
Rear
Panel
Power
Supply
Board
Mother
Board
Where to find the fuse on the Power Supply Board
Page 14.4
7951 Op Man/BC
14.8 Back-up battery

1. Ensure that the unit is disconnected from all power supplies.
2. Ensure that a new battery and a thin edged, non-conductive implement are within easy
reach.
3. Undo the six captive screws which attach the front panel assembly to the case.
4. Carefully lift the front panel assembly away from the case.
5. Undo the yellow and green Earth lead from the panel. Do not undo the connecting ribbon
cables.
6. Locate the back-up battery on the Processor Board.
7. Referring to the diagram below, use a non-conductive implement to gently lever the battery
upwards from near the rear of the clip. As soon as the battery lifts up a small amount, gently
ease the battery in a horizontal direction away from the holder and the clip. Keep the battery
in contact with the clip.
DO NOT LIFT UP THE CLIP MORE THAN
NECESSARY TO MOVE THE BATTERY.
8. Keep the battery in contact with the clip until you are prepared to insert a new one.
When the clip loses contact with the battery, there is a maximum of 10 seconds before all
configuration and database information is lost.
9. Once prepared, remove existing battery and then slide the new one under the clip and into the
holder - observing the polarity symbols. Complete this action within 10 seconds.
10. Replace all items in the reverse order of removal.
Part of
Processor
Board
Battery
Clip/
contact
Battery
holder
Where to find the back-up battery on the Processor Board
7951 Op Man/BC
Page 14.5
14.9 Rear Panel Assembly

It is strongly recommended that in order to ensure continued compliance to EMC
directives, you do not attempt to remove the rear panel assembly, but return the
instrument to your nearest Solartron Service Centre.
The instructions given below should only be carried out if it is absolutely necessary.
Processor
Board
Rear Panel
Assembly
fixing screws
(4 off)
Power Supply
Board
Mother
Board
Removing the Rear Panel Assembly

2. Pull the Processor Board forwards so that it disengages from the connector at the back of the
case. Withdraw the board from the case.
3. Pull the Power Supply Board forwards so that it disengages from the connector at the back of
the case. Withdraw the board from the case.
4. Remove the four screws which secure the Rear Panel Assembly into the case.
5. Withdraw the Rear Panel Assembly from the case, taking care not to bend the metal spring
clips on the top and bottom of the Connector Board.
not pinched on re-assembly, and ensure that the metal clips are not bent or damaged.
Page 14.6
7951 Op Man/BC
14.10 Mother Board

It is strongly recommended that in order to ensure continued compliance to EMC
directives, you do not attempt to remove the rear panel assembly, but return the
instrument to your nearest Solartron Service Centre.
1. Remove the Rear Panel Assembly as described in Section 14.9.
2. Referring to the diagram, undo and remove the six screws and washers which fix the Mother
board to the rest of the Rear Panel Assembly.
3. Using a straight pull, carefully lift the Mother Board clear of its four connections to the
connector board. The Mother Board is now free.
not pinched on re-assembly, and ensure that the metal clips are not bent or damaged.
COMPLETE ASSEMBLY
DISMANTLED ASSEMBLY
Screws and
washers
Mother
Board
Threaded
spacers
Connector
Board
Plain
spacers
Rear
Panel
Rear
panel
Earth stud
and fixings
Removal of the Mother Board and Connector Board
7951 Op Man/BC
Page 14.7
Page 14.8
7951 Op Man/BC
Chapter 15 Assembly drawing and parts list
15. Assembly drawing and parts list

15.1 What the drawing and parts list tell you
The drawing and parts list show those parts of the 7951 which you can obtain as spares. To
identify an item:
1. Find the item on the appropriate assembly drawing
2. Note the Item Number by the side of it.
3. look up the Item Number on the parts list. The parts list tells you:
the Part Number for the item
a description of the item
the quantity of the item that appears on the drawing.
15.2 How to obtain spare parts

You can obtain spare parts from the supplier from whom you bought the instrument or from the
manufacturers (Solartron). In either case, you must state on your order:
your name, address and telephone or fax number

a description of the parts you want
the part numbers of the items you are ordering
the quantity of each item.
7951 Op Man/BB
Page 15.1
Diagram for identifying and ordering spares
Page 15.2
7951 Op Man/BB
Item no.
Part number
Description
79513701
Instrument case
79513703
Bezel
79511206
Display assembly
79510503
Motherboard assembly
79510505
79510504
Connector board assembly (Klippon connectors)

Connector board assembly (D-type connectors)
1
1
79513702
79513702
Rear Panel (Klippon connectors)

Rear panel (D-type connectors)
1
1
79513705
Switch panel (with cable)
376100160
Keyswitch and retainer
79510502
Processor board
10
79510501
Power supply board
11
411129010
M3 crinkle washer
14
12
79513710
15-way cable
13
410031010
M3 hexagonal full nut
14
400001930
M4 thumb nut
15
410031020
M4 hexagonal full nut
16
411029020
M4 plain washer
17
412011420
Nylon spacer: 3.5mm ID x 8mm long
18
41530070
Hexagonal spacer: M3 x 13mm long
19
406803060
M3 x 6mm pan-head screw
20
411129020
M4 crinkle washer
21
406902460
M3 x 8mm pan-head screw
22
360106230
2 Amp glass fuse
23
800400380
Lithium battery CR2330
7951 Op Man/BB
Quantity
Page 15.3
Page 15.4
7951 Op Man/BB
Chapter 16 HART, SMART and the 7951
16. HART, SMART and the 7951

This Chapter is a comprehensive guide for understanding how the 7951 can be set-up for digital
communications with SMART type field transmitters.
Important Notice
This Chapter is only relevant to 7951s with the HART add-on board
installed. Contact Solartron for up-to-date details of 7951 upgrade options.
16.2 Introduction to SMART and HART with the 7951
A special add-on board is required to be installed inside the 7951 before this facility is enabled.
This board provides all the necessary hardware and firmware support for the 7951 to
communicate as a Current Input Device (Primary Master) on two separate networks (two-wire 420mA loops) of SMART field transmitters (Slaves).
Warning!! Each network loop must have no more than five SMART field transmitters
connected at any one time. Exceeding this number will damage add-on
boards.
The following safe area only diagram shows two HART network loops with the maximum
number of SMART field transmitters connected. In practice, far fewer transmitters are used.
Take note of the warnings - above and below. Section 16.3 has details of external wiring
involving the 7951.
T1
a
HART 1 Value
0.125
Live
T2
T3
T4
T5
T4
T5
HART Channel 1
HART Channel 2
T1
T2
T3
Warning!! Connecting up SMART transducers has to be done with great care. Powering-up
more than one point-to-point configured transmitter on a HART network loop can
produce an electrical current (20mA per transmitter) that can damage the 7951.
A SMART transmitter is said to be intelligent because it contains a micro-processor that provides extra functionality. This may
take various forms, such as on-board calculations, handling multiple sensors, combining types of measurement. measurement
integrity indicators, and so on. SMART is also used for the ability to re-use existing field wiring.
Solartron part number is 79517
7951 Op Man/AC
Page 16.1
**
The communications standard for each network loop is the HART Protocol . A full technical
discussion of this standard is outside the scope of this operating manual. There is a detailed
discussion of the HART protocol in the Rosemount booklet entitled HART Field
Communications Protocol - A Technical Description. However, particularly important aspects
involving the 7951 are covered in later section as they are needed.
Gas Application Software is able to request data from dynamic variables that are kept and
maintained by a SMART transmitter. These dynamic variables can be thought of as being very
much like 7951 type data locations. Four dynamic variables per SMART field transmitter can
be requested. A total of eight dynamic variables can be input to the 7951. Configuration details
concentrate on setting up the 7951 to obtain up to eight (the maximum) measurement values.
795x HART Inputs
HART
Transmitter
HART
Transmitter
Variables
Variables
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Secondary
Third
Third
Fourth
Fourth
Address = 1
Address = 9
HART 1
HART 2
HART network loop 1

HART 3
HART 4
HART 5
HART 6
**
HART network loop 2
HART 7
HART
Transmitter
HART
Transmitter
HART 8
Variables
Variables
Primary
Primary
Secondary
Secondary
Third
Third
Fourth
Fourth
Address = 1
Address = 8
This is an acronym for Highway Addressable Remote Transducer. HART is a registered trademark of the HART
Communication foundation.
Implementation conforms to revision 5.5 of the HART protocol specification.
Page 16.2
7951 Op Man/AC
16.3 Connecting the 7951 to a HART network loop

This section covers installation issues for analogue input wiring involving the 7951.
16.3.1 7951 Electrical connections and impedance requirements
HART connections use analogue inputs 5 and 6 for HART network loops 1 and 2 respectively.
The HART add-on board provides the hardware support for these two additional analogue inputs.
795x
24V d.c. (Isolated supply)
"SMART"
Field
Transmitter
Analogue input Signal +
Active
impedance
Note:
To ensure reliable
operation, it is good
practice to ground
the 0V d.c. isolated
supply at one point.
100 Ohms
Analogue input Signal 0V d.c. (Isolated supply)
SMART Analogue input on the

HART add-on board (Internally powered)
Every analogue input on the 795x utilises a internal 100 current sense resistor. The circuitry for
the SMART analogue inputs (on the HART add-on board) use a 100 current sense resistor in
series with an active impedance. The total impedance is then sufficient for reliable operations at
HART signal frequencies, while minimising the d.c. voltage drop across the 795x terminals. This
allows a sufficient voltage at the field transmitter even when powered through I.S. Barriers (or
Isolators).
Parameter notes:
1. At d.c., the voltage drop at the maximum current of 22mA is 3.4V
2. Minimum impedance in the HART extended frequency band (500 -10khz) is 330
3. Maximum impedance in the HART extended frequency band (500 -10khz) is 480
HART network loop 1 (Analogue input 5):

Pin function
24V d.c. (isolated supply)
Analogue input signal +
Analogue input signal 0V d.c. (isolated supply)
7951 Op Man/AC
Klippon
Pin no.
PL9/1
PL9/2
PL9/3
PL9/4
Klippon Pin
Designation
24V pwr+
Ana ip 5 +
Ana ip 5 24V pwr-
D-Type
Pin no.
SK8/12
SK8/9
SK8/10
SK8/13
D-Type Pin
Designation
+24V dc
Ana ip 5 +
Ana ip 5 0V dc
Page 16.3
HART network loop 2 (Analogue input 6):

Pin function
24V d.c. (isolated supply)
Analogue input signal +
Analogue input signal 0V d.c. (isolated supply)
16.3.2
D-type
Pin no.
PL9/5
PL9/6
PL9/7
PL9/8
D-type Pin
Designation
24V pwr+
Ana ip 6 +
Ana ip 6 24V pwr-
Klippon
Pin no.
SK8/24
SK8/14
SK8/15
SK8/25
Klippon Pin
Designation
+24V dc
Ana ip 6 +
Ana ip 6 0V dc
Frequency-shift keying
The HART protocol uses the American Bell 202 standard frequency-shift keying (F.S.K.)
method to mask a digital signal on to analogue wiring.
Important Notice
The HART add-on board can be used with the Extra I/O add-on board at the
same time. This combination provides 2 off Analogue inputs 5 and 6.
However, the F.S.K. signal produces random errors on the analogue signal
which affect the normal accuracy (See Appendix C).
Solartron strongly recommend that analogue inputs, being used for HART loop
inputs, should only be used for HART communications.
16.3.4
Cable choice and the 65s rule

There is a standard 65s rule that determines the maximum length of cable that can be used
for reliable operation of the HART network loop .
Step 1: Add up all the resistance in the network loop.
7951 current sense resistance - this is equivalent to 350 with the HART addon board.
I.S. Barrier or Isolator
Cable
Step 2: Find out the total cable capacitance

Step 3: Multiply the total resistance * total cable capacitance.
The resulting value must be less than 65s.
Solartron can provide multi-pair cable that has a maximum capacitance of 115 pF/m. The
following table shows the recommended maximum cable lengths for typical HART network
loops with this cable.
No. of
slaves
1
1
1
2
2
Page 16.4
Loop
resistance
No Barrier
150
300
No Barrier
150
Max. Cable
length
1171m
884m
713m
1136m
846m
7951 Op Man/AC
300
No Barrier
150
673m
300
No Barrier
150
633m
593m
5
5
300
No Barrier
150
300
553m
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
1101m
807m
1067m
769m
1032m
730m
Table notes:
1. Cable length calculations take into account the 350 resistance from a 7951 with the
HART Board.
2. It is assumed that a 150 I.S. Barrier has a maximum end to end resistance of 185
3. It is assumed that a 300 I.S. Barrier has a maximum end to end resistance of 340
A discussion of cable choices can be found in the Rosemount booklet entitled HART
Field Communications Protocol - A Technical Description.
Important Notice:
Field transmitters in hazardous areas
Always follow wiring instructions provided by manufacturers of the field
transmitters.
7951 Op Man/AC
Page 16.5
16.4
Configuring the 7951 to use a HART network loop

Two methods are provided for configuring with the key-pad (on the front panel). Do not use the
second method unless you are experienced with configuration using the menus.
16.4.1
Configuring by using the software wizard (Recommended)

This sub-section covers step-by-step instructions for using a software wizard to configure a
7951 that has the following set-up:
Example 1
A HART network loop with one SMART static pressure field transmitter is attached to
analogue input 5. The objectives of this example are:
- to set a multi-drop address

- get static pressure from the fourth dynamic variable (on the transmitter) into the first
HART data location dedicated to holding input values
- allocate the first HART data location to the Line pressure calculation
Go to the wizard
selection menu
1. Press the MENU key so that page 1 of the main menu appears.
2. Use the DOWN-ARROW key until the Configure main menu
option is displayed.
3. Press the d key to select the Configure option
4. Press the a key twice.
Select the Hart

inputs wizard
5. Press the b key and then use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll
through a list of wizards.
6. Press the b key when Hart inputs appears on the display.
Select the 7951

HART data
location
7. Press the d key to answer yes to the prompt.
Choose the HART

network loop
8. HART 1 PhyLinkNo is set to HART link 1 by default. This

example involves HART network loop 1 (aka HART link 1) so
there is no need to change the setting.
However, If anything other than HART link 1 is shown:
Press the b key and then use the DOWN-ARROW key to
scroll through the options.
Press the b key when HART link 1 is displayed.
9. Press the ENTER key to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Choose the
address of the
Field transmitter
10. Press the b key

11. Use the DOWN-ARROW key to scroll through the options until
HART address 5 is shown.
12. Press the b key to confirm this selection
Page 16.6
7951 Op Man/AC
Choose the fourth

dynamic variable
14. Press the b key

Fourth variable is shown.
Choose the type

of dynamic
variable
18. Press the b key

Static press (G) is shown.
Put the field

transmitter on-line
22. Press the b key

On line is shown.
Monitor the
response from
issuing the online/off-line
command,
26. Watch the response message. It should cycle from None to

Configured in less than a minute.
Note : The response SMART error may appear if there is there
is a problem with the HART network loop.
Change status to
get live values
from the field
transmitter
28. Press the d key

Live is shown.
30. Press the b key to confirm this selection. Live static pressure
values (gauge units) should now be displayed.
Skip remaining
questions
32. Press the c key to answer no to the prompt.

33. Repeat step 32 until the Hart inputs wizard is completed.
Allocate the HART

data input
location
34. Use the Pressure wizard to make data location HART value 5
the source for the Line pressure calculation.
Note: During the Pressure wizard, Line press input chl
should be set to HART input 5
7951 Op Man/AC
Page 16.7
16.4.2
Configuring without using a Wizard

Task 1: Identify the dynamic variables for the 7951
This task involves a complete check-list of all the data locations associated with configuring
HART network loops.
Step 1: Find this menu: <Configure>/<Transmitter detail>/<HART Inputs>
There is a sub-menu (menu option) for each dynamic variable that can be held by
the 7951. Every sub-menu has the same set of configurable data locations:
Step 2: Proceed through this data location check-list for each required variable.
Data name
(as displayed)
HART link no.
HART address
HART variable
HART variable type
HART command
HART response
Average mode
Instructions
This identifies the HART network loop.
Choose one of these options:
(1) HART Link 1 for HART network loop 1
(2) HART Link 2 for HART network loop 2
This uniquely identifies the SMART field transmitter on the
identified HART network loop.
* Set HART address 0 for Point-to-point mode.
* Multi-drop mode addresses range from 1 to 15.
This identifies the measured variable that is required from
that SMART field transmitter.
Choose one of these options:
(1) Primary variable, (2) Secondary variable
(3) Third variable or (4) Fourth variable
This identifies the type of dynamic variable.
Choose one
of the following options:
(1) Static press (Abs)
(2) Static press (G)
(3) Diff pressure
(4) Temperature
(5) Mass rate
(6) Density
There are two selectable commands:
(1) On line - puts the field transmitter on-line
(2) Off line - takes the field transmitter off-line
This shows an interpretation of the response, from a field
transmitter, following a HART command selection.
Responses are as follows:
(1) Configure
- field transmitter is now on-line
(2) Un-configure - field transmitter is now off-line
(3) SMART error - connection problem
(4) SPI error
- HART board comms. problem
(4) None
- no response or no HART board
Choose between mean and SMR.
Task 2: Define use of the dynamic variable

This task involves a allocating a HART data location to a measurement task. Taking Line
pressure as an example, below is a check-list of all the data locations associated with setting up
Line pressure to use SMART transmitter data values.
Example: Line Pressure
Step 1: Find the menu : <Configure>/<Transmitter detail>/<Pressure>
Page 16.8
7951 Op Man/AC
Step 2: Proceed through this data location check-list

Data name
(as displayed)
Line pressure
Line press input chl
Line press 100%
Line press 0% value
Line press high lmt
Line press low lmt
Line press step lmt
Line press FB type
Line press FB value
7951 Op Man/AC
Instructions
Change status to be Live. Default state is Set
Choose the option of HART
Define the upper limit for Line pressure before a limit

alarm is raised.
Default limit is set to 0.000 bar abs (i.e. in-active)
Define the lower limit for Line pressure before a limit alarm
is raised.
Use this to raise an alarm if the difference between the
present good reading and the previous good reading
exceeds this limit.
Choose what happens to Line pressure when a limit alarm
is raised. Choose one of these options:
(1) None - Status of Line pressure to Fail
(2) Last good value
(3) Fallback value - See below
Define a fallback value to copied to Line pressure if a limit
alarm is raised and the fallback type is set to Fallback
value.
Page 16.9
16.5
Post configuration - viewing HART data

This sub-section provides a complete check-list of all the data locations associated with
checking information returning from HART network loops.
Task 1: Checking the results
Step 1: Find this menu: <Health check>/<HART Inputs>
Step 2: Look at data shown in this check-list
Data name
(as displayed)
Instructions
HART 1 value
HART 2 value
HART 3 value
HART 4 value
HART 5 value
HART 6 value
HART 7 value
HART 8 value
HART software ver
HART no. of phy links
HART status
16.6
Values from eight dynamic variables
HART board firmware identification.

This shows the number of HART network loops. Default
setting is None
This shows a digit for each of the eight HART data
location inputs:
Digit = 0 - Input is not configured (not in use)
Digit = 1 - Input is configured (in use)
Digit = 2 - Input configuration failed due to an error
Default state is 00000000
SMART units of measurement

Support is provided for a sub-set of the SMART units of measurement
Temperature
1. Deg.C.
2. Deg.F
3. Kelvin
Density
1. g/cc
3
2. g/m
3. lb/gallon (UK)
3
4. lb/ft
5. Kg/litre
6. g/litre
3
7. lb/in
Pressure
Mass rate
1. In WG
2. mm WG
3. Bar
4. mBar
5. Pa
6. MPa
7. In HG
1. g/sec
2. g/Min
3. h/Hour
4. Kg/sec
5. Kg/Min
6. Kg/day
7. Tonnes/Min
8. Tonnes/Hour
9. Tonnes/Day
10. Lb/sec
11. Lb/Hour
12. Lb/Day
Note : Data values received in un-supported measurement units are displayed without units of
measurement - line 3 of the display is blank. However, calculations that use this data
always assume the default units of measurement. For temperature data, this would be
Deg.C.
Page 16.10
7951 Op Man/AC
Appendix A Glossary
Appendix A Glossary
A
ADC
See Analogue to digital converter
Address
A number which uniquely identifies a location.
Alarm
An indicator which shows when a failure has occurred.

Alarms are classified as System, Input or Limit.
API
American Petroleum Institute
Analogue input
An input where information is received in analogue form.
Analogue output
An output from which information is transmitted in

analogue form.
Analogue to digital converter
A circuit that converts analogue voltages or currents into

digital (usually binary) numbers which can then be
processed by computers. The digital signal gives the
amplitude of the analogue signal at a particular instant.
See also Digital to analogue converter.
B
5
Bar
A unit of pressure. 1 bar = 10 Nm .
Base condition
Base or Standard Conditions give the volume which

would have been transferred if the temperature were at a
pre-defined figure. The actual values for base
temperature and pressure vary from country to country.
Base density
Density of a fluid measured under base conditions.
British Thermal Unit
The energy required to raise the temperature of one

pound of water through one degree Fahrenheit.
BTU
See British Thermal Unit.
795x Op Man / AC
Page A.1
Appendix A Glossary
C
Calibrate
To assess the performance of an item of equipment

against that of another one whose accuracy is known.
Calibration certificate
Each transducer is calibrated before it leaves the factory.

The details (together with the transducers serial
number) are recorded on a Calibration Certificate.
Calibration constant
Among the information given on the calibration certificate

are some constants (unique to that transducer) which
compare the transducers actual performance against a
standard. The signal converter must know these
constants before it can calculate accurate results.
The constants are designated: K0, K1, K2, and so on.
Calorific value
The energy content of a substance (usually a gas).
Chassis earth
In a large installation where the chassis and

instrumentation are earthed separately, this is the dirty
earth to which instrument chassis are connected.
Checksum
In data transmission, a checksum is a number which is

added to a string of data and whose value is related to
that data. It is used to check that the data has been
transmitted accurately.
Configuration
1. The setting up of an instrument (by entering data,

setting fallback values, setting alarms, and so on) so
that it works according to your requirements.
2. The method by which transducers and other inputs
and outputs are physically connected to the 7950
Signal Converter
Conventional pipe prover
This has a volume between detectors that permits a

minimum accumulation of 10,000 direct (unaltered)
pulses from the meter under test.
Covimat
A rotational viscometer produced by Solartron.
Crystal factor
A multiplying factor which accounts for the difference

between the actual frequency of a particular crystal and
its theoretical frequency.
CV
See Calorific value
Page A.2
795x Op Man / AC
Appendix A Glossary
D
DAC
See Digital to analogue converter
Damping
Suppressing the oscillations in a vibrating body or

medium.
Degree API
Used in the petroleum industry to describe the density of

petroleum products. A degree API is given by:
o
141.5/(SG at 60 F) - 131.5
Values lie within the range -1 to +101, the larger the
number the lighter the oil.
Degree Baume
A unit on an arbitrary scale which can be converted into

actual SG values. Used when describing the sugar
content of aqueous solutions.
Degree Brix
A unit on an arbitrary scale which can be converted into

actual SG values. Used when describing the sugar
content of aqueous solutions.
Density
The measured density of the fluid in a pipeline.
The difference in pressure at two points in a pipeline.
Digital to analogue converter
A circuit that converts digital signals into analogue

equivalents. See also Analogue to digital converter.
Download
To send data or programs to another (usually subsidiary)

instrument. (Opposite of Upload).
DP
See Differential pressure
E
EMC
Electro-Mechanical Compatibility
Event
A change in the system operation. Events may be

caused by the user (such as setting a parameter or
changing the security) or by alarms (if, for example, a
fallback is invoked when the system fails).
External connection
A generic term which covers: inputs, outputs, power

supplies and serial communications; in short, anything
connected to the 7950.
795x Op Man / AC
Page A.3
Appendix A Glossary
F
Fallback mode
A description of the system when it is using a Fallback

value.
Fallback value
A value used as a temporary substitute for a parameter

when a live input which is used to calculate the
parameter fails.
Flow computer
An instrument which monitors flow rates and densities of

gases and liquids. It does this by communicating with
transmitters such as pressure, temperature, level, flow,
density and analytical instruments. These
measurements are then corrected for temperature,
pressure and velocity of sound.
FS
Full scale.
Full composition
The composition of a gas used in calculating energy and

compressibility.
H
Hazardous area
An area where there is a risk of fire or explosion.
Health check
a check that all inputs and devices connected to the

795x are operating normally.
Hg
The chemical symbol for the element Mercury.
Historical log
A log of every alarm received by the 795x.
I
Instrumentation earth
In a large installation where the instrumentation and

chassis are earthed separately, this is the clean earth
to which the instrumentation is connected.
Interrogate
To ask another part of a system to supply information.
J
J
See Joule.
Joule
The unit of work. 1J = 1N/m .
Page A.4
795x Op Man / AC
Appendix A Glossary
K
K-factor
The K-factor relates the output from a flow meter to a

specific set of units. For volume output meters such as
turbines, it is often quoted as pulses per meter cubed.
Kinematic viscosity
The ratio of the dynamic viscosity of a fluid to its density.
L
LED
See Light-emitting diode.
Light-emitting diode
A diode which light up when current flows through it.

LEDs are usually used as indicator lights on
instruments.
Limit
Limits are upper and lower values between which a

measured parameter is expected to be. If the parameter
is outside these limits, it can trigger an alarm if you have
set the system to do so.
Live
A value is live if it can be altered automatically as a result

of some internal calculation or transducer input. (See
also: Set.)
Location
An area of computer memory where data is stored.

Information can be written to it from the keyboard, a
remote computer, or automatically by the sensors.
Location ID
A number which uniquely identifies a location.
M
Mass flow rate
The rate at which a given mass of fluid flows through a

transducer.
Mode
The operational state of the instrument.
Monitor
To keep a constant check on the status of a system or

process.
Multiples of numbers
T
M
m
Multiview
A user-defined display which can show up to four lines of

information of your choice. Typically, each line
comprises text (such as a parameter name) and a value
for the parameter.
795x Op Man / AC
tera
mega
milli
12
10
6
10
-3
10
G
k
m
giga
kilo
micro
10
3
10
-6
10
Page A.5
Appendix A Glossary
P
Pa
See Pascal.
Pascal
The unit of force. 1 Pa = 1N/m
Percent mass
The percentage that the mass of a substance has

compared to the total mass for a mixture of substances
of which it is a part.
Periodic time
The duration of one cycle of a wave-form, equal to the

inverse of the frequency.
Platinum resistance thermometer
A highly-accurate thermometer, based around a coil of

very pure platinum wire, which is extremely stable over
time. It can be used instead of an analogue input to the
signal converter or flow computer.
POST
See Power-on self test.
Power-on self test
A standard routine which an item of equipment goes

through when it is powered up to make sure that it is
operating correctly. The progress of the test is usually
shown on the instrument display.
Protect ground
Another name for Chassis earth.
PRT
See Platinum resistance thermometer.
Pressure
The measured pressure of the fluid in the pipeline.
Primary variable
A variable (such as time or distance) which is directly

measured.
psi
Pounds per square inch. Imperial units of pressure.
Pulse output
An output of single pulses, sent to equipment such as

pulse summators or electro-mechanical totalizers.
PV
See Primary variable
Page A.6
795x Op Man / AC
Appendix A Glossary
Q
R
Radio frequency interference
Interference from sources which transmit at radio

frequencies; that is, frequencies in the range of about
100kHz to about 300GHz.
Reynolds number
A dimensionless constant given by

Where:
Re =
vl vl
=
v = fluid viscosity
l = length
= kinematic viscosity
= density
RFI
See Radio frequency interference
RS232
An international standard for serial data transmission. It

specifies voltage levels, timing and control.
S
Saybolt viscosity
A viscosity measured using methods developed by the

Saybolt company. It is obtained by timing how long the
fluid takes to flow out of a cup through a hole of known
size. The viscosity is expressed in units of time.
Security code
A code or password which a user must key in before

being allowed access to all or part of a system.
Sensor
Another name for a transducer.
Set
A value is SET if it is keyed in by the user and does not

change unless the user changes it. (See also: Live.)
Set-up routine
A procedure for setting up or configuring a system.
SG
See Specific gravity
Signal converter
A device which converts one signal into another. Its

main use is in quality measurement systems such as
brewing where the output is used by a control or
monitoring system.
Specific gravity
The mass per unit volume of a fluid.
795x Op Man / AC
Page A.7
Appendix A Glossary
Standard condition
See Base condition
Status
The condition of part of a system; for example, whether it

is on, off, and so on.
Status display
A display which summarises the contents of the

Historical log and gives an indication of the current
status of the system.
T
Temperature
The measured temperature of the fluid in the pipeline.
Temperature correction
Solartron transducers are designed to work at 20C. A

correction must be applied when working at other
temperatures.
Text descriptor
Text which you can enter into the signal converter.

Typically, this is a parameter name when you configure
Multiview.
Therm
Unit of heat. 1 therm is the heat required to raise 1000

pounds of water through 100F.
Transducer
A device which converts a physical quantity (such as

temperature or pressure) to a voltage or some other
electrical quantity that can be measured and analysed.
U
Unit ID
Upload
To receive data or programs from another instrument.

(Opposite of Download).
V
Viscosity
In a liquid, the resistance to that force which tends to

make the liquid flow.
Volume flow rate
The rate at which a given volume of fluid flows through

the system.
VOS
Velocity of Sound
Page A.8
795x Op Man / AC
Appendix A Glossary
W
Wizard
One of the standard configurations whch you can

select instead of configuring the 795x from scratch. You
can edit the resulting configuration to meet your
requirements.
Wobbe index
A measure of the amount of heat released by a gas

burner of constant orifice. It indicates the quality of the
gas and is given by the expression
1
2
Where: V = the gross calorific value in BTU per cubic

foot at STP and = specific gravity.
795x Op Man / AC
Page A.9
Appendix A Glossary
Page A.10
795x Op Man / AC
795x Op Man / AC
Name
Type
Wiring schedule
Connector
& pin no.
Pin
Pin
Barrier
Connector
& pin no.
795x
Instrument
Wiring
colour
Signal
Comments
Sheet
of
Appendix B Blank wiring schedule
Page B.1
Page B.2
795x Op Man / AC
795x Op Man / AC
Name
Type
Wiring schedule
Connector
& pin no.
Pin
Pin
Barrier
Connector
& pin no.
795x
Instrument
Wiring
colour
Signal
Comments
Sheet
of
Page B.3
Page B.4
795x Op Man / AC
Appendix C Technical data for the 7951

C.1
What this Appendix contains

List of different types of connections you can make to 7951
Technical Specification
Connection diagrams and tables
Earthing arrangements
C.2
You can make the following types of external connections to the 7951:
INPUTS
Analogue
Inputs from devices which monitor continuously

changing parameters and transmit analogue
signals. These include:
PRTs (PT100)
temperature transducers (0/4-20mA)
pressure transducers (0/4-20mA)
differential pressure transducers (0/4-20mA)
viscosity transducers (E.g. Solartron Covimat

(0/4-20mA)
calorimeters (0/4-20mA).
Pulse
Inputs from devices which transmit information as

pulses. For example, a turbine (or positive
displacement) flowmeter.
Time period
Inputs from devices where the frequency of the

transmitted signal is related to the parameter
being measured. These include:
density transducers (Solartron 7835 or 7826)
base density transducers
viscosity transducers (Solartron 7827).
Status
7951 Op Man/BG
One of two levels, to show the state of some part

of the system, such as whether a valve is open or
closed.
Page C.1
OUTPUTS
Analogue
Outputs from the signal converter to those devices

(such as chart recorders) which require analogue
outputs (0/4-20mA).
Pulse
For equipment such as pulse summators or

electro-mechanical totalizers (open collector).
Status
Outputs to equipment whose status is to be

changed as, for example, an output which opens
or closes a valve (open drain).
Serial
communications
For receiving and sending information to other

devices linked to 7951. These include:
Printers
Host computers
Master or slave 7951s, Chromatographs, etc.
Power supplies
Inputs
d.c. only
Outputs
d.c. only. These provide power within the 7951

and to some other external devices such as
transducers.
Isolation
notes
The isolation between the enclosure and all DC

power inputs, signal inputs and signal outputs is:
50VDC continuously OR
125VDC for less than 15 seconds.
Consequently, isolation between any two signal
lines and any DC power line is:
100VDC continuously OR
250VDC for less than 15 seconds.
Page C.2
7951 Op Man/BG
C.3
Maximum number of external connections

The table below lists the maximum number of external connections which you can make to a
single 7951.
Type of connection
Maximum number
Standard
Additional with
option card 79516
Additional with
option card 79517
Klippon
D-type
Klippon
D-type
Klippon
D-type
Analogue (Non-SMART)
HART Analogue (SMART)
Pulse
Time period
Status
16
Analogue
Pulse
Status
16
RS232
RS232/485
Inputs
Outputs
7951 Op Man/BG
Page C.3
C.4
Specification
General
Environmental
EMC
Operating temperature
0 to +50 deg. C
Storage temperature
-20 to +70 deg. C
Relative humidity
Up to 90% non-condensing
Bump
BS 2011 test Eb
Vibration
Instrument subjected to resonance

frequencies ranging from 10Hz to 200Hz at
1g over a 10 hour period.
Emissions
EN 50081-1: 1992
(Light industrial environment)
Immunity
EN 50082-2: 1995
(Industrial environment)
Safety
BS EN 61010-1 (1993)
Enclosure
IP50 from the front panel,

only when mounted.
Dimensions
Height
101mm
Width
197mm
Depth
257mm
Weight
2.5kg
Type
Klippon multi-way connector system for all

signals except communications. Separate
9-way D-type connectors for
communications.
Options
D-type rear panel. 5x25-way D-type for all

connections except communications and
power. Separate 9-way D-type connectors
for communications. 4-way Klippon
connector for power.
Page C.4
7951 Op Man/BG
Inputs
Analogue
Pulse
Time period
Status
7951 Op Man/BG
4-20mA input accuracy

without HART active
0.008% of full scale at 25 C 0.001%/ C
4-20mA inputs (5 & 6)

accuracy with HART active
0.1% of full scale at 25 C 0.001%/ C
4-20mA input resolution
Better than 4 parts per million
PT100 accuracy
0.05C 0.01 C/ C
PT100 resolution
Better than 0.02C
PT100 energisation
<1mA average
(Meets BS1904 & IEC751, <1mW in the PT100)
Long term drift
<20ppm per 1000 hours for first 1000 hours,

subsequently far less
Quantity
4 off, each selectable as PT100 or 4-20mA
Scan time
60ms per channel
Options
With option card 79516 fitted:

(for additional 4-20mA inputs)
Klippon-type rear panel: 4 off
D-type rear panel:
6 off
Frequency range
DC to 4kHz; minimum pulse width 125ms
Input trigger level

Quantity
0.5V RMS (1.2V p-p)

Klippon rear panel: 1 single/dual-pulse turbine.
D-type rear panel: 2 single/dual-pulse turbine
Options
None
Range
100ms to 5000ms
Accuracy
30nS
Resolution
2ns at 1kHz for 1-second sample
Input trigger level
0.5V RMS (1.2V p-p)
Quantity
Options
None
Type
Polled
Trigger voltage
5V to 24V opto-isolated
Poll period
Maximum 250ms
Quantity

D-type rear panel:
8 off
Page C.5
Options

(for additional status inputs)
D-type rear panel:
8 off
Base board device accuracy

(12-bit)
0.075% of full scale (24mA) +/- 0.0075%/ C
Base board device resolution
1 part in 3500
Long term drift
<20ppm per 1000 hours for first 1000 hours,

subsequently far less
Quantity
Update time
0.1s minimum, software dependent
Options

(for additional analogue outputs)
D-type rear panel:
4 off
Special Notices
1. The maximum load impedance that the

analogue outputs can drive is 1K Ohms. This
must include any barrier impedance and the
load itself.
Outputs
Analogue
2. Analogue outputs are Active Loops.

(Active loops are powered by the device
providing the current output. Passive loops
are powered externally, usually by the device
receiving the current)
Pulse
Status
Page C.6
Output type
Open-collector Darlington drivers
Maximum current
200mA per output at 24V with maximum 50%

duty
Maximum frequency
10Hz
Quantity

D-type rear panel:
5 off
Options
None
Type
Output 1 uses relay (24V DC/30V AC @

250mA), all others use open drain (100mA each
at 24V)
Update rate
Software controlled
Quantity

D-type rear panel:
9 off
7951 Op Man/BG
Prover
interface
Options

(for additional status outputs)
D-type rear panel:
8 off
Type
Fleeting contact ball detectors (opto-isolated)
Minimum pulse width for

detection
10mS
Quantity
2 (can also be used as extra status inputs)
Options
None
Communications
Port 1
Port 2
Port 3
SMART transmitter
communications
Physical layer
RS232 full duplex
Max. baud rate
19K2
Handshake
XON/XOFF
Physical layer
RS232 full duplex or RS485 half duplex
Max. baud rate
19K2
Handshake
XON/XOFF and/or RTS/CTS
Physical layer
RS232 full duplex or RS485 half duplex
Max. baud rate
19K2
Handshake
XON/XOFF and/or RTS/CTS
Number of loops
None on base board
Options
2 loops of Rosemount HART using

analogue inputs 5 and 6
Hardware facilities
Keyboard interface
7951 Op Man/BG
Number of keys
30
Key scan time
2ms
Debounce
14ms
Options
None
Page C.7

Display
Real-time clock
Battery monitor
Alarm annunciation
Security
Number of lines
Characters per line
20
Backlight
LED, continuously powered
Contrast
software selectable, temperature

compensated
Options
None
Accuracy
Better than 1 second per day
Power
Replaceable Lithium button cell
Options
None
Type
ADC, indicates battery condition
Options
None
Quantity
3 (one each for Input, System or Limit

alarms)
Type
Red LED
Operation
Flash indicates new alarm condition.

Steady indicates accepted alarm.
Options
None
Mechanisms
Options
1. Switch located on front panel

2. Software code
Bi-colour LED on the front panel:
1. RED: Not secured
2. GREEN: Secured
3. ORANGE: Part-secured
None
Program storage
1 Mbyte FLASH, field upgradeable
Data storage
768 Byte battery-backed. Battery life is

typically 2 years if instrument is unpowered or 5 years if powered.
Indicator
Memory
16kB FRAM non-volatile store for

calibration data
Options
Page C.8
None
7951 Op Man/BG
Power Supplies
21V-30V dc. 35W maximum. 2A
worst-case start-up current
Input
Output
7951 Op Man/BG
General instrumentation
energisation
1 x 24V nominal at 800mA
Turbine energisation
Switchable voltages of 8V or 16V,

current limited to 120mA
DAC energisation
Isolated 25V output at 200mA
Options
None
Page C.9
C.5
Connections
SK1
Pin 9
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 25
Pin 25
Pin 25
Pin 25
Pin 25
SK2
Pin 9
Pin 1
SK3
Pin 9
Pin 1
Pin 4
Pin 1
SK4
PL1
SK5
SK6
SK7
SK8

Pin
PL1
Com 1 Tx
Com 2 Tx
Com 3 Tx
Supply -
Com 1 Rx
Com 2 Rx
Com 3 Rx
Supply +
SK1
SK2
SK3
Com 2 Rx/Tx+ Com 3 Rx/Tx+
Com 0V
Com 0V
Com 0V
Com 2 CTS
SK5
SK6
SK7
SK8
Stat ip 1
Stat op 2
Stat ip 2
Stat op 3
Turb 1 +
Ana op 1
PRT 3 pwr +
Turb 1 -
Ana op 2
Stat ip 3
PRT 3 sig +
Stat op 4
Turb 2 +
Ana op 3
Stat ip 4
PRT 3 sig -
Stat op 5
Turb 2 -
Ana op 4
PRT 3 pwr -
Stat ip 5
Stat op 6
Turb 3 +
Ana op 5
PRT 4 pwr +
Stat ip 6
Stat op 7
Turb 3 -
Ana op 6
PRT 4 sig +
Com 3 CTS
Stat ip 7
Stat op 8
Turb 4 +
Ana op 7
PRT 4 sig -
Turb 4 -
Ana op 8
PRT 4 pwr -
6
7
SK4
Com 2 RTS
Com 3 RTS
Stat ip 8
Stat op 9
Com 2 Rx/Tx-
Com 3 Rx/Tx-
Stat ip 9
Stat op com
Stat ip com
Pulse op 1
Turb pwr +
Ana op com
Pulse op 2
Turb pwr +
Ana op com
10
11
Ana ip 5 +
Ana ip 5 -
12
Alarm NO
Pulse op 3
Turb pwr -
Ana op com
13
Alarm com
Pulse op com
Turb pwr -
Ana op com
0V dc
14
Stat ip 10
Stat op 10
Den 1 +
PRT 1 pwr +
Ana ip 6 +
15
Stat ip 11
Stat op 11
Den 1 -
PRT 1 sig +
Ana ip 6 -
16
Stat ip 12
Stat op 12
Den 2+
PRT 1 sig -
Ana ip 7 +
17
Stat ip 13
Stat op 13
Den 2 -
PRT 1 pwr -
Ana ip 7 -
18
Stat ip 14
Stat op 14
Den 3+
PRT 2 pwr +
Ana ip 8 +
19
Stat ip 15
Stat op 15
Den 3 -
PRT 2 sig +
Ana ip 8 -
20
Stat ip 16
Stat op 16
Den 4+
PRT 2 sig -
Ana ip 9 +
21
Stat ip 17
Stat op 17
Den 4 -
PRT 2 pwr -
Ana ip 9 -
22
Stat ip 18
Stat op com
+24V dc
Ana op com
Ana ip 10 +
23
Stat ip com
Pulse op 4
+24V dc
Ana op com
Ana ip 10 -
Pulse op 5
0V dc
Ana op com
+24V dc
Pulse op pwr
0V dc
Ana op com
0V dc
24
25
Page C.10
Alarm NC
+24V dc
7951 Op Man/BG
SK1
Pin 1
Pin 9
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 1
Pin 10
Pin 10
Pin 10
Pin 10
Pin 10
Pin 10
Pin 10
Pin 10
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
PL7
PL8
PL9
SK2
Pin 1
Pin 9
SK3
Pin 1
Pin 9
Pin 4
Pin 1
PL1
7951 Back Panel: Klippon version
Pin
PL1
Com 1 Tx
Com 2 Tx
Com 3 Tx
Supply -
Com 1 Rx
Com 2 Rx
Com 3 Rx
Supply +
Com 0V
Com 0V
Com 0V
Com 2 CTS
Com 3 CTS
Com 2 RTS
Com 3 RTS
Com 2 Rx/Tx-
Com 3 Rx/Tx-
SK1
SK2
Com 2 Rx/Tx+
SK3
Com 3 Rx/Tx+
Pin
PL2
PL3
PL4
PL5
PL6
PL7
PL8
PL9
Stat op 2
Pulse op +ve
Turb A ip+
Den 1 ip +
Ana op 1
PRT 1 pwr +
PRT 3 pwr +
24V pwr +
Stat op 3
Pulse op 1
Turb A ip -
Den 1 ip -
Ana op 2
PRT 1 sig +
PRT 3 sig +
Ana ip 5 +
Stat op 4
Pulse op 2
Turb B ip +
Den 2 ip +
Ana op 3
PRT 1 sig -
PRT 3 sig -
Ana ip 5 -
Stat op 5
Pulse op 3
Turb B ip -
Den 2 ip -
Ana op 4
PRT 1 pwr -
PRT 3 pwr -
24V pwr -
Stat op 6
Pulse op com
Turb pwr +
Den 3 ip +
Ana op 5
PRT 2 pwr +
PRT 4 pwr +
24V pwr +
Stat op 7
Stat ip 1
Turb pwr -
Den 3 ip -
Ana op 6
PRT 2 sig +
PRT 4 sig +
Ana ip 6 +
Stat op com
Stat ip 2
Stat ip 5
Den 4 ip +
Ana op 7
PRT 2 sig -
PRT 4 sig -
Ana ip 6 -
NO alarm
Stat ip 3
Stat ip 6
Den 4 ip -
Ana op 8
PRT 2 pwr -
PRT 4 pwr -
24V pwr -
Com alarm
Stat ip 4
Stat ip 7
24V pwr +
Ana op com
Ana ip 7 +
Ana ip 8 +
24 V pwr +
10
NC alarm
Stat ip com
Stat ip 8
24V pwr -
Ana op com
Ana ip 7 -
Ana ip 8 -
24V pwr -
7951 Op Man/BG
Page C.11
C.6 Earthing
In addition to earthing the chassis, (described in Chapter 5), you may have to make extra earth
connections in some cases, depending on the installation requirements.
The types of connection can be split into three groups, each of which has different earthing requirements.
The groups are:
Group 1 (non-isolated power supply):
Serial communications ports

Pulse outputs
Status outputs
Group 2 (isolated power supply):
Status inputs
Group 3 (isolated power supply):
Analogue inputs
Frequency inputs
Analogue outputs
The diagrams on the next two pages shows you how to earth the external connections.
Page C.12
7951 Op Man/BG
Pin 10
PL9
Pin 1
Analogue Power Pin 10
PL5
Pin 1
Density Power -
Group 3
Pin 10
Connect external earths as

required.
PL4
Pin 1
Turbine Power -
Internal Isolated Supply
ANALOGUE
OUTPUTS
PL6
Pin 1
Pin 10
Internal Isolated Supply
STATUS
INPUTS
PL3
Group 2
Pin 10
Pin 1
No earthing is required
for Status Inputs
Opto-isolator common only
PL2
Pin 10
Pin 1
STATUS
OUTPUTS
Status Outputs Common
PULSE
OUTPUTS
PL3
Pin 10
Pin 1
Pulse Outputs Common
Protect Ground
Pin 9
Group 1
SERIAL
PORT
SK3
Chassis and instrumentation

are earthed together
unless you cut the link
Pin 1
Protect Ground
Common
Pin 9
SERIAL
PORT
SK2
Pin 1
Common
Protect Ground
Pin 9
SERIAL
PORT
SK1
Pin 1
Common
Link
Chassis
Earth
Earth
stud
PL2
E E 0v +24V
DC Power
Earthing arrangements for the 7951 (Klippon connectors)
7951 Op Man/BG
Page C.13
Analogue Power Protect Ground

Pin 25
SK8
Pin 1
Density Power -
Protect Ground
Group 3
Pin 25
SK6
Connect external
earths as
required.
Pin 1
Turbine Power Protect Ground
Pin 25
SK7
Pin 1
Analogue o/p
Common
Protect Ground
Group 2
Pin 25
SK4
STATUS
INPUTS
No earthing is
required for Status
Inputs
Pin 1
Opto-isolator common only
Pulse Output common
Protect Ground
Pin 1
PULSE
and
STATUS
OUTPUTS
Pin 25
SK5
Status Output common
Protect Ground
Pin 9
Group 1
Chassis and instrumentation
are earthed together unless
you cut the link
SERIAL
PORT
SK3
Pin 1
Protect Ground
Common
Pin 9
SERIAL
PORT
SK2
Common
Pin 1
Protect Ground
Pin 9
SERIAL
PORT
SK1
Common
Pin 1
Link
Chassis
Earth
Earth
stud
PL1
E E 0v +24V
DC Power
Earthing arrangements for the 7951 (D-type connectors)
Page C.14
7951 Op Man/BG
Earthing requirements for group 1 connections only

In general, the earthing arrangements are different for large and small installations. (A small
installation may possibly consist of just one instrument.)
If the 7951 is part of a large installation with separate earths for chassis
and instrumentation:
In this case you may (depending on the overall system requirements)
earth the 7951 chassis and instrumentation separately by cutting the
link on the connector board.
If the 7951 is on its own or in a small installation with one common earth
for chassis and instrumentation:
In this case you must leave the link intact so that the chassis and
instrumentation are earthed to the same point.
Top of
instrument
case
Link
Socket
SK1
Rear
Panel
Processor
Board
Mother
Board
Where to find the link on the connector board
7951 Op Man/BG
Page C.15

The status inputs do not have to be earthed because the circuitry contains only opto-electrical
components.

These depend on what sort of installation you have and the environment in which it operates. You
therefore have to decide what earthing arrangements you need. It is likely that this group has to
be earthed at a zener barrier earth. For further information, refer to the documentation for the
external devices which are connected to the installation.
Page C.16
7951 Op Man/BG
Appendix D Units and conversion factors

The figures in the following table are taken from BS 350: Part 1: March 1974.
Parameter
Imperial units
Metric equivalent
Length
1 inch
25.4 mm
1 foot
0.3048 m
1 lb
0.45359237 kg
Mass
1 ton
Density
Pressure
1016.05 kg
3
1 lb/ft
16.0185 kg/m
1 lb/gal
99.7763 kg/m
1 lb/US gal
119.826 kg/m
1 lb/in
68.9476 mbar
1 atm
1.013250 bar
1 MPa
10 bar
1 N/m
10 bar
-5
-3
1 mm Hg (0 )
1.33322 x 10 bar
-3
1 in Hg (0 )
Volume or capacity
1 in
1 ft
Volume flow
Mass flow
Energy
33.8639 x 10 bar
16.8371 cm
0.0283168 m
1 gal
4.54609 dm
1 US gal
3.78541 dm
1 US barrel
0.158987 m
1 ft /min
40.776 m /day
1 gal/min
6.5463 m /day
1 lb/hr
10.886 kg/day
1 ton/hr
1016.05 kg/hr
1 BTU
1.05506 kJ
1 kWh
3.6 MJ
1 therm
105.506 MJ
Temperature
(1.8 x C) + 32
Viscosity (dynamic)
1P
0.1 Pa s
1 lbf/(ft s) or 1 pdl s/ft
Viscosity (kinematic)
1.48816 Pa s
1 slug/(ft s) or 1 lbf
2
s/ft
47.8803 Pa s
1 St
1 cm /s
1 ft /s
795x Op Man / AC
9.29030 dm /s
Page D.1
Page D.2
795x Op Man / AC
Appendix E Data tables

E.1 The tables
Note: The equations used to derive these tables are given in Section E.2.
Density/temperature relationship of crude oil

3
Temp.(C)
Density (kg/m )
60
738.91
765.06
791.94
817.15
843.11
869.01
894.86
920.87
946.46
55
742.96
768.98
794.93
820.83
846.68
872.48
898.24
923.95
949.63
50
747.00
772.89
798.72
824.51
850.25
875.94
901.80
927.23
952.82
45
751.03
776.79
802.50
828.17
853.81
879.40
904.96
930.50
956.00
40
755.05
780.68
806.27
831.83
857.36
882.85
908.32
933.76
959.18
35
759.06
784.57
810.04
835.48
860.90
886.30
911.67
937.02
962.36
30
763.06
788.44
813.79
839.12
864.44
889.73
915.01
940.28
965.53
25
767.05
792.30
817.54
842.76
867.97
893.16
918.35
943.52
968.89
20
771.03
796.18
821.27
846.38
871.49
896.59
921.68
946.77
971.85
15.556
774.56
799.57
824.59
849.60
874.61
899.62
924.63
949.64
974.65
15
775.00
800.00
825.00
850.00
875.00
900.00
925.00
950.00
975.00
10
778.95
803.83
828.72
853.61
878.50
903.41
928.32
953.23
978.15
782.90
807.65
832.42
857.20
882.00
906.81
931.62
958.45
981.29
786.83
811.46
836.12
860.79
885.49
910.21
934.92
959.66
984.42
Density/temperature relationship of refined products

3
Density (kg/m )
Temp.(C)
60
605.51
657.32
708.88
766.17
817.90
868.47
918.99
969.45
1019.87
55
610.59
662.12
713.50
769.97
821.49
872.00
922.46
972.87
1023.24
50
615.51
666.91
718.11
773.75
825.08
875.53
925.92
976.28
1026.60
45
620.49
671.68
722.71
777.53
828.67
879.04
929.38
979.69
1029.96
40
625.45
676.44
727.29
781.30
832.24
882.56
932.84
983.09
1033.32
35
630.40
681.18
731.86
785.86
835.81
886.06
938.28
986.48
1038.67
30
635.33
685.92
736.42
788.81
839.37
889.56
939.72
989.87
1040.01
25
640.24
690.63
740.96
792.55
842.92
893.04
943.16
993.26
1043.35
20
645.13
695.32
745.49
796.28
846.46
896.53
846.58
996.63
1046.68
15.556
649.46
699.48
749.50
799.59
849.61
899.61
949.62
999.63
1049.63
15
650.00
700.00
750.00
800.00
850.00
900.00
950.00
1000.00
1050.00
10
654.85
704.66
754.50
803.71
853.53
903.47
953.41
1003.36
1053.32
659.67
709.30
758.97
807.41
857.04
906.92
956.81
1006.72
1056.63
664.47
713.92
763.44
811.10
860.55
910.37
960.20
1010.07
1059.93
The two tables above are derived from equations in the Revised Petroleum Measurement Tables (IP 200,
ASTM D1250, API 2540 and ISO R91 Addendum 1).
795x Op Man / AC
Page E.1
Platinum resistance law (To DIN 43 760)

C
Ohms
Ohms
Ohms
Ohms
Ohms
-220
10.41
-120
52.04
-20
92.13
80
130.89
180
168.47
-210
14.36
-110
56.13
-10
96.07
90
134.70
190
172.16
-200
18.53
-100
60.20
100.00
100
138.50
200
175.8
-190
22.78
-90
64.25
10
103.90
110
142.28
220
183.17
-180
27.05
-80
68.28
20
107.79
120
146.06
240
190.46
-170
31.28
-70
72.29
30
111.67
130
149.82
260
197.70
-160
35.48
-60
76.28
40
115.54
140
153.57
280
204.88
-150
39.65
-50
80.25
50
119.40
150
157.32
-140
43.80
-40
84.71
60
123.24
160
161.05
-130
47.93
-30
88.17
70
127.07
170
164.76
Density of ambient air (in kg/m ) at a relative humidity of 50%

Air
Pressure
Air Temperature (C)
(mb)
10
14
18
22
26
30
900
930
1.122
1.159
1.105
1.142
1.089
1.125
1.073
1.109
1.057
1.092
1.041
1.076
1.025
1.060
960
1.197
1.179
1.162
1.145
1.128
1.111
1.094
990
1.234
1.216
1.198
1.180
1.163
1.146
1.129
1020
1.271
1.253
1.234
1.216
1.199
1.181
1.163
Density of pure water (in kg/m to ITS - 90 Temperature Scale)

Temp
C
10
12
14
16
18
999.840 999.940 999.972 999.940 999.848 999.699 999.497 999.244 998.943 998.595
20
998.203 997.769 997.295 996.782 996.231 995.645 995.024 994.369 993.681 992.962
40
992.212 991.432 990.623 989.786 988.922 988.030 987.113 986.169 985.201 984.208
60
983.191 982.150 981.086 980.000 978.890 977.759 976.607 975.432 974.237 973.021
80
971.785 970.528 969.252 967.955 966.640 965.305 963.950 962.577 961.185 959.774
100
958.345
Page E.2
795x Op Man / AC
Velocity of Sound in Liquids

The values for a selection of fluids are given below. You can obtain further details from reference books
such as Tables of Physical and Chemical Constants and some Mathematical Functions by G W C Kaye
and T H Laby.
Liquid
Temperature
(t C)
Velocity of Sound
-1
( c ) ms )
Rate of Change
-1 ( c / t ms K
Acetic acid
20
1173
----
Acetone
20
1190
-4.5
Amyl acetate
29
1173
----
Aniline
20
1656
-4.0
Benzine
20
1320
-5.0
Blood (horse)
37
1571
----
Butyl acetate
30
1172
-3.2
Carbon disulphide
25
1142
----
Carbon tetrachloride
20
940
-3.0
Chlorine
20
850
-3.8
Chlorobenzene
20
1290
-4.3
Chloroform
20
990
-3.3
Ethanol amide
25
1724
-3.4
Ethyl acetate
30
1133
-3.9
Ethyl alcohol
20
1162
-3.6
Formic acid
20
1360
-3.5
Heptane
20
1160
-4.5
n-Hexane
30
1060
----
Kerosene
25
1315
-3.6
Menthol
50
1271
----
Methyl acetate
30
1131
-3.7
Methyl alcohol
20
1121
-3.5
Methylene Chloride
25
1070
----
Nitrogen
-189
745
-10.6
Nonane
20
1248
----
Oil (castor)
19
1500
-4.1
Oil (olive)
22
1440
-2.8
Octane
20
1197
----
Oxygen
-186
950
-6.9
n-Pentane
20
1044
-4.2
795x Op Man / AC
Page E.3
n-Propyl acetate
26
1182
----
Toluene
20
1044
-4.2
Turpentine
25
1225
----
Water (distilled)
10
1447.2
----
20
1482.3
----
30
1509.1
----
50
1542.5
----
-4
1430.2
----
00
1449.5
----
05
1471.1
----
15
1507.1
----
25
1534.7
----
22
1352
----
Water (sea)
o-Xylene
Page E.4
795x Op Man / AC
E.2. Equations used to derive data tables
Density/temperature relationship
The density/temperature relationship is:
t = 15 exp[ 15 t (1 + 0.8 15 t )]
where:
= density at line temperature tC (kg/m )
15
= density at base temperature 15C (kg/m )
= tC -15C (i.e. t - base temperature)
15
= tangent thermal expansion coefficient per C at base

temperature 15C
Tangent thermal expansion coefficient

The tangent thermal expansion coefficient differs for each of the major groups of hydrocarbons. It
is obtained from the equation:
15 =
K 0 + K1 15
152
where
K 0 and K1 are API factors which are obtained from the table:
Product
Density
K0
K1
Range
3
(kg/m )
Crude Oil
771 - 981
613.97226
0.00000
Gasolines
654 - 779
346.42278
0.43884
Kerosines
779 - 839
594.54180
0.00000
Fuel Oils
839 - 1075
186.96960
0.48618
Product compressibility
The definition of compressibility used to develop the table in Section 1 of the IP Petroleum
measurement Manual is the isothermal secant compressibility, defined by the equation:
795x Op Man / AC
1 V1 V2
V0 P1 P2 T
Page E.5
where
V0
= isothermal secant compressibility at

= volume of liquid at atmospheric pressure
V1
= change in volume from
V0 to V1
V2
= change in volume from
V0 to V2
V1 & V2
= volumes at pressures
P1 & P2
= gauge pressure readings (Bar)
P1 and P2 , respectively
For practical purposes, when the liquid volume changes from

changes from zero (atmospheric) to
V0 to V1 as the gauge pressure
P1 , the above equation is simplified to:
1 V1
V0 P1 T
ISO Document TC 28/SC3/N248, (Generation of New Compressibility Tables for International

Use) gives the following equations relating to the compressibility data:
log e C = 1.38315 + 0.00343804T 3.02909 log e 0.0161654T log e

and
= C 10 6 bar 1
where:
= oil temperature in C
= oil density in kg/litre at 15C
The new equation (from the API Manual of Petroleum Measurement Standards, Chapter
11.2.1M) gives (after converting to units of kg/m and bar):
= 10 e
4
where:
0.87096 10 6 4 .2092 t 103

+
1.62080 + 0.00021592 t +
215
215
bar 1
= temperature in C
r15
= density (in kg/m ) at 15C and at atmospheric pressure
This equation is valid for the density range of 638 kg/m to 1074 kg/m . For a density range of
3
3
350 kg/m to 637 kg/m refer to Chapter 11.2.2M in the API Manual.
Page E.6
795x Op Man / AC
Velocity of sound in liquids

The velocity of sound in dilational waves in unbound fluids is given by:
c = ( a )
where:
795x Op Man / AC
1
2
= velocity of sound
= adiabatic compressibility
= density
Page E.7
Page E.8
795x Op Man / AC
Appendix F Calculations and theory

F.1
The VOS effect on density measurements

This sub-section shows how the 795x software (version 1510) works out the velocity of sound
factors that are used for correcting line density.
Two methods are provided:1. Pressure method
This method is preferred and is for applications where live pressure measurement is
available to the 795x.
2. Specific gravity method
This is also known as the User Gas Equation Method. It is for applications where pressure
measurement is not available. Inputs of Specific Gravity and Temperature are required.
The 795x uses the same basic correction equation for both methods:
Equation F.1#1: Density with the correction for the effect of V.O.S.
Using:
Where:
2
K
* Cc
K

* C g
1 +
= 1 *
1+
= True line density (V.O.S. corrected) {Data location = Line density A}
1 = Line density (un-corrected or temperature corrected)

C c = V.O.S. of calibration gas (m/s) {See equation F.1#2}
C g = V.O.S. of measured gas (m/s)

{See either equation F.1#3a (pressure method) or F.13#b (SG method)}

4
= 2.10 * 10
for a 7812 Gas density transducer

4
795x Op Man / BB
= Periodic time of density transducer output signal (in s)
Page F.1
Also for both methods, the velocity of sound of the calibration gas is calculated by the 795x
using the following equation:
Equation F.1#2: V.O.S. of the calibration gas
Using:
C C = K A + (K B * 1 ) + K C * 12 + K D * 13
Where:
C C = V.O.S. of the calibration gas (in m/s)
1
And:
= line density (un-corrected or temperature corrected)
K A , K B , K C and K D are coefficients from the appropriate K column of

table F.1#1 (below).
795x automatically selects the appropriate value for each K coefficient by using this table.
Calibration
Gas
Density
range
Nitrogen
0-100 Kg/m
349.007
Nitrogen
0-400 Kg/m
348.994
Methane
0-250 Kg/m
442.987
Argon
0-400 Kg/m
318.079
KA
KB
KC
KD
-0.530984
E-01
-0.044632
0.595473
E-02
0.297076
E-02
0.623017
E-02
0.155044
E-03
-0.314834
E-04
-0.418178
E-05
-0.579479
0.913056
E-01
0.0
-0.2564
E-06
Table F.1#1
Notes:
The density range of the transducer is selected when configuring line density.
There is no support for other calibration gases.
Temperature is assumed to be 20 C.
Equation F.1#3a: V.O.S. of the measured gas (pure or composition) for pressure method
0 * P * 10 5
+ K 5 * 12 + K 6 * 13
1
Using:
CG =
Where:
C G = V.O.S. of the measured gas (in m/s)
1 = Line density (un-corrected or temperature corrected)

P
And:
= Line pressure (in barA)
K 5 , K 5 and 0 are constants that must be Set into the 795x.

For a pure gas, values can be taken from the appropriate columns of table F.1#2
(on page F.3).
For gas compositions these (pure gas) constants should be modified in proportion
to the volumetric fraction (percentage) of each gas component.
Page F.2
795x Op Man / BB
Gases
Molecular
Weight
Gamma
0
Air
Argon
Carbon Monoxide
Carbon diixide
Ethane
Ethylene
Helium
Heptane
Hexane
Hydrogen
Hydrogen sulphide
Methane
Nitrogen
Octane
Oxygen
Propane
Propylene
ISO-Butane
Neo-Butane
ISO-Pentane
Neo-Pentane
28.96469
39.9480
28.01055
44.00995
30.07012
28.054
4.00260
100.20557
86.17848
2.01594
34.07994
16.04303
28.01340
114.23266
31.9988
44.09721
42.081
58.12430
58.12430
72.15139
72.15139
1.677
1.395
1.290
1.194
1.243
1.664
1.054
1.063
1.407
1.320
1.307
1.400
1.048
1.397
1.132
1.154
1.097
1.095
1.077
1.076
Coefficients to enter
(for density less than
or equal to 100 Kg/m3)
K5
K6
7.21 * 10-3
6.14*10-3
-2.05*10-3
-42.66*10-3
-4.78*10-3
77.3*10-3
0
0
0
0
4.75*10-3
5.25*10-3
0
2.50*10-3
-109*10-3
-200*10-3
-2042*10-3
-2042*10-3
0
0
-54.7 * 10-6
-31.0*10-6
18.7*10-6
830*10-6
52.9*10-6
-782.4*10-6
0
0
0
0
0.824*10-6
-28.6*10-6
0
-11.08*10-6
4055*10-6
8410*10-6
0.4685
0.4685
0
0
Coefficients to enter
(for density greater
than 100 Kg/m3)
K5
K6
1.46*10-6
-0.38*10-3
-0.66*10-3
5.49*10-3
0
0
0
0
4.75*10-3
2.66*10-3
0
5.88*10-3
10.67*10-3
10.67*10-3
0
0
Approx.
VOS1
m/s
-3*10-6
2.22*10-6
8.95*10-6
6.50*10-6
0
0
0
0
0.824*10-6
-4.49*10-6
0
-6.16*10-6
-13.7*10-6
-13.7*10-6
0
0
323.0
347.4
264.2
323.0
320.0
1006.0
155.0
170.0
1297.7
305.0
442.0
349.0
144.0
329.0
250.0
256.0
214.0
211.0
188.0
187.0
Table F.1#2: Gas data and 795x coefficients for Cg (VOS calculation)
Notes:
Gas
Carbon Monoxide
Carbon dioxide
Helium
Oxygen
Propylene
Ethylene
Density range
3
0-100 Kg/m
3
0-200 Kg/m
3
0-75 Kg/m
3
0-100 Kg/m
3
0-20 Kg/m
3
0-350 Kg/m
i.e. where density could exceed 200 Kg/m use

K5 = -0.66 * 10-3 and K6 = 6.50 * 10-6
at Normal conditions.
795x Op Man / BB
Page F.3
Equation F.1#3b: V.O.S. of the measured gas (pure of composition) for S.G. method
Using:
CG =
K
*
C G1
(1 C G1) + * C
K
Where:
CG
= V.O.S. of the measured gas (in m/s)
CC
= V.O.S. of the calibration gas (in m/s)
= Periodic time of density transducer output signal (in s)

4
= 2.10 * 10
{See equation F.1#2}
for a 7812 Gas density transducer

4
And:
K3
C G1 = 1 +
+K4
SG

SG
*

0 * 293
*
273
t
+
(
)
0
g
c
Where:
= Calibration temperature
SG
= Specific gravity
[]c
[]g
= For calibration gas

= For measured gas
= Low pressure ratio of specific heats (or Gamma). (See notes below).
K 3 and K 4 are constants that must be Set into the 795x. (See notes below).
And:
Notes:
K3 and K4 are normally taken from the calibration certificate that was issued with the gas
density transducer. Alternatively, the following table has typical values that can be used.
Gas Composition
Nitrogen-Methane
Nitrogen-Methane
Argon-Methane
Density
3
10 to 60 kg/m
60 to 200 kg/m3
60 to 200 kg/m3
K3
K4
830.222
1389.4
2186.01
59.006
205.455
310.079
Ideal values for Specific Gravity can be taken from table F.1#2 (on page F.3). In
practice, the live Specific Gravity measurements may be more appropriate.
For a measured pure gas, a value for 0 can be taken from table F.1#2 (on page F.3).
For a measured composition of gas, a value for 0 can be taken from table F.1#2 (on
page F.3) but needs to modified in proportion to the volumetric fraction (percentage) of
each gas component.
Page F.4
795x Op Man / BB
Appendix G Certificate of conformity
795x Op Man/AC
Page G.1
Page G.2
795x Op Man/AC
795x Op Man/AC
Page G.3
Page G.4
795x Op Man/AC

Solatron FlowComputer - Man7951gas

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Solatron FlowComputer - Man7951gas

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

7951 Gas Flow Computer

Solartron Mobrey Limited

Issue: FC, July 2000

Solartron pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement. The

YEAR 2000 NOTICE

Solartron Mobrey Limited

158 Edinburgh Avenue,

19408 Park Row, Suite 320

A Roxboro Group Company

While carrying out this procedure you must

Electricity is dangerous and can kill.

Battery-backed Memory notice

About this manual

What this manual tells you

What this Chapter tells you

About the 7951

Physical description of the 7951

Installing the system

What this chapter tells you

The keyboard, display and indicators

What this chapter tells you

The menu system

What this chapter tells you

Serial Communications and Networking

What this Chapter tells you

Configuring the 795x to be a MODBUS slave

Database access over A MODBUS network

Database information type 1 : Data values

Alarm logger access over a MODBUS network

Alarms and Events

Introduction to 795x events

Feature: Data logging, Reporting and Archiving

Feature: Printed Reports

Selecting units and data formats

Configuring using Wizards

Configuring without using Wizards

What does this Chapter tell me?

Routine operation (data maps)

Viewing the data

Checking the performance of the 795x

Giving your 795X a tag number

Routine maintenance and fault-finding

Cleaning the instrument

Removal and replacement of parts

Front panel assembly

Assembly drawing and parts list

What the drawing and parts list tells you

HART, SMART and the 7951

What this chapter tells you

Configuring the 7951 to use a HART network loop

Post configuration - viewing HART data

Blank wiring schedule

Technical data for the 7951

What this Appendix contains

Units and conversion factors

Calculations and theory

Find out what's in this manual

Get started quickly

Get an overview of the instrument

Chapter 3 and Appendix C

Understand how the menu system works

Make connections to the instrument

Chapters 2, 4, 7 and Appendix C